PA19 • Pennsylvania Nurses 2019

Table of Contents

PA19 • Pennsylvania Nurses 2019

How to Receive Credit

NetCE 2 Hour Course #97142 • Assessment and Management of Pain at the End of Life

97142 • Assessment and Management of Pain at the End of Life

1. INTRODUCTION

2. ISSUES IN EFFECTIVE PAIN MANAGEMENT

3. ETIOLOGY

4. ASSESSMENT

5. MANAGEMENT

6. LEGAL AND ETHICAL ISSUES RELATED TO THE TREATMENT OF PAIN

7. CONCLUSION

Works Cited

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

NetCE 3 Hour Course #97541 • Child Abuse Identification and Reporting: The Pennsylvania Requirement

97541 • Child Abuse Identification and Reporting: The Pennsylvania Requirement

1. HISTORICAL CONTEXT

2. CHILD WELFARE IN PENNSYLVANIA

3. DEFINITIONS OF CHILD ABUSE AND NEGLECT

4. EPIDEMIOLOGY OF CHILD ABUSE AND NEGLECT

5. RECOGNIZING WARNING SIGNS

6. CONSEQUENCES OF CHILD ABUSE

7. REPORTING SUSPECTED CHILD ABUSE

8. CASE SCENARIOS

9. CONCLUSION

10. RESOURCES

Works Cited

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

NetCE 10 Hour Course #94900 • Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease in Adults

94900 • Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease in Adults

1. INTRODUCTION

2. DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS

3. EPIDEMIOLOGY OF GERD

4. ESOPHAGEAL COMPLICATIONS

5. PREDISPOSING AND RISK FACTORS FOR GERD

6. NATURAL HISTORY OF GERD

7. PATHOGENESIS AND PATHOPHYSIOLOGY

8. SYMPTOMS ASSOCIATED WITH GERD

9. DIAGNOSIS OF GERD

10. INITIAL MANAGEMENT OF GERD

11. MANAGEMENT OF GERD IN PATIENTS NONRESPONSIVE TO PPIs

12. ANTIREFLUX SURGERY

13. CONSIDERATIONS FOR NON-ENGLISH-PROFICIENT PATIENTS

14. CONCLUSION

Works Cited

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

NetCE 15 Hour Course #38920 • Pathophysiology: The Central Nervous System

38920 • Pathophysiology: The Central Nervous System

1. INTRODUCTION

2. THE NERVOUS SYSTEM IN HEALTH AND ILLNESS: STRUCTURAL AND FUNCTIONAL INTER-RELATIONSHIPS

3. PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE CNS

4. CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM CIRCULATION

5. PATHOPHYSIOLOGIC INFLUENCES AND EFFECTS

6. RELATED SYSTEM INFLUENCES AND EFFECTS

7. PSYCHOSOCIAL/LIFESTYLE INFLUENCES AND EFFECTS

8. THE NURSING PROCESS FOR PATIENTS WITH CNS DYSFUNCTION

9. NURSING DIAGNOSES, PLANNING, AND IMPLEMENTATION

10. CONGENITAL DISORDERS AFFECTING THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM

11. CNS DISORDERS OF MULTIFACTORIAL ORIGIN

12. DEGENERATIVE CNS DISORDERS

13. IMMUNOLOGIC CNS DISORDERS

14. INFECTIOUS AND INFLAMMATORY CNS DISORDERS

15. NEOPLASTIC AND OBSTRUCTIVE CNS DISORDERS

16. TRAUMATIC DISORDERS

17. CONCLUSION

18. CASE STUDIES

Works Cited

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

PA19 • Pennsylvania Nurses 2019

Lori L. Alexander, MTPW, ELS, MWC

Mark Rose, BS, MA, LP

www.netce.com

Copyright © 2024 NetCE, All rights reserved.

PA19 • Pennsylvania Nurses 2019

Expiration Date: 09/30/2021

How to Receive Credit

To complete this Special Offer for continuing education credit please go to http://www.netce.com/specials in your browser.

For assistance with receiving continuing education credit, please contact us at help@netce.com.

97142 • Assessment and Management of Pain at the End of Life

Lori L. Alexander, MTPW, ELS, MWC

www.netce.com

Copyright © 2018 NetCE, All rights reserved.

Because pain is frequently encountered in the palliative and hospice care environments, a knowledge of appropriate diagnosis and alleviation is vital to all members of the interdisciplinary team. A comprehensive discussion of these topics will provide the knowledge base necessary for all members of the interprofessional team to better understand the varied needs of their patients during the end-of-life period and to be better equipped to address those needs.

Table of Contents

97142 • Assessment and Management of Pain at the End of Life

Course Overview

Audience

Course Objective

Learning Objectives

Faculty

Faculty Disclosure

Division Planners

Division Planners Disclosure

About the Sponsor

Disclosure Statement

1. INTRODUCTION

2. ISSUES IN EFFECTIVE PAIN MANAGEMENT

3. ETIOLOGY

4. ASSESSMENT

5. MANAGEMENT

PHARMACOLOGIC INTERVENTIONS

NONPHARMACOLOGIC INTERVENTIONS

6. LEGAL AND ETHICAL ISSUES RELATED TO THE TREATMENT OF PAIN

PATIENTS WITH HISTORY OF SUBSTANCE ABUSE

7. CONCLUSION

Works Cited

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

97142 • Assessment and Management of Pain at the End of Life

Education Category. Ethics - Human Rights

Release Date. 11/01/2018

Expiration Date. 10/31/2021

Course Overview

Because pain is frequently encountered in the palliative and hospice care environments, a knowledge of appropriate diagnosis and alleviation is vital to all members of the interdisciplinary team. A comprehensive discussion of these topics will provide the knowledge base necessary for all members of the interprofessional team to better understand the varied needs of their patients during the end-of-life period and to be better equipped to address those needs.

Audience

This course is designed for physicians, physician assistants, nurses, social workers, and other members of the healthcare team seeking to enhance their knowledge of pain management.

Course Objective

Because pain is frequently encountered in the palliative and hospice care environments, a knowledge of appropriate diagnosis and alleviation is vital to all members of the interdisciplinary team. The purpose of this course is to provide an overview of the assessment and management of pain in the end of life, focusing on the components integral to providing optimum care.

Learning Objectives

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

1. Describe the etiology of pain at the end of life and issues in effective pain management.

2. Assess pain accurately through use of clinical tools and other strategies, including the use of an interpreter.

3. Select appropriate pharmacologic and/or nonpharmacologic therapies to manage pain in patients during the end-of-life period.

Faculty

Lori L. Alexander, MTPW, ELS, MWC, is President of Editorial Rx, Inc., which provides medical writing and editing services on a wide variety of clinical topics and in a range of media. A medical writer and editor for more than 30 years, Ms. Alexander has written for both professional and lay audiences, with a focus on continuing education materials, medical meeting coverage, and educational resources for patients. She is the Editor Emeritus of the American Medical Writers Association (AMWA) Journal, the peer-review journal representing the largest association of medical communicators in the United States. Ms. Alexander earned a Master’s degree in technical and professional writing, with a concentration in medical writing, at Northeastern University, Boston. She has also earned certification as a life sciences editor and as a medical writer.

Faculty Disclosure

Contributing faculty, Lori L. Alexander, MTPW, ELS, MWC, has disclosed no relevant financial relationship with any product manufacturer or service provider mentioned.

Division Planners

John V. Jurica, MD, MPH

Jane C. Norman, RN, MSN, CNE, PhD

Alice Yick Flanagan, PhD, MSW

James Trent, PhD

Division Planners Disclosure

The division planners have disclosed no relevant financial relationship with any product manufacturer or service provider mentioned.

About the Sponsor

The purpose of NetCE is to provide challenging curricula to assist healthcare professionals to raise their levels of expertise while fulfilling their continuing education requirements, thereby improving the quality of healthcare.

Our contributing faculty members have taken care to ensure that the information and recommendations are accurate and compatible with the standards generally accepted at the time of publication. The publisher disclaims any liability, loss or damage incurred as a consequence, directly or indirectly, of the use and application of any of the contents. Participants are cautioned about the potential risk of using limited knowledge when integrating new techniques into practice.

Disclosure Statement

It is the policy of NetCE not to accept commercial support. Furthermore, commercial interests are prohibited from distributing or providing access to this activity to learners.

1. INTRODUCTION

Unrelieved pain is the greatest fear among people with a life-limiting disease, and the need for an increased understanding of effective pain management is well-documented [1]. Although experts have noted that 75% to 90% of end-of-life pain can be managed effectively, rates of pain are high, even among people receiving palliative care [1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10].

2. ISSUES IN EFFECTIVE PAIN MANAGEMENT

The inadequate management of pain is the result of several factors related to both patients and clinicians. In a survey of oncologists, patient reluctance to take opioids or to report pain were two of the most important barriers to effective pain relief [11]. This reluctance is related to a variety of attitudes and beliefs [1,11]:

- Fear of addiction to opioids

- Worry that if pain is treated early, there will be no options for treatment of future pain

- Anxiety about unpleasant side effects from pain medications

- Fear that increasing pain means that the disease is getting worse

- Desire to be a "good" patient

- Concern about the high cost of medications

Education and open communication are the keys to overcoming these barriers. Every member of the healthcare team should reinforce accurate information about pain management with patients and families. The clinician should initiate conversations about pain management, especially regarding the use of opioids, as few patients will raise the issue themselves or even express their concerns unless they are specifically asked [12]. It is important to acknowledge patients' fears individually and provide information to help them differentiate fact from fiction. For example, when discussing opioids with a patient who fears addiction, the clinician should explain that the risk of addiction is low [1]. It is also helpful to note the difference between addiction and physical dependence.

There are several other ways clinicians can allay patients' fears about pain medication:

- Assure patients that the availability of pain relievers cannot be exhausted; there will always be medications if pain becomes more severe.

- Acknowledge that side effects may occur but emphasize that they can be managed promptly and safely and that some side effects will abate over time.

- Explain that pain and severity of disease are not necessarily related.

Encouraging patients to be honest about pain and other symptoms is also vital. Clinicians should ensure that patients understand that pain is multidimensional and emphasize the importance of talking to a member of the healthcare team about possible causes of pain, such as emotional or spiritual distress. The healthcare team and patient should explore psychosocial and cultural factors that may affect self-reporting of pain, such as concern about the cost of medication.

Clinicians' attitudes, beliefs, and experiences also influence pain management, with addiction, tolerance, side effects, and regulations being the most important concerns [1,8,11,13,14,15]. A lack of appropriate education and training in the assessment and management of pain has been noted to be a substantial contributor to ineffective pain management [11,13,15,16]. As a result, many clinicians, especially primary care physicians, do not feel confident about their ability to manage pain in their patients [11,13].

Cultural and demographic factors may also contribute to lack of effective pain management. Expression of pain and the use of pain medication differ across cultures. For example, Hispanic and Filipino patients have been shown to be reluctant to report pain because of fear of side effects or addiction [17]. Even when effective opioids have been prescribed, access may be difficult, as inadequate supplies of opioids are more likely in pharmacies in primarily nonwhite neighborhoods [18]. Communication with patients regarding level of pain is a vital aspect of caring for patients in the end of life. When there is an obvious disconnect in the communication process between the practitioner and patient due to the patient's lack of proficiency in the English language, an interpreter is required.

3. ETIOLOGY

The prevalence of pain at the end of life has been reported to range from 8% to 96%, occurring at higher rates among people with cancer than among adults with other life-limiting diseases [19,20]. Pain can be caused by a multitude of factors and is usually multidimensional, with pain frequently being exacerbated by other physical symptoms and by psychosocial factors, such as anxiety or depression [8].

4. ASSESSMENT

Pain should be assessed routinely, and frequent assessment has become the standard of care [8]. Pain is a subjective experience, and as such, the patient's self-report of pain is the most reliable indicator. Research has shown that pain is underestimated by healthcare professionals and overestimated by family members [8,21]. Therefore, it is essential to obtain a pain history directly from the patient, when possible, as a first step toward determining the cause of the pain and selecting appropriate treatment strategies. When the patient is unable to communicate verbally, other strategies must be used to determine the characteristics of the pain, as will be discussed.

Questions should be asked to elicit descriptions of the pain characteristics, including its location, distribution, quality, temporal aspect, and intensity. In addition, the patient should be asked about aggravating or alleviating factors. Pain is often felt in more than one area, and physicians should attempt to discern if the pain is focal, multifocal, or generalized. Focal or multifocal pain usually indicates an underlying tissue injury or lesion, whereas generalized pain could be associated with damage to the central nervous system. Pain can also be referred, usually an indicator of visceral pain.

The quality of the pain refers to the sensation experienced by the patient, and it often suggests the pathophysiology of the pain [8]. Pain that is well localized and described as aching, throbbing, sharp, or pressure-like is most likely somatic nociceptive pain. This type of pain is usually related to damage to bones and soft tissues. Diffuse pain that is described as squeezing, cramping, or gnawing is usually visceral nociceptive pain. Pain that is described as burning, tingling, shooting, or shock-like is neuropathic pain, which is generally a result of a lesion affecting the nervous system.

Temporal aspects of pain refer to its onset: acute, chronic, or "breakthrough." A recent onset characterizes acute pain, and there are accompanying signs of generalized hyperactivity of the sympathetic nervous system (diaphoresis and increased blood pressure and heart rate). Acute pain usually has an identifiable, precipitating cause, and appropriate treatment with analgesic agents will relieve the pain. When acute pain develops over several days with increasing intensity, it is said to be subacute. Episodic, or intermittent, pain occurs during defined periods of time, on a regular or irregular basis. Chronic pain is defined as pain that persists for at least three months beyond the usual course of an acute illness or injury. Such pain is not accompanied by overt pain behaviors (grimacing, moaning) or evidence of sympathetic hyperactivity.

"Breakthrough" is the term used to describe transitory exacerbations of severe pain over a baseline of moderate pain [22]. Breakthrough pain can be incident pain or pain that is precipitated by a voluntary act (such as movement or coughing), or can occur without a precipitating event. Breakthrough pain occurs in as many as 90% of people with cancer or in hospice settings and is often a consequence of inadequate pain management [1].

Documentation of pain intensity is key, as several treatment decisions depend on the intensity of the pain. For example, severe, intense pain requires urgent relief, which affects the choice of drug and the route of administration [8,23]. The numeric rating scale is the tool used most often to assess pain; with this tool, patients rate pain on a scale of 0 to 10 [8]. Visual analogue scales (patients rate pain on a line from 0 to 10) and verbal rating scales, which enable the patient to describe the pain as "mild," "moderate," or "severe," have also been found to be effective. Some patients, however, may have difficulty rating pain using even the simple scales. In an unpublished study involving 11 adults with cancer, the Wong-Baker FACES scale, developed for use in the pediatric setting, was found to be the easiest to use among three pain assessment tools that include faces to assess pain [24].

Functional assessment is important. The healthcare team should observe the patient to see how pain limits movements and should ask the patient or family how the pain interferes with normal activities. Determining functional limitations can help enhance patient compliance in reporting pain and adhering to pain-relieving measures, as clinicians can discuss compliance in terms of achieving established functional goals [12]. The Memorial Pain Assessment Card can be used to evaluate both the severity of pain and the effect of pain on function [8,25].

Physical examination can be valuable in determining an underlying cause of pain. Examination of painful areas can detect evidence of trauma, skin breakdown, or changes in osseous structures. Auscultation can detect abnormal breath or bowel sounds; percussion can detect fluid accumulation; and palpation can reveal tenderness. A neurologic examination should also be carried out to evaluate sensory and/or motor loss and changes in reflexes. During the examination, the clinician should watch closely for nonverbal cues that suggest pain, such as moaning, grimacing, and protective movements. These cues are especially important when examining patients who are unable to verbally communicate about pain.

5. MANAGEMENT

Strong evidence supports pain management approaches for people with cancer, but the evidence base for management of pain in people with other life-limiting diseases is weak [2,4,26,27,28,29]. Effective pain management involves a multidimensional approach involving pharmacologic and nonpharmacologic interventions that are individualized to the patient's specific situation [8].

PHARMACOLOGIC INTERVENTIONS

The pharmacologic management of pain is best achieved with use of the WHO three-step analgesic ladder, which designates the type of analgesic agent based on the severity of pain (Figure 1) [30]. Step 1 of the WHO ladder involves the use of nonopioid analgesics, with or without an adjuvant (coanalgesic) agent, for mild pain (pain that is rated 1 to 3 on a 10-point scale). Step 2 treatment, recommended for moderate pain (score of 4 to 6), calls for a weak opioid, which may be used in combination with a step 1 nonopioid analgesic for unrelieved pain. Step 3 treatment is reserved for severe pain (score of 7 to 10) or pain that persists after Step 2 treatment. Strong opioids are the optimum choice of drug at Step 3. At any step, nonopioids and/or adjuvant drugs may be helpful.

Figure 1: THE WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION'S THREE-STEP LADDER OF ANALGESIA

Source : [30]

The WHO ladder is also accompanied by five principles: prescribe analgesics according to the severity of pain (regardless of whether treatment at a previous step was carried out), use oral formulations (preferably), give analgesics at regular intervals around the clock (not on an as-needed basis), tailor the dose to the individual, and prescribe analgesics with attention to detail (document a treatment program) [30]. The pharmacologic treatment of pain involves selecting the right drug(s) at the right dose, frequency, and route, and managing side effects [8].

Nonopioid analgesics, such as aspirin, acetaminophen (Tylenol), and nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), are primarily used for mild pain (Step 1 of the WHO ladder) and may also be helpful as coanalgesics at Steps 2 and 3. Acetaminophen is among the safest of analgesic agents, but it has essentially no anti-inflammatory effect. Toxicity is a concern at high doses, and the maximum recommended dose is 3–4 g per day [8]. Acetaminophen should be avoided or given at lower doses in people with a history of alcohol abuse or renal or hepatic insufficiency [8].

NSAIDs are most effective for pain associated with inflammation. Among the commonly used NSAIDs are ibuprofen (Motrin, Advil), naproxen (Aleve, Naprosyn), and indomethacin (Indocin). There are several classes of NSAIDs, and the response differs among patients; trials of drugs for an individual patient may be necessary to determine which drug is most effective [31]. NSAIDs inhibit platelet aggregation, increasing the risk of bleeding, and also can damage the mucosal lining of the stomach, leading to gastrointestinal bleeding. There is a ceiling effect to the nonopioid analgesics; that is, there is a dose beyond which there is no further analgesic effect. In addition, many side effects of nonopioids can be severe and may limit their use or dosing.

Moderate pain (Step 2) has often been treated with analgesic agents that are combinations of acetaminophen and an opioid, such as codeine, oxycodone, or hydrocodone. However, it is now recommended that these combination drugs be avoided, as limits on the maximum dose of acetaminophen limits the use of a combination drug [8,32]. Individual drugs in combination is preferred, allowing for increases in the dose of the opioid without increasing the dose of the coanalgesic.

Strong opioids are used for severe pain (Step 3) [4,8,26,28]. Morphine, buprenorphine, oxycodone, hydromorphone, fentanyl, and methadone are the most widely used Step 3 opioids in the United States [33]. Unlike nonopioids, opioids do not have a ceiling effect, and the dose can be titrated until pain is relieved or side effects become unmanageable. For an opioid-naïve patient or a patient who has been receiving low doses of a weak opioid, the initial dose of a Step 3 opioid should be low, and, if pain persists, the dose may be titrated up daily until pain is controlled. Typical starting doses for patients who are opioid-naïve have been noted, but these doses should be used only as a guide, and the initial dose, as well as titrated dosing, should be done on an individual basis (Table 1). Guidelines suggest that the most appropriate dose is the one that relieves the patient's pain throughout the dosing interval without causing unmanageable side effects [4,32,34].

Table 1: OPIOIDS FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF PAIN IN ADULTSa

Drug

Typical Starting Doseb

Onset of Action

Duration of Action

Codeine

15–60 mg

30 to 60 minutes

4 to 6 hours

Hydrocodone

2.5–10 mg

10 to 20 minutes

4 to 8 hours

Morphine, immediate release

15–30 mg

15 to 30 minutes (oral)

5 to 10 minutes (IV)

3 to 6 hours

Oxycodone, immediate release

5–10 mg

10 to 30 minutes

3 to 4 hours

Oxymorphone, sustained release

10 mg

5 to 10 minutes

8 to 12 hours

Hydromorphone

2–4 mg

15 to 30 minutes

4 to 5 hours

Methadone

5–10 mg

30 to 60 minutes

4 to 6 hours

Tapentadol

50–100 mg

<60 minutes

4 to 6 hours

Tapentadol, extended release

50–100 mg

—

—

Fentanyl (buccal tablet)

100–200 mcg

5 to 15 minutes

2 to 4 hours

Fentanyl (transdermal patch)

25 mcg/hour (worn for 3 days)

12 to 18 hours

48 to 72 hours

Buprenorphine (transdermal patch)

5–10 mcg/hour (worn for 7 days)

—

—

aAll information is given for oral formulations unless otherwise specified.

bDoses given are guidelines for opioid-naïve patients; actual doses should be determined on an individual basis.

Source: [4,8,35,36,37]

More than one route of opioid administration will be needed by many patients during end-of-life care, but in general, opioids should be given orally, as this route is the most convenient and least expensive. The transdermal route is preferred to the parenteral route, although dosing with a transdermal patch is less flexible and may not be appropriate for patients with unstable pain [8]. Intramuscular injections should be avoided because injections are painful, drug absorption is unreliable, and the time to peak concentration is long [8].

Morphine is considered to be the first-line treatment for a Step 3 opioid [32]. Morphine is available in both immediate-release and sustained-release forms, and the latter form can enhance patient compliance. The sustained-release tablets should not be cut, crushed, or chewed, as this counteracts the sustained-release properties. Morphine should be avoided in patients with severe renal failure [28].

Buprenorphine (Butrans) has the general structure of morphine but differs from it in several ways [33]. The transdermal formulation of the drug was approved in 2010 for moderate-to-severe chronic pain in patients requiring an around-the-clock opioid for an extended period [8]. It may be used for people with renal impairment but is contraindicated in patients who have substantial respiratory depression [33,35].

The sustained-release form of oxycodone (OxyContin) has been shown to be as safe and effective as morphine for cancer-related pain, and it may be associated with less common side effects, especially hallucinations and delirium [38]. Oxycodone is also available in an immediate-release form (Roxicodone). Oxycodone should be used in people with advanced chronic kidney disease only if alternative options are not available [28]. If the drug must be used, the intervals between doses should be increased, and the patient should be monitored closely [28].

Hydromorphone and fentanyl are the most potent opioids; neither drug should be given to an opioid-naïve patient. Hydromorphone, which is four times as potent as morphine, is available in immediate- and extended-release forms [39]. Fentanyl is the strongest opioid (approximately 80 times the potency of morphine) and is available as a transdermal drug-delivery system (Duragesic; Ionsys); a buccal film (Onsolis) and tablet (Fentora); a nasal spray (Lazanda); a sublingual spray (Subsys); a sublingual tablet (Abstral); and a lozenge (Actiq)[35,40]. Fentanyl preparations have a more rapid onset than other opioids given nonparenterally [8]. Because of its potency, fentanyl must be used with extreme care, as deaths have been associated with its use. Physicians must emphasize to patients and their families the importance of following prescribing information closely, and members of the healthcare team should monitor the use of the drug. Fentanyl, administered subcutaneously, is the recommended choice for patients with advanced chronic kidney disease [28].

The use of methadone to relieve pain has increased substantially over the past few years, moving from a second-line or third-line drug to a first-line medication for severe pain in people with life-limiting diseases [41]. A systematic review showed that methadone had efficacy similar to that of morphine [42]. Physicians must be well educated about the pharmacologic properties of methadone, as the risk for serious adverse events, including death, is high when the drug is not administered appropriately [42,43]. If the dose of methadone is increased too rapidly or administered too frequently, toxic accumulation of the drug can cause respiratory depression and death. Because of the unique nature of methadone, and its long and variable half-life, extreme care must be taken when titrating the drug, and frequent and careful evaluation of the patient is required. Practitioners are advised to consult with a pain or palliative care specialist if they are unfamiliar with methadone prescribing or if individual patient considerations necessitate rapid switching to or from methadone [4].

Meperidine (Demerol) should not be used in the palliative care setting because of limited efficacy and potential for severe toxicity [12,31]. Agonist-antagonist opioids (nalbuphine [Nubain], butorphanol [Stadol], and pentazocine [Talwin]) are not recommended for use with pure opioids, as they compete with them, leading to possible withdrawal symptoms.

Tapentadol (Nucynta) is a short-acting opioid approved for moderate to severe pain in adults; an extended release formulation (Nucynta ER) was approved in 2011 for moderate-to-severe chronic pain when an around-the-clock opioid is needed [35]. The drug is associated with a lower incidence of adverse effects than other opioids, and it has been shown to be highly effective for chronic pain conditions but has not been extensively studied in cancer-related pain or the palliative care setting [44]. A 2014 study of 123 patients that had previously received long-term analgesia for cancer-related pain showed tapentadol significantly reduced pain scores and was generally well tolerated; concomitant use of pain medications was also reduced [45].

The most appropriate option for breakthrough pain is an immediate-release opioid taken in addition to the around-the-clock regimen [8]. The fentanyl buccal tablet has been shown to be effective and safe for relieving breakthrough pain in people who are opioid tolerant [4,46,47]. Between January 2011 and January 2012, three forms of fentanyl were approved for breakthrough pain in people with cancer: fentanyl sublingual tablet (Abstral), fentanyl nasal spray (Lazanda), and fentanyl sublingual spray (Subsys) [35]. As of 2018, the fentanyl lozenge (Actiq), buccal film (Onsolis), and buccal tablet (Fentora) are also approved for breakthrough cancer pain [39]. For each formula, the initial dose may be repeated once if pain is not relieved adequately after 30 minutes. Patients must wait at least two hours before using the sublingual tablet, buccal film, or the nasal spray for another breakthrough pain episode; the interval is four hours for the sublingual spray, lozenge, or buccal tablet [35,39].

When pain responds poorly to escalated doses of an opioid, other approaches should be considered, including alternative routes of administration, use of alternate opioids (termed opioid rotation or opioid switching), use of adjuvant analgesics, and nonpharmacologic approaches. A process for opioid switching has been established; the first step is to calculate the equianalgesic dose of the new drug [4,8,32]. Additional care is needed when switching to methadone, and conversion ratios have been established [4]. Evidence suggests that the traditionally recommended equianalgesic doses for the fentanyl transdermal patch are subtherapeutic for patients with chronic cancer-related pain, and more aggressive approaches may be warranted [4,8,48].

Another approach that has been used for pain management in the cancer setting is combination opioid therapy, or the concurrent use of two strong opioids. The effectiveness of this approach has been evaluated in only two studies, and the combination was morphine and oxycodone or morphine with fentanyl or methadone [49]. The evidence to support a recommendation of combination opioid therapy is weak, and the side effects most likely outweigh the benefit [49].

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

The Institute for Clinical Systems Improvement recommends that opioid rotation, especially for patients with terminal cancer, should be considered when opioid side effects are difficult to manage or if inadequate analgesia is present. If symptoms of delirium and confusion are present and are attributable to opioids, a switch to a different opioid may be advisable.

https://www.icsi.org/_asset/k056ab/PalliativeCare.pdf

Last Accessed: October 24, 2018

Level of Evidence: Expert Opinion/Consensus Statement

Opioids are associated with many side effects, the most notable of which is constipation, occurring in nearly 100% of patients. The universality of this side effect mandates that once extended treatment with an opioid begins, prophylactic treatment with laxatives must also be initiated. Tolerance to other side effects, such as nausea and sedation, usually develops within three to seven days. Some patients may state that they are "allergic" to an opioid. It is important for the physician to explore what the patient experienced when the drug was taken in the past, as many patients misinterpret side effects as an allergy. True allergy to an opioid is rare [8]. Opioid rotation may also be done to reduce adverse events.

When opioids are prescribed, careful documentation of the patient's history, examinations, treatments, progress, and plan of care are especially important from a legal perspective. This documentation must provide evidence that the patient is functionally better off with the medication than without [31]. In addition, physicians must note evidence of any dysfunction or abuse.

Adjuvant agents are often used in conjunction with opioids and are usually considered after the use of opioids has been optimized [31]. The primary indication for these drugs is adjunctive because they can provide relief in specific situations, especially neuropathic pain. Examples of adjuvant drugs are tricyclic antidepressants, anticonvulsants, muscle relaxants, and corticosteroids (Table 2) [4,8]. A systematic review found that there was limited evidence to support the use of selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) for neuropathic pain, but one serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor, venlafaxine (Effexor), was found to be effective [50].

Table 2: ORAL ADJUVANT ANALGESICS

Drug Class

Drug

Typical Starting Dose

Usual Effective Dose

Anticonvulsants

Gabapentin

100–300 mg once daily

300–1,200 mg (2 or 3 divided doses)

Pregabalin

25–75 mg twice daily

75–200 mg (3 divided doses)

Carbamazepine

50–100 mg twice daily

300–600 mg twice daily

Topiramate

25–50 mg daily

50–200 mg twice daily

Oxcarbazepine

150–300 mg twice daily

150–600 mg twice daily

Tiagabine

4 mg at bedtime

4–12 mg twice daily

Tricyclic antidepressants

Amitriptyline

Nortriptyline

Desipramine

10–25 mg at bedtime

50–150 mg at bedtime

Serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors

Venlafaxine

37.5 mg daily

150–350 mg daily

Skeletal muscle relaxants

Baclofen

5 mg twice daily

10–20 mg 2 or 3 times daily

Cyclobenzaprine

5 mg 3 times daily

10–20 mg 3 times daily

Metaxalone

400 mg 3 times daily

Not defined

Corticosteroids

Dexamethasone

1–2 mg

Not defined

Source: [4,8,39]

NONPHARMACOLOGIC INTERVENTIONS

Several nonpharmacologic approaches are therapeutic complements to pain-relieving medication, lessening the need for higher doses and perhaps minimizing side effects. These interventions can help decrease pain or distress that may be contributing to the pain sensation. Approaches include palliative radiotherapy, complementary/alternative methods, manipulative and body-based methods, and cognitive/behavioral techniques. The choice of a specific nonpharmacologic intervention is based on the patient's preference, which, in turn, is usually based on a successful experience in the past.

Palliative radiotherapy is effective for managing cancer-related pain, especially bone metastases [2,51,52]. Bone metastases are the most frequent cause of cancer-related pain; 50% to 75% of patients with bone metastases will have pain and impaired mobility [51]. External-beam radiotherapy is the mainstay of treatment for pain related to bone metastases. At least some response occurs in 70% to 80% of patients, and the median duration of pain relief has been reported to be 11 to 24 weeks [51]. It takes one to four weeks for optimal therapeutic results [51,52].

However, palliative radiotherapy has become a controversial issue. Although the benefits of palliative radiotherapy are well documented and most hospice and oncology professionals believe that palliative radiotherapy is important, this treatment approach is offered at approximately 24% of Medicare-certified freestanding hospices, with less than 3% of hospice patients being treated [53,54,55]. As previously noted, reimbursement issues present a primary barrier to the use of palliative radiotherapy [53,54,55]. Among other barriers are short life expectancy, transportation issues, patient inconvenience, and lack of knowledge about the benefits of palliative radiotherapy in the primary care community [52,53,54,56].

One study found that more than half (54%) of people use complementary/alternative medicine therapies at the end of life [57]. The most commonly used therapies are massage, music, relaxation techniques, and acupuncture [57,58,59,60,61].

Massage, which can be broadly defined as stroking, compression, or percussion, has led to significant and immediate improvement in pain in the hospice setting [62]. Both massage and vibration are primarily effective for muscle spasms related to tension or nerve injury, and massage can be carried out with simultaneous application of heat or cold. Massage may be harmful for patients with coagulation abnormalities or thrombophlebitis [12].

Focused relaxation and breathing can help decrease pain by easing muscle tension. Progressive muscle relaxation, in which patients follow a sequence of tensing and relaxing muscle groups, has enabled patients to feel more in control and to experience less pain and can also help provide distraction from pain [12]. This technique should be avoided if the muscle tensing will be too painful.

Acupuncture typically provides pain relief 15 to 40 minutes after stimulation. Relief seems to be related to the release of endorphins and a susceptibility to hypnosis [12]. The efficacy of acupuncture for relieving pain has not been proven, as study samples have been small. However, acupuncture has been found to be of some benefit for cancer-related pain when the therapy is given in conjunction with analgesic therapy [63].

Other nonpharmacologic interventions that have been helpful for some patients but lack a strong evidence base include manipulative and body-based methods (such as application of cold or heat, and positioning), yoga, distraction, and music or art therapy. The application of cold and heat are particularly useful for localized pain and have been found to be effective for cancer-related pain caused by bone metastases or nerve involvement, as well as for prevention of breakthrough incident pain [12]. Alternating application of heat and cold can be soothing for some patients, and it is often combined with other nonpharmacologic interventions.

Cold can be applied through wraps, gel packs, ice bags, and menthol. It provides relief for pain related to skeletal muscle spasms induced by nerve injury and inflamed joints. Cold application should not be used for patients with peripheral vascular disease. Heat can be applied as dry (heating pad) or moist (hot wrap, tub of water) and should be applied for no more than 20 minutes at a time, to avoid burning the skin. Heat should not be applied to areas of decreased sensation or with inadequate vascular supply, or for patients with bleeding disorders.

Changing the patient's position in the bed or chair may help relieve pain and also helps minimize complications such as decubitus ulcers, contractures, and frozen joints. Members of the healthcare team as well as family members and other informal caregivers can help reposition the patient for comfort and also perform range-of-motion exercises. Physical and occupational therapists can recommend materials, such as cushions, pillows, mattresses, splints, or support devices.

Hatha yoga is the branch of yoga most often used in the medical context, and it has been shown to provide pain relief for patients who have osteoarthritis and carpal tunnel syndrome but it has not been studied in patients at the end of life. Yoga may help relieve pain indirectly in some patients through its effects on reducing anxiety, increasing strength and flexibility, and enhancing breathing [64]. Yoga also helps patients feel a sense of control.

Methods to provide distraction from pain come in a wide variety of methods, including reciting poetry, meditating with a calm phrase, watching television or movies, playing cards, visiting with friends, or participating in crafts.

Music therapy and art therapy are also becoming more widely used as nonpharmacologic options for pain management. Listening to music has been shown to decrease the intensity of pain and reduce the amount of opioids needed, but the magnitude of the benefit was small [65]. Research suggests that art therapy contributes to a patient's sense of well-being [66]. Creating art helps patients and families to explore thoughts and fears during the end of life. An art therapist can help the creators reflect on the implications of the art work. Art therapy is especially helpful for patients who have difficulty expressing feelings with words, for physical or emotional reasons.

6. LEGAL AND ETHICAL ISSUES RELATED TO THE TREATMENT OF PAIN

Fear of license suspension for inappropriate prescribing of controlled substances is also prevalent, and a better understanding of pain medication will enable physicians to prescribe accurately, alleviating concern about regulatory oversight. Physicians must balance a fine line; on one side, strict federal regulations regarding the prescription of schedule II opioids (morphine, oxycodone, methadone, hydromorphone) raise fear of Drug Enforcement Agency investigation, criminal charges, and civil lawsuits [1,67]. Careful documentation on the patient's medical record regarding the rationale for opioid treatment is essential [67]. On the other side, clinicians must adhere to the American Medical Association's Code of Ethics, which states that failure to treat pain is unethical. The code states, in part: "Physicians have an obligation to relieve pain and suffering and to promote the dignity and autonomy of dying patients in their care. This includes providing effective palliative treatment even though it may foreseeably hasten death" [68]. In addition, the American Medical Association Statement on End-of-Life Care states that patients should have "trustworthy assurances that physical and mental suffering will be carefully attended to and comfort measures intently secured" [69].

Physicians should consider the legal ramifications of inadequate pain management and understand the liability risks associated with both inadequate treatment and treatment in excess. The undertreatment of pain carries a risk of malpractice liability, and this risk is set to increase as the general population becomes better educated about the availability of effective approaches to pain management at the end of life. Establishing malpractice requires evidence of breach of duty and proof of injury and damages. Before the development of various guidelines for pain management, it was difficult to establish a breach of duty, as this principle is defined by nonadherence to the standard of care in a designated specialty. With such standards now in existence, expert medical testimony can be used to demonstrate that a practitioner did not meet established standards of care for pain management. Another change in the analysis of malpractice liability involves injury and damages. Because pain management can be considered as separate from disease treatment and because untreated pain can lead to long-term physical and emotional damage, claims can be made for pain and suffering alone, without wrongful death or some other harm to the patient [70].

The proper storage and disposal of prescription pain medications should also be considered. Taking steps to ensure that medications are stored and destroyed securely and safely can help prevent unintended overdose and substance abuse. In 2010, the U.S. House of Representatives passed the Safe Disposal Drug Act, which amended the Controlled Substances Act to permit the take-back disposal of medications by authorized persons (rather than the patient with the prescription) [71]. As such, healthcare professionals may be required to dispose of drugs returned by patients in addition to drug samples that have expired or are not being dispensed. For best practice guidelines on the disposal of medications by patients or healthcare professionals, please visit the Drug Enforcement Administration Office of Diversion Control at https://www.deadiversion.usdoj.gov/drug_disposal [72].

PATIENTS WITH HISTORY OF SUBSTANCE ABUSE

This population of people with a history of substance abuse presents challenges to the effective use of pain medication, with issues related to trust, the appropriate use of pain medications, interactions between illicit drugs and treatment, and compliance with treatment. The issues differ depending on whether substance abuse is a current or past behavior.

With active substance abusers, it is difficult to know if patients' self-reports of pain are valid or are drug-seeking behaviors. It has been recommended that, as with other patients at the end of life, self-reports of pain should be believed [12,31]. A multidisciplinary approach, involving psychiatric professionals, addiction specialists, and, perhaps, a pain specialist, is necessary. To decrease the potential for the patient to seek illicit drugs for pain, an appropriate pain management plan should be implemented and the patient should be reassured that pain can be managed effectively [12,31]. When planning treatment, the patient's tolerance must be considered; higher doses may be needed initially, and doses can be reduced once acute pain is under control. Long-acting pain medications are preferred for active substance abusers, and the use of nonopioids and coanalgesics can help minimize the use of opioids. Setting limits as well as realistic goals is essential and requires establishing trust and rapport with the patient and caregivers.

Establishing trust is also essential for patients with former substance abuse behavior, who often must be encouraged to adhere to a pain management program because of their fears of addiction. Involving the patient's drug counselor is beneficial, and other psychologic clinicians may be helpful in assuring the patient that pain can be relieved without addiction. Recurrence of addiction is low, especially among people with cancer, but monitoring for signs of renewed abuse should be ongoing [12].

Patients who are following a methadone maintenance program may also fear effective pain management as a risk for recurrent abuse. Two approaches may be followed for these patients: they may receive an increased dose of methadone as the pain reliever or they may be given other opioids along with the same methadone dose, with the dose of the opioid titrated for effective pain relief [12,31]. Again, involvement of the drug counselor is important.

7. CONCLUSION

As many as 96% of people with a life-limiting disease have pain at the end of life, and unrelieved pain is a great fear in this population. However, experts estimate that 75% to 90% of end-of-life pain can be effectively managed. Healthcare professionals should strive to enhance their knowledge of key strategies to achieve high-quality pain management at the end of life through open communication, frequent assessment, and the use of evidence-based pharmacologic and nonpharmacologic interventions that are individualized to each patient's specific situation.

Works Cited

1. American Pain Foundation. Breakthrough cancer pain: mending the break in the continuum of care. J Pain and Palliat Care Pharmacother. 2011;25(3):252-264.

2. Qaseem A, Snow V, Shekelle P, et al. Evidence-based interventions to improve the palliative care of pain, dyspnea, and depression at the end of life: a clinical practice guideline from the American College of Physicians. Ann Intern Med. 2008;148(2):141-146.

3. Davison SN, Jhangri GS. Impact of pain and symptom burden on the health-related quality of life of hemodialysis patients. J Pain Symptom Manage. 2010;39(3):477-485.

4. National Comprehensive Cancer Network. NCCN Clinical Practice Guidelines in Oncology: Palliative Care. Available at https://www.nccn.org/professionals/physician_gls/pdf/palliative.pdf. Last accessed October 9, 2018.

5. Blinderman CD, Homel P, Billings JA, Portenoy RK, Tennstedt SL. Symptom distress and quality of life in patients with advanced congestive heart failure. J Pain Symptom Manage. 2008;35(6):594-603.

6. Blinderman CD, Homel P, Billings JA, Tennstedt S, Portenoy RK. Symptom distress and quality of life in patients with advanced chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. J Pain Symptom Manage. 2009;38(1):115-123.

7. Esther Kim J-E, Dodd MJ, Aouizerat BE, Jahan T, Miaskowski C. A review of the prevalence and impact of multiple symptoms in oncology patients. J Pain Symptom Manage. 2009;37(4):715-736.

8. Dalal S, Bruera E. Assessment and management of pain in the terminally ill. Prim Care Clin Office Pract. 2011;38:195-223.

9. Gao W, Gulliford M, Higginson IJ. Prescription patterns of analgesics in the last 3 months of life: a retrospective analysis of 10,202 lung cancer patients. Br J Cancer. 2011;104(11):1704-1710.

10. Godfrey C, Harrison MB, Medves J, Tranmer JE. The symptom of pain with heart failure: a systematic review. J Card Fail. 2006;12(4):307-313.

11. Breuer B, Fleishman SB, Cruciani RA, Portenoy RK. Medical oncologists' attitudes and practice in cancer pain management: a national survey. J Clin Oncol. 2011;29(36):4769-4775.

12. Abrahm JL. A Physician's Guide to Pain and Symptom Management in Cancer Patients. 3rd ed. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press; 2014.

13. D'Arcy Y. Nursing2008 pain management survey report. Nursing 2008. 2008;38(6):42-49.

14. Zerzan J, Lee CA, Haverhals LM, Nowels CT. Exploring physician decisions about end-of-life opiate prescribing: a qualitative study. J Palliat Med. 2011;14(5):567-572.

15. Fineberg IC, Wenger NS, Brown-Saltzman K. Unrestricted opiate administration for pain and suffering at the end of life: knowledge and attitudes as barriers to care. J Palliat Med. 2006;9(4):873-883.

16. Mezei L, Murinson BB, Johns Hopkins Pain Curriculum Development Team. Pain education in North American medical schools.J Pain. 2011;12(12):1199-1208.

17. Steinhauser K, Clipp EC, McNeilly M, et al. In search of a good death: observations of patients, families, and providers.Ann Intern Med. 2000;132:825-832.

18. Center to Advance Palliative Care. Certification and Licensing. Available at https://www.capc.org/providers/palliative-care-resources/palliative-care-resources-certification-licensing/. Last accessed October 9, 2018.

19. Solano J, Gomes B, Higginson IJ. A comparison of symptom prevalence in far advanced cancer, AIDS, heart disease, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and renal disease. J Pain Symptom Manage. 2006;31:58-69.

20. Goudas LC, Bloch R, Gialeli-Goudas M, Lau J, Carr DB. The epidemiology of cancer pain. Cancer Invest. 2005;23:182-190.

21. Desbiens NA, Mueller-Rizner N. How well do surrogates assess the pain of seriously ill patients? Crit Care Med. 2000;28(5):1347-1352.

22. Portenoy RK, Hagen NA. Breakthrough pain: definition, prevalence and characteristics. Pain. 1990;41:273-281.

23. World Health Organization. Cancer Pain Relief and Palliative Care. Technical Report Series 804. Geneva: World Health Organization; 1990.

24. Hockenberry M, Wilson D. Wong's Essentials of Pediatric Nursing. 9th ed. St. Louis, MO: Mosby; 2013.

25. Fishman B, Pasteranak S, Wallenstien SL, Houde RW, Holland JC, Foley KM. The Memorial Pain Assessment Card: a valid instrument for the evaluation of cancer pain. Cancer. 1987;60:1151-1158.

26. Adler ED, Goldfinger JZ, Park ME, Meier DE. Palliative care in the treatment of advanced heart failure. Circulation. 2009;120:2597-2606.

27. Lorenz KA, Lynn J, Dy SM, et al. Evidence for improving palliative care at the end of life: a systematic review. Ann Intern Med. 2008;148(2):147-159.

28. Douglas C, Murtagh FE, Chambers EJ, Howse M, Ellershaw J. Symptom management for the adult patient dying with advanced chronic kidney disease: a review of the literature and development of evidence-based guidelines by a United Kingdom Expert Consensus Group. Palliat Med. 2009;23(2):103-110.

29. Ford DW, Koch KA, Ray DE, Selecky PA. Palliative and end-of-life care in lung cancer: Diagnosis and management of lung cancer, 3rd ed: American College of Chest Physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines. Chest. 2013;143(5 Suppl):e498S-e512S.

30. World Health Organization. Cancer Pain Relief. 2nd ed. Geneva: World Health Organization; 1996.

31. Berger AM, Shuster JL, Von Roenn JH (eds). Principles & Practice of Palliative Care & Supportive Oncology. 4th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2013.

32. Doyle D, Woodruff R. The IAHPC Manual of Palliative Care. 3rd ed. Houston, TX: International Association for Hospice and Palliative Care Press; 2013.

33. Pergolizzi JV Jr, Mercadante S, Echaburu AV, et al. The role of transdermal buprenorphine in the treatment of cancer pain: an expert panel consensus. Curr Med Res Opin. 2009;25(6):1517-1528.

34. Scottish Partnership for Palliative Care. NHS Lothian Palliative Care Guidelines. 3rd ed. Edinburgh: National Health Service Scotland; 2009.

35. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Drug Approvals and Database. Available at https://www.fda.gov/Drugs/InformationOnDrugs/default.htm. Last accessed October 9, 2018.

36. Swetz KM, Kamal AH. Palliative care. Ann Intern Med. 2012;156(3):ITC21.

37. Argoff CE, Silvershein DI. A comparison of long- and short-acting opioids for the treatment of chronic noncancer pain: tailoring therapy to meet patient needs. Mayo Clin Proc. 2009;84(7):602-612.

38. Lauretti GR, Oliveira GM, Pereira NL. Comparison of sustained-release morphine with sustained-release oxycodone in advanced cancer patients. Br J Cancer. 2003;89:2027-2030.

39. Lexicomp Online. Available at https://onlhttp://www.netce.com/ine.lexi.com. Last accessed October 9, 2018.

40. McCleane G, Smith HS. Opioids for persistent noncancer pain. Anesthesiol Clin. 2007;25:787-807.

41. Shaiova L, Berger A, Blinderman CD, et al. Consensus guideline on parenteral methadone use in pain and palliative care. Palliat Support Care. 2008;6(2):165-176.

42. Nicholson AB. Methadone for cancer pain. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2007;(4):CD003971.

43. Dart RC, Woody GE, Kleber HD. Prescribing methadone as an analgesic [letter]. Ann Intern Med. 2005;143:620.

44. Vadivelu N, Timchenko A, Huang Y, Sinatra R. Tapentadol extended-release for treatment of chronic pain: a review. J Pain Res. 2011;4:211-218.

45. Schikowski A, Krings D, Schwenke K. Tapentadol prolonged release for severe chronic cancer-related pain: effectiveness, tolerability, and influence on quality of life of the patients. J Pain Res. 2014;8:1-8.

46. Blick SK, Wagstaff AJ. Fentanyl buccal tablet: in breakthrough pain in opioid-tolerant patients with cancer. Drugs. 2006;66(18):2387-2395.

47. Messina J, Darwish M, Fine PG. Fentanyl buccal tablet. Drugs Today (Barc). 2008;44(1):41-54.

48. Skaer T. Transdermal opioids for cancer pain. Health Qual Life Outcomes. 2006;4:24.

49. Fallon MT, Laird BJA. A systematic review of combination step III opioid therapy in cancer pain: an EPCRC opioid guideline project. Palliat Med. 2011;25(5):597-603.

50. Saarto T, Wiffen PJ. Antidepressants for neuropathic pain. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2007;(4):CD005454.

51. Dolinsky C, Metz JM. Palliative radiation therapy in oncology. Anesthesiol Clin North Am. 2006;24:113-128.

52. Fine PG. Palliative radiation therapy in end-of-life care: evidence-based utilization. Am J Hospice Palliat Med. 2002;19(3):166-170.

53. Lutz S, Spence C, Chow E, et al. Survey on use of palliative radiotherapy in hospice care. J Clin Oncol. 2004;22:3581-3586.

54. McCloskey S, Tao ML, Rose CM, Fink A, Amadeo AM. National survey of perspectives of palliative radiation therapy: role, barriers, and needs. Cancer J. 2007;13(2):130-137.

55. Jarosek SL, Virnig BA, Feldman R. Palliative radiotherapy in Medicare-certified freestanding hospices. J Pain Symptom Manage. 2009;37(5):780-787.

56. Berrang T, Samant R. Palliative radiotherapy knowledge among community family physicians and nurses. J Cancer Educ. 2008;23(3):156-160.

57. Tilden VP, Drach LL, Tolle SW. Complementary and alternative therapy use at end-of-life in community settings. J Altern Complement Med. 2004;10(5):811-817.

58. Demmer C. A survey of complementary therapy services provided by hospices. J Palliat Med. 2004;7(4):510-516.

59. Kozak LE, Kayes L, McCarty R, et al. Use of complementary and alternative medicine (CAM) by Washington State hospices.Am J Hosp Palliat Care. 2008;25(6):463-468.

60. Dain AS, Bradley EH, Hurzeler R, Aldridge MD. Massage, Music, and Art Therapy in Hospice: Results of a National Survey.J Pain Symptom Manage. 2015;49(6):1035-1041.

61. Olotu BS, Brown CM, Lawson KA, Barner JC. Complementary and alternative medicine utilization in Texas hospices: prevalence, importance, and challenges. Am J Hosp Palliat Care. 2014;31(3):254-259.

62. Polubinski JP, West L. Implementation of a massage therapy program in the home hospice setting. J Pain Symptom Manage. 2005;30:104-106.

63. Choi TY, Lee MS, Kim TH, Zaslawski C, Ernst E. Acupuncture for the treatment of cancer pain: a systematic review of randomised clinical trials. Support Care Cancer. 2012;20(6):1147-1158.

64. Raub JA. Psychophysiologic effects of hatha yoga on musculoskeletal and cardiopulmonary function: a literature review. J Altern Complement Med. 2002;8:797-812.

65. Cepeda MS, Carr DB, Lau J, Alvarez H. Music for pain relief. Cochrane Database System Rev. 2006;(2):CD004843.

66. Reynolds MW, Nabors L, Quinlan A. The effectiveness of art therapy: does it work? J Am Art Ther Assoc. 2000;17:207-213.

67. Schmidt C. Experts worry about chilling effect of federal regulations on treating pain. J Natl Cancer Inst. 2005;97(8):554-555.

68. American Medical Association. Code of Medical Ethics Opinion 5.3: Withholding or Withdrawing Life-Sustaining Medical Treatment. Available at https://www.ama-assn.org/delivering-care/withholding-or-withdrawing-life-sustaining-treatment. Last accessed October 9, 2018.

69. American Medical Association. Code of Medical Ethics: Caring for Patients at the End of Life. Available at https://www.ama-assn.org/delivering-care/code-medical-ethics-caring-patients-end-life. Last accessed October 9, 2018.

70. Bagdasarian N. A prescription for mental distress: the principles of psychosomatic medicine with the physical manifestation requirement in NIED cases. Am J Law Med. 2000;26:401-438.

71. Library of Congress. House Bill HR 5809: Safe Drug Disposal Act of 2010. Available at https://www.congress.gov/bill/111th-congress/house-bill/5809/text. Last accessed October 9, 2018.

72. Office of Diversion Control. Drug Disposal Information. Available at https://www.deadiversion.usdoj.gov/drug_disposal. Last accessed October 9, 2018.

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

1. McCusker M, Ceronsky L, Crone C, et al. Palliative Care for Adults. Bloomington, MN: Institute for Clinical Systems Improvement; 2013. Available at https://www.icsi.org/_asset/k056ab/PalliativeCare.pdf. Last accessed October 24, 2018.

97541 • Child Abuse Identification and Reporting: The Pennsylvania Requirement

Alice Yick Flanagan, PhD, MSW

www.netce.com

Copyright © 2018 NetCE, All rights reserved.

In 2019, there were 4,856 substantiated reports to child abuse in Pennsylvania. Healthcare professionals, regardless of their discipline or field, are in a unique position to assist in the identification, education, and prevention of child abuse and neglect. This course describes how victims of abuse can be accurately identified and provides the community resources available in the state of Pennsylvania for child abuse victims. Mandated reporter laws will also be outlined.

Table of Contents

97541 • Child Abuse Identification and Reporting: The Pennsylvania Requirement

Course Overview

Attention

Audience

Course Objective

Learning Objectives

Faculty

Faculty Disclosure

Division Planners

Division Planners Disclosure

Director of Development and Academic Affairs

Director Disclosure Statement

About the Sponsor

Disclosure Statement

1. HISTORICAL CONTEXT

2. CHILD WELFARE IN PENNSYLVANIA

CHILD PROTECTIVE SERVICES

GENERAL PROTECTIVE SERVICES

3. DEFINITIONS OF CHILD ABUSE AND NEGLECT

FORMS OF CHILD ABUSE AND NEGLECT

4. EPIDEMIOLOGY OF CHILD ABUSE AND NEGLECT

NATIONAL PREVALENCE

PENNSYLVANIA STATE PREVALENCE

5. RECOGNIZING WARNING SIGNS

6. CONSEQUENCES OF CHILD ABUSE

7. REPORTING SUSPECTED CHILD ABUSE

PERMISSIVE REPORTERS

MANDATED REPORTERS

THE PROCESS OF REPORTING CHILD ABUSE IN PENNSYLVANIA

PROTECTIONS FOR REPORTERS

PENALTIES FOR FAILURE TO REPORT

BARRIERS TO REPORTING

8. CASE SCENARIOS

9. CONCLUSION

10. RESOURCES

Works Cited

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

97541 • Child Abuse Identification and Reporting: The Pennsylvania Requirement

Education Category. Ethics - Human Rights

Release Date. 01/01/2018

Review Date. 08/20/2020

Expiration Date. 07/31/2022

Course Overview

In 2019, there were 4,856 substantiated reports to child abuse in Pennsylvania. Healthcare professionals, regardless of their discipline or field, are in a unique position to assist in the identification, education, and prevention of child abuse and neglect. This course describes how victims of abuse can be accurately identified and provides the community resources available in the state of Pennsylvania for child abuse victims. Mandated reporter laws will also be outlined.

Attention

This course is approved by the Pennsylvania Department of Human Services to fulfill the requirement for 3 hours of Child Abuse Recognition and Reporting (Act 31) training for healthcare professionals applying for licensure. Provider number CACE000020.

This course is approved by the Pennsylvania Department of Human Services to fulfill the requirement for 2 hours of Child Abuse Recognition and Reporting (Act 31) training for healthcare professionals renewing their license. Provider number CACE000020.

Audience

This course is designed for all Pennsylvania physicians, physician assistants, nurses, social workers, counselors, and allied health professionals required to complete child abuse education.

Course Objective

The purpose of this course is to enable healthcare professionals in all practice settings to define child abuse and identify the children who are affected by violence. This course describes how a victim can be accurately diagnosed and identifies the community resources available in the state of Pennsylvania for child abuse victims.

Learning Objectives

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

1. Summarize the historical context of child abuse.

2. Discuss the emergence of the child welfare system in Pennsylvania.

3. Define child abuse and neglect and identify the different forms of child abuse and neglect.

4. Discuss the scope of child abuse and neglect in the United States and specifically in Pennsylvania.

5. Review the mandatory reporting process and mandated reporters in the state of Pennsylvania, including possible barriers to reporting suspected cases of child abuse.

Faculty

Alice Yick Flanagan, PhD, MSW, received her Master’s in Social Work from Columbia University, School of Social Work. She has clinical experience in mental health in correctional settings, psychiatric hospitals, and community health centers. In 1997, she received her PhD from UCLA, School of Public Policy and Social Research. Dr. Yick Flanagan completed a year-long post-doctoral fellowship at Hunter College, School of Social Work in 1999. In that year she taught the course Research Methods and Violence Against Women to Masters degree students, as well as conducting qualitative research studies on death and dying in Chinese American families.

Previously acting as a faculty member at Capella University and Northcentral University, Dr. Yick Flanagan is currently a contributing faculty member at Walden University, School of Social Work, and a dissertation chair at Grand Canyon University, College of Doctoral Studies, working with Industrial Organizational Psychology doctoral students. She also serves as a consultant/subject matter expert for the New York City Board of Education and publishing companies for online curriculum development, developing practice MCAT questions in the area of psychology and sociology. Her research focus is on the area of culture and mental health in ethnic minority communities.

Faculty Disclosure

Contributing faculty, Alice Yick Flanagan, PhD, MSW, has disclosed no relevant financial relationship with any product manufacturer or service provider mentioned.

Division Planners

John V. Jurica, MD, MPH

Jane C. Norman, RN, MSN, CNE, PhD

James Trent, PhD

Abimbola Farinde, PharmD, PhD

Division Planners Disclosure

The division planners have disclosed no relevant financial relationship with any product manufacturer or service provider mentioned.

Director of Development and Academic Affairs

Sarah Campbell

Director Disclosure Statement

The Director of Development and Academic Affairs has disclosed no relevant financial relationship with any product manufacturer or service provider mentioned.

About the Sponsor

The purpose of NetCE is to provide challenging curricula to assist healthcare professionals to raise their levels of expertise while fulfilling their continuing education requirements, thereby improving the quality of healthcare.

Our contributing faculty members have taken care to ensure that the information and recommendations are accurate and compatible with the standards generally accepted at the time of publication. The publisher disclaims any liability, loss or damage incurred as a consequence, directly or indirectly, of the use and application of any of the contents. Participants are cautioned about the potential risk of using limited knowledge when integrating new techniques into practice.

Disclosure Statement

It is the policy of NetCE not to accept commercial support. Furthermore, commercial interests are prohibited from distributing or providing access to this activity to learners.

1. HISTORICAL CONTEXT

Today, there is an established system in the United States to respond to reports of child abuse and neglect; however, this has not always been the case. This is not because child abuse, neglect, and maltreatment are new social phenomena. Rather, the terms "child abuse," "child neglect," and "child maltreatment" are relatively new, despite the fact that this social problem has existed for thousands of years [1]. Cruelty to children by adults has been documented throughout history and across cultures. In China, infant girls were often neglected during times of famine or sold during times of extreme poverty. There is also historical evidence that cultures have taken steps to stop child abuse and cruelty. For example, 6,000 years ago in Mesopotamia, orphans had their own patron goddesses for help and protection [2].

In many cases, the physical abuse of children has been linked to punishment. Throughout history, physical child abuse was justified because it was believed that severe physical punishment was necessary to discipline, rid the child of evil, or educate [2,13]. It was not until 1861 that there was a public outcry in the United States against extreme corporal punishment. This reform was instigated by Samuel Halliday, who reported the occurrence of many child beatings by parents in New York City [2].

Sexual abuse of children, particularly incest (defined as sex between family members), is very much a taboo. The first concerted efforts to protect children from sexual abuse occurred in England during the 16th century. During this period, boys were protected from forced sodomy and girls younger than 10 years of age from forcible rape [2]. However, in the 1920s, sexual abuse of children was described solely as an assault committed by "strangers," and the victim of such abuse was perceived as a "temptress" rather than an innocent child [2].

The first public case of child abuse in the United States that garnered widespread interest took place in 1866 in New York City. Mary Ellen Wilson was an illegitimate child, 10 years of age, who lived with her foster parents [3]. Neighbors were concerned that she was being mistreated; however, her foster parents refused to change their behaviors and said that they could treat the child as they wished [2]. Because there were no agencies established to protect children specifically, Henry Berge, founder of the Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals, intervened on Mary's behalf [3]. He argued that she was a member of the animal kingdom and deserved protection. The case received much publicity, and as a result, in 1874 the New York Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Children was formed [3]. Because of this case, every state now has a system in place for reporting child abuse. The Pennsylvania Department of Public Welfare (now known as the Department for Human Services) was established in 1921 and part of its original intent was to care for "dependent, defective, and delinquent children" [7].

As a result of Berge's advocacy for children's safety, other nongovernmental agencies were formed throughout the United States, and the establishment of the juvenile court was a direct result of the Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Children [13]. By 1919, all but three states had juvenile courts. However, many of these nongovernmental agencies could not sustain themselves during the Depression [13].

The topic of child abuse and neglect received renewed interest in the 1960s, when a famous study titled "The Battered-Child Syndrome" was published [1,4]. In the study, researchers argued that the battered-child syndrome consisted of traumatic injuries to the head and long bones, most commonly to children younger than 3 years of age, inflicted by parents [1,4]. The study was viewed as the seminal work on child abuse, alerting both the general public and the academic community to the problems of child abuse [1,2]. Soon, all 50 states required physicians to report child abuse [14]. In the early 1970s, Senator Walter Mondale noted that there was no official agency that spent its energies on preventing and treating child maltreatment [13]. Congress passed the Child Abuse Prevention and Treatment Act (CAPTA) of 1974, which targeted federal funds to improve states' interventions for the identification and reporting of abuse [13]. In 2010, additional prevention and treatment programs were funded through CAPTA, and in 2012, the Administration on Children, Youth, and Families began to focus on protective factors to child abuse and neglect [61].

Today, child abuse and neglect are considered significant social problems with deleterious consequences. As noted, a system has been implemented in all 50 states to ensure the safety of children, with laws defining what constitutes abuse and neglect and who is mandated to report.

2. CHILD WELFARE IN PENNSYLVANIA

The Children's Aid Society of Pennsylvania, one of the first organizations to advocate for children and their welfare in the United States, was founded in 1882 [62]. In the following years, the Children's Aid Society was instrumental in educating the public about the unsanitary and unsafe conditions in almshouses, which were sometimes used for orphaned or abandoned children. Subsequently, legislation was passed in Pennsylvania to ensure that children were not permanently placed in almshouses [62].

In the state of Pennsylvania, Act 91 was passed in 1967 and gave child welfare agencies in all counties the responsibility to investigate child abuse reports made by physicians [18]. Three years later, Act 91 was modified to include school nurses and teachers as mandated reporters [18].

Pennsylvania was also the first state to take a noncriminal view of child abuse [22,26]. In 1975, the Child Protective Services Law was enacted, which established a child abuse hotline and a statewide central registry in Pennsylvania in order to encourage the reporting of child abuse [18,26].

The child welfare system in Pennsylvania is supervised by the state but administered by the different local counties [27]. This means that there are a total of 67 county agencies that administer the child welfare and juvenile justice services [27]. Aside from frank abuse, reports of other acts that might affect the well-being of a child are also accepted. The State of Pennsylvania delineates two functions for the local agencies: child protective services (CPS) and general protective services (GPS).

In 2017, Governor Tom Wolf approved Act 68 (also known as the Newborn Protection Act) to increase the number of locations for parents to give up their newborn without criminal liability [63]. In 2018, Act 29 was signed and expanded the definition of child abuse in Pennsylvania to include leaving a child unsupervised with a sexual predator [64].

CHILD PROTECTIVE SERVICES

CPS is in place to address acts that are "non-accidental serious physical or mental injury, sexual abuse, or exploitation, or serious physical neglect caused by acts or omissions of the parent or caretaker" [32]. In other words, these are cases in which there is reasonable cause to suspect child abuse and conduct an investigation.

Case Scenario

A young boy comes into the community health clinic for a physical exam. The boy's mother hovers and does not seem to want to let her son answer any questions. During the exam, in the process of taking blood, the nurse notices some bruises and lacerations on the boy's arm. Later, bruises in the shape of a belt are observed on the boy's back as well. Upon questioning, the boy will only say that he was "bad."

In this case, the nurse should make a report to ChildLine. This would be classified as a CPS case, and an investigation would be conducted. More information will be presented about reporting in later sections of this course.

GENERAL PROTECTIVE SERVICES

GPS is involved in non-abuse cases or acts that involve "non-serious injury or neglect" [38]. This includes children who experience "inadequate shelter, food, clothing, health care, truancy, inappropriate discipline, lack of supervision, hygiene issues, abandonment, or other problems that threaten a child's opportunity for healthy growth and development" [38]. One of the following criteria must be met for GPS to be involved [55]:

- Lack of parental control

- Deprivation of the essentials of life

- Illegal placement for adoption or care

- Abandonment by parents or guardians

- Chronic truancy

- Habitual disobedience

- Formal adjudication

- Commitment of a delinquent act at an age younger than 10 years

- Defined as ungovernable

- Born to parents with terminated parental rights

Case Scenario

Ms. J, a neighbor, notices E (5 years of age) and S (6 years of age) running around their front yard at 8 p.m. The front door of the house is wide open, and Ms. J asks if their mother is home. S states that her mother went out with her girlfriend to a party. Ms. J asks if a babysitter is at the house, and S answers "no" again. This is not the first time neighbors have noticed that the kids are left at home alone. The neighbors report that the mother often comes home late, intoxicated.

In this case, a bystander (likely Ms. J or one of the neighbors) could call ChildLine, the local county agency, or even the police, and the case would be addressed by GPS. More information will be presented about reporting in later sections of this course.

3. DEFINITIONS OF CHILD ABUSE AND NEGLECT

The federal definition of child abuse is evident in CAPTA, published as a product of federal legislation. CAPTA defines a child to be any individual younger than 18 years of age, except in cases of sexual abuse. In cases of sexual abuse, the age specified by the child protection laws varies depending on the state in which the child resides [5]. CAPTA defines child abuse as, "any recent act or failure to act on the part of a parent or caretaker, which results in death, serious physical or emotional harm, sexual abuse, or exploitation, or an act or failure to act that presents an imminent risk of serious harm" [6].

In Pennsylvania, the child abuse law takes a very comprehensive approach to defining of child abuse [26]. According to Pennsylvania law, child abuse refers to intentionally, knowingly, or recklessly doing any of the following [43,54]:

- Causing bodily injury to a child through any recent act or failure to act

- Fabricating, feigning, or intentionally exaggerating or inducing a medical symptom or disease that results in a potentially harmful medical evaluation or treatment to the child through any recent act

- Causing or substantially contributing to serious mental injury to a child through any act or failure to act or a series of such acts or failures to act

- Causing sexual abuse or exploitation of a child through any act or failure to act

- Creating a reasonable likelihood of bodily injury to a child through any recent act or failure to act

- Creating a likelihood of sexual abuse or exploitation of a child through any recent act or failure to act

- Causing serious physical neglect of a child

- Engaging in any of the following recent acts:

- Kicking, biting, throwing, burning, stabbing, or cutting a child in a manner that endangers the child

- Unreasonably restraining or confining a child, based on consideration of the method, location, or duration of the restraint or confinement

- Forcefully shaking a child younger than 1 year of age

- Forcefully slapping or otherwise striking a child younger than 1 year of age

- Interfering with the breathing of a child

- Causing a child to be present at a location while a violation relating to the operation of methamphetamine laboratory is occurring, provided that the violation is being investigated by law enforcement

- Leaving a child unsupervised with an individual, other than the child's parent, who the actor knows or reasonably should have known a) is required to register as a Tier II or Tier III sexual offender, where the victim of the sexual offense was younger than 18 years of age when the crime was committed; b) has been determined to be a sexually violent predator; or c) has been determined to be a sexually violent delinquent child

- Causing the death of the child through any act or failure to act

- Engaging a child in a severe form of trafficking in persons or sex trafficking, as those terms are defined under section 103 of the Trafficking Victims Protection Act of 2000

In addition, the Code explicitly excludes specific acts and injuries from the definition of child abuse. Effective December 31, 2014, the following are considered exclusions to the definition of child abuse [44]:

- Environmental factors: No child shall be deemed to be physically or mentally abused based on injuries that result solely from environmental factors, such as inadequate housing, furnishings, income, clothing, and medical care, that are beyond the control of the parent or person responsible for the child's welfare with whom the child resides. This shall not apply to any child-care service, excluding an adoptive parent.

- Practice of religious beliefs: If, upon investigation, the county agency determines that a child has not been provided needed medical or surgical care because of sincerely held religious beliefs of the child's parents or relative within the third degree of consanguinity and with whom the child resides, which beliefs are consistent with those of a bona fide religion, the child shall not be deemed to be physically or mentally abused. In such cases the following shall apply:

- The county agency shall closely monitor the child and the child's family and shall seek court-ordered medical intervention when the lack of medical or surgical care threatens the child's life or long-term health.

- All correspondence with a subject of the report and the records of the department and the county agency shall not reference child abuse and shall acknowledge the religious basis for the child's condition.

- The family shall be referred for general protective services, if appropriate.

- This subsection shall not apply if the failure to provide needed medical or surgical care causes the death of the child.

- This subsection shall not apply to any child-care service as defined in this chapter, excluding an adoptive parent.

- Use of force for supervision, control, and safety purposes: Subject to the rights of parents, the use of reasonable force on or against a child by the child's own parent or person responsible for the child's welfare shall not be considered child abuse if any of the following conditions apply:

- The use of reasonable force constitutes incidental, minor, or reasonable physical contact with the child or other actions that are designed to maintain order and control.

- The use of reasonable force is necessary to quell a disturbance or remove the child from the scene of a disturbance that threatens physical injury to persons or damage to property; to prevent the child from self-inflicted physical harm; for self-defense or the defense of another individual; or to obtain possession of weapons or other dangerous objects or controlled substances or paraphernalia that are on the child or within the control of the child.

- Rights of parents: Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to restrict the generally recognized existing rights of parents to use reasonable force on or against their children for the purposes of supervision, control, and discipline of their children. Such reasonable force shall not constitute child abuse.

- Participation in events that involve physical contact with child: An individual participating in a practice or competition in an interscholastic sport, physical education, recreational activity, or extracurricular activity that involves physical contact with a child does not, in itself, constitute contact that is subject to the reporting requirements of this chapter.

- Defensive force: Reasonable force for self-defense or the defense of another individual shall not be considered child abuse.

- Child-on-child contact: Harm or injury to a child that results from the act of another child shall not constitute child abuse unless the child who caused the harm or injury is a perpetrator. Notwithstanding this, the following shall apply:

- Acts constituting any of the following crimes against a child shall be subject to the reporting requirements: rape, involuntary deviate sexual intercourse, sexual assault, aggravated indecent assault, indecent assault, and indecent exposure.

- No child shall be deemed to be a perpetrator of child abuse based solely on physical or mental injuries caused to another child in the course of a dispute, fight, or scuffle entered into by mutual consent.

- A law enforcement official who receives a report of suspected child abuse is not required to make a report to the department if the person allegedly responsible for the child abuse is a nonperpetrator child.

It is important to note that exclusions are utilized by the CPS agency when investigating suspected abuse and should not be considered exclusions from reporting suspected abuse.

For the purposes of this course, a perpetrator is defined as a person who has committed child abuse. According to the Pennsylvania Code, the term includes only [42,54]:

- A parent of the child

- A spouse or former spouse of the child's parent

- A paramour or former paramour of the child's parent

- A person 14 years of age or older and responsible for the child's welfare, including a person who provides temporary or permanent care, supervision, mental health diagnosis or treatment, or training or control of a child in lieu of parental care, supervision, and control

- An individual 14 years of age or older who resides in the same home as the child

- An individual 18 years of age or older who does not reside in the same home as the child but is related within the third degree of consanguinity or affinity by birth or adoption to the child

- An individual 18 years of age or older who engages a child in severe forms of trafficking in persons or sex trafficking, as those terms are defined under section 103 of the Trafficking Victims Protection Act of 2000

In a significant revision to the definition of perpetrator, school personnel and other child care providers are considered "individuals responsible for the child's welfare" and may be perpetrators of child abuse; there is no longer a separate definition for student abuse [42]. As such, a perpetrator may be any such person who has direct or regular contact with a child through any program, activity, or services sponsored by a school, for-profit organization, or religious or other not-for-profit organization.

In addition, only the following may be considered a perpetrator for failing to act [42,54]:

- A parent of the child

- A spouse or former spouse of the child's parent

- A paramour or former paramour of the child's parent

- A person 18 years of age or older and responsible for the child's welfare or who resides in the same home as the child

FORMS OF CHILD ABUSE AND NEGLECT

There are several acts that may be considered abusive, and knowledge of what constitutes abuse is vital for healthcare providers and other mandated reporters. In this section, specific behaviors that fall under the category of abuse and neglect will be reviewed.

Physical Abuse

Physical abuse injuries can range from minor bruises and lacerations to severe neurologic trauma and death. Physical abuse is one of the most easily identifiable forms of abuse and the type most commonly seen by healthcare professionals. Physical injuries that may be indicative of abuse include bruises/welts, burns, fractures, abdominal injuries, lacerations/abrasions, and central nervous system trauma [8,65].

Bruises and welts are of particular concern, especially those that appear on:

- The face, lips, mouth, ears, eyes, neck, or head

- The trunk, back, buttocks, thighs, or extremities

- Multiple body surfaces

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

According to the American College of Radiology, fractures highly suggestive of physical abuse include rib fractures, classic metaphyseal lesions, those unsuspected or inconsistent with the history or age of the child, multiple fractures involving more than one skeletal area, and fractures of differing ages.

https://acsearch.acr.org/docs/69443/Narrative

Last Accessed: August 20, 2020

Level of Evidence: Expert Opinion/Consensus Statement

Patterns such as the shape of the article (e.g., a cord, belt buckle, teeth, hand) used to inflict the bruise or welt are common. Cigar or cigarette burns may be present, and they will often appear on the child's soles, palms, back, or buttocks. Patterned burns that resemble shapes of appliances, such as irons, burners, or grills, are of concern as well.

Fractures that result from abuse might be found on the child's skull, ribs, nose, or any facial structure. These may be multiple or spiral fractures at various stages of healing. When examining patients, note bruises on the abdominal wall, any intestinal perforation, ruptured liver or spleen, and blood vessel, kidney, bladder, or pancreatic injury, especially if accounts for the cause do not make sense. Look for signs of abrasions on the child's wrists, ankles, neck, or torso. Lacerations might also appear on the child's lips, ears, eyes, mouth, or genitalia. If violent shaking or trauma occurred, the child might experience a subdural hematoma [8,65].

Sexual Abuse/Exploitation

According to the Pennsylvania Code, sexual abuse or exploitation is defined as [45]:

- The employment, use, persuasion, inducement, enticement, or coercion of a child to engage in or assist another individual to engage in sexually explicit conduct, which includes, but is not limited to, the following:

- Looking at the sexual or other intimate parts of a child or another individual for the purpose of arousing or gratifying sexual desire in any individual

- Participating in sexually explicit conversation either in person, by telephone, by computer, or by a computer-aided device for the purpose of sexual stimulation or gratification of any individual

- Actual or simulated sexual activity or nudity for the purpose of sexual stimulation or gratification of any individual

- Actual or simulated sexual activity for the purpose of producing visual depiction, including photographing, videotaping, computer depicting, or filming

- Any of the following offenses committed against a child:

- Rape

- Statutory sexual assault

- Involuntary deviate sexual intercourse

- Sexual assault

- Institutional sexual assault

- Aggravated indecent assault

- Indecent assault

- Indecent exposure

- Incest

- Prostitution

- Sexual abuse

- Unlawful contact with a minor

- Sexual exploitation

This does not include consensual activities between a child who is 14 years of age or older and another person who is 14 years of age or older and whose age is within four years of the child's age.

Child sexual abuse can be committed by a stranger or an individual known to the child. Sexual abuse may be manifested in many different ways, including [9,10]:

- Verbal: Obscene phone calls or talking about sexual acts for the purpose of sexually arousing the adult perpetrator

- Voyeurism: Watching a child get dressed or encouraging the child to masturbate while the perpetrator watches

- Child prostitution: Involving the child in sexual acts for monetary profit

- Child pornography: Taking photos of a child in sexually explicit poses or acts

- Exhibitionism: Exposing his/her genitals to the child or forcing the child to observe the adult or other children in sexual acts

- Molestation: Touching, fondling, or kissing the child in a provocative manner; for example, fondling the child's genital area or long, lingering kisses

- Sexual penetration: The penetration of part of the perpetrator's body (e.g., finger, penis, tongue) into the child's body (e.g., mouth, vagina, anus)

- Rape: Usually involves sexual intercourse without the victim's consent and usually involves violence or the threat of violence

- Commercial sex act: Any sex act on account of which anything of value is given to or received by any person

Physical Neglect

Pennsylvania law defines serious physical neglect of a child as repeated, prolonged, or egregious failure to supervise a child in a manner that is appropriate considering the child's developmental age and abilities, and/or the failure to provide a child with adequate essentials of life, including food, shelter, or medical care, when committed by a perpetrator that endangers a child's life or health, threatens a child's well-being, causes bodily injury, or impairs a child's health, development, or functioning. Due to the ambiguity of definitions of child abuse and neglect, CAPTA provides minimum standards that each state must incorporate in its definition of neglect. Examples of child neglect may include [6,11,12]:

- Failure to provide adequate food, clothing, shelter, hygiene, supervision, and protection

- Refusal and/or delay in medical attention and care (e.g., failure to provide needed medical attention as recommended by a healthcare professional or failure to seek timely and appropriate medical care for a health problem)

- Abandonment, characterized by desertion of a child without arranging adequate care and supervision. Children who are not claimed within two days or who are left alone with no supervision and without any information about their parents'/caretakers' whereabouts are examples of abandonment.

- Expulsion or blatant refusals of custody on the part of parent/caretaker, such as ordering a child to leave the home without adequate arrangement of care by others

- Inadequate supervision (i.e., child is left unsupervised or inadequately supervised for extended periods of time)

Emotional Abuse

Under Pennsylvania law, emotional abuse involves an act or failure to act by a perpetrator that causes nonaccidental serious mental injury. Serious mental injury is "a psychological condition, as diagnosed by a physician or licensed psychologist, including the refusal of appropriate treatment, that renders a child chronically and severely anxious, agitated, depressed, socially withdrawn, psychotic, or in reasonable fear that his or her life or safety is threatened, or that seriously interferes with a child's ability to accomplish age-appropriate development and social tasks" [45].

The following behaviors could constitute emotional abuse [6,11,12]:

- Verbal abuse: Belittling or making pejorative statements in front of the child, which results in a loss or negative impact on the child's self-esteem or self-worth

- Inadequate nurturance/affection: Inattention to the child's needs for affection and emotional support

- Witnessing domestic violence: Chronic spousal abuse in homes where the child witnesses the violence

- Substance and/or alcohol abuse: The parent/caretaker is aware of the child's substance misuse problem but chooses not to intervene or allows the behavior to continue

- Refusal or delay of psychologic care: Failure or delay in obtaining services for the child's emotional, mental, or behavioral impairments

- Permitted chronic truancy: The child averages at least five days per month of school absence and the parent/guardian does not intervene

- Failure to enroll: Failure to enroll or register a child of mandatory school age or causing the child to remain at home for nonlegitimate reasons

- Failure to access special education services: Refusal or failure to obtain recommended services or treatment for remedial or special education for a child's diagnosed learning disorder

Trafficking and Exploitation

It can be difficult to identify and intervene to stop human trafficking and exploitation, because it is hidden and even people who interact with victims may not recognize that it is happening. However, in many cases, women and children are considered the typical victims of human trafficking. Trafficking and exploitation are real risks to child safety and well-being and are reportable as forms of abuse.

There are several different types of child or minor human trafficking, but the term is generally defined as the recruitment, transportation, provision, or obtaining of a child for labor or services through the use of force, fraud, or coercion. Severe forms of human trafficking include sex and labor trafficking, including debt bondage and slavery.

Labor Trafficking

Labor trafficking is defined as labor obtained by the use of threat of serious harm, physical restraint, or abuse of the legal process. Severe labor trafficking includes the recruitment, harboring, transportation, provision, or obtaining of a person for labor or services, through the use of force, fraud, or coercion, for the purpose of subjection to involuntary servitude, peonage (i.e., paying off debt through work), debt bondage (i.e., debt slavery, bonded labor or services for a debt or other obligation), or slavery (i.e., a condition compared to that of a slave in respect of exhausting labor or restricted freedom).

Typically, children involved in forced labor are being given little or no pay. In the United States, forced labor is predominantly found in five sectors [57]:

- Prostitution and sex industry (46%)

- Domestic servitude (27%)

- Agriculture (10%)

- Sweatshops and factories (5%)

- Restaurant and hotel work (4%)

Among child victims, forced domestic servitude is a serious concern, particularly related to the provision of domestic services for 10 to 16 hours per day on activities such as child care, cooking, cleaning, and yard work/gardening.

Sex Trafficking

The Victims of Trafficking and Violence Protection Act defines sex trafficking as, “the recruitment, harboring, transportation, provision, or obtaining of a person for the purpose of a commercial sex act” [58]. A commercial sex act is, “any sex act on account of which anything of value is given to or received by any person” [58]. In other words, it involves the illegal transport of humans to be exploited in a sexual manner for financial gains [59]. Victims of sex trafficking could be forced into prostitution, stripping, pornography, escort services, and other sexual services [60]. Under federal law, sex trafficking (such as prostitution, pornography, or exotic dancing) does not require there be force, fraud, or coercion if the victim is younger than 18 years of age.

The term “domestic minor sex trafficking” has become a popular term used to connote the buying, selling, and/or trading of children for sexual services within the country, not internationally [60]. In the United States, the children most vulnerable to domestic minor trafficking are [60]:

- Youth in the foster care system

- Youth who identify as LGBTQ

- Youth who are homeless or runaway

- Youth with disabilities

- Youth with mental health or substance abuse disorders

- Youth with a history of sexual abuse

- Youth with a history of being involved in the welfare system

- Youth who identify as native or aboriginal

- Youth with family dysfunction

4. EPIDEMIOLOGY OF CHILD ABUSE AND NEGLECT

NATIONAL PREVALENCE

In 2018, there were 4.3 million referrals to child protective agencies in the United States [15]. More than 2.4 million (or 55.8%) were assessed to be appropriate for a response, and 67.4% of reports were made by health and mental health professionals [15]. Girls tend to be victims at a slightly higher rate (9.6 per 1,000 population) compared with boys (8.7 per 1,000 population) [15]. The most common perpetrators were parents; 91.7% of victims are maltreated by one or both parents [15]. Specifically, mothers are more often perpetrators compared with fathers (68.9% of victims were abused by a mother vs. 45.2% of victims were abused by a father) [15].

As of 2018, 9.2 of every 1,000 children in the United States were victims of abuse and/or neglect [15]. This is the unique rate, meaning each child is counted only once regardless the number of times a report may have been filed for abuse/neglect. The fatality rate for 2018 was 2.39 deaths per 100,000 children [15].

Research has shown that racial and ethnic minority children (particularly African American, Native American/Alaska Native, and multi-racial children) tend to have higher rates of reported child maltreatment compared with their white counterparts (Table 1) [15]. However, the lowest reported rate is among Asian American children [15].

Table 1: CHILD ABUSE VICTIMIZATION IN THE UNITED STATES ACCORDING TO RACE/ETHNICITY, 2018

Race/Ethnicity

Child Abuse Rate per 1,000 Children

Native American/Alaska Native

15.2

African American

14.0

Multi-race

11.0

Pacific Islander

9.3

White

8.2

Hispanic

8.1

Asian American

1.6

Source: [15]

PENNSYLVANIA STATE PREVALENCE

According to the Annual Child Protective Services Report, a yearly statistical report that documents child abuse cases in Pennsylvania, the child abuse hotline registered a total of 42,252 reports of suspected abuse or neglect in 2019 [27]. Approximately 11.5% of these cases were substantiated, which translates to 4,856 cases of child abuse in 2019 [27]. This is an decrease of 237 reports (4.6%) compared with 2018 [27]. Of the substantiated child abuse cases, there were 51 fatalities, 12 more than in 2015 [27]. Nearly half (49.2%) of perpetrators of child abuse in 2019 were the parent of the child victim [27].

5. RECOGNIZING WARNING SIGNS

It is crucial that practitioners become familiar with the indications of child abuse and neglect. These factors do not necessarily conclusively indicate the presence of abuse or neglect; rather, they are clues that require further interpretation and clinical investigation. Some parental risk indicators include [8,10,12,16]:

- Recounting of events that do not conform either with the physical findings or the child's physical and/or developmental capabilities

- Inappropriate delay in bringing the child to a health facility

- Unwillingness to provide information or the information provided is vague

- History of family violence in the home

- Parental misuse of substances and/or alcohol

- Minimal knowledge or concern about the child's development and care

- Environmental stressors, such as poverty, single parenthood, unemployment, or chronic illness in the family

- Unwanted pregnancy

- Early adolescent parent

- Expression that the parent(s) wanted a baby in order to feel loved

- Unrealistic expectations of the child

- Use of excessive physical punishment

- Healthcare service "shopping"

- History of parent "losing control" or "hitting too hard"

Child risk indicators include [8,10,12,16]:

- Multiple school absences

- Learning or developmental disabilities

- History of multiple, unexplained illnesses, hospitalizations, or accidents

- Poor general appearance (e.g., fearful, poor hygiene, malnourished appearance, inappropriate clothing for weather conditions)

- Stress-related symptoms, such as headaches or stomachaches

- Frozen watchfulness

- Mental illness or symptoms, such as psychosis, depression, anxiety, eating disorders, or panic attacks

- Regression to wetting and soiling

- Sexually explicit play

- Excessive or out-of-the-ordinary clinging behavior

- Difficulties with concentration

- Disruptions in sleep patterns and/or nightmares

In addition, warning signs specifically associated with victims of child trafficking and/or exploitation include (but are not limited to):

- A youth that has been verified to be younger than 18 years of age and is in any way involved in the commercial sex industry or has a record of prior arrest for prostitution or related charges

- An explicitly sexual online profile

- Excessive frequenting of Internet chat rooms or classified sites

- Depicting elements of sexual exploitation in drawing, poetry, or other modes of creative expression

- Frequent or multiple sexually transmitted infections or pregnancies

- Lying about or not being aware of their true age

- Having no knowledge of personal data (e.g., age, name, date of birth)

- Having no identification

- Wearing sexually provocative clothing

- Wearing new clothes of any style, getting hair and/or nails done with no financial means

- Being secretive about whereabouts

- Having late nights or unusual hours

- Having a tattoo that s/he is reluctant to explain

- Being in a controlling or dominating relationship

- Not having control of own finances

- Exhibiting hypervigilance or paranoid behaviors

- Expressing interest in or being in relationships with adults or much older men or women

Some of the types of behaviors and symptoms discussed in the definitions of physical, sexual, and emotional abuse/neglect are also warning signs. For example, any of the injuries that may result from physical abuse, such as a child presenting with bruises in the shape of electric cords or belt buckles, should be considered risk factors for abuse.

6. CONSEQUENCES OF CHILD ABUSE

The consequences of child abuse and neglect vary from child to child, and these differences continue as victims grow older. Several factors will mediate the outcomes, including the [17]:

- Severity, intensity, frequency, duration, and nature of the abuse and/or neglect

- Age or developmental stage of the child when the abuse occurred

- Relationship between the victim and the perpetrator

- Support from family members and friends

- Level of acknowledgment of the abuse by the perpetrator

- Quality of family functioning

In examining some of the effects of physical abuse, it is helpful to frame the consequences along a lifespan perspective [3]. During infancy, physical abuse can cause neurologic impairments. Most cases of infant head trauma are the result of child abuse [19]. Neurologic damage may also affect future cognitive, behavioral, and developmental outcomes. Some studies have noted that, in early childhood, physically abused children show less secure attachments to their caretakers compared to their non-abused counterparts [20].

By middle to late childhood, the consequences are more notable. Studies have shown significant intellectual and linguistic deficits in physically abused children [3]. Other environmental conditions, such as poverty, may also compound this effect. In addition, a number of affective and behavioral problems have been reported among child abuse victims, including anxiety, depression, low self-esteem, excessive aggressive behaviors, conduct disorders, delinquency, hyperactivity, and social detachment [3,8,10,12].

Surprisingly, there has been little research on the effects of childhood physical abuse on adolescents [3]. However, differences have been noted in parents who abuse their children during adolescence rather than preadolescence. It appears that lower socioeconomic status plays a lesser role in adolescent abuse as compared with abuse during preadolescence [21]. In addition, parents who abuse their children during adolescence are less likely to have been abused as children themselves compared with those parents who abused their children during preadolescence [21]. It is believed that the psychosocial effects of physical abuse manifest similarly in late childhood and adolescence.

Research findings regarding the effects of childhood physical abuse on adult survivors indicate an increased risk for major psychiatric disorders, including depression, post-traumatic stress disorder, and substance abuse [36]. Some adult survivors function well socially and in terms of mental and physical health, even developing increased resilience as a result of their experiences, while others exhibit depression, anxiety, post-traumatic stress, substance abuse, criminal behavior, violent behavior, and poor interpersonal relationships [3,17,46]. A 2012 meta-analysis found that adult survivors of child abuse were more likely to experience depression than non-abused counterparts, with the rates varying according to the type of abuse sustained (1.5-fold increase for physical child abuse, 2.11-fold increase for neglect, and 3-fold increase for emotional abuse) [24]. Similar results were found in a longitudinal study that compared a child welfare cohort to a group with no child welfare involvement. The child welfare group was twice as likely to experience moderate-to-severe depression and generalized anxiety compared with the control group [25]. There is some evidence that vulnerability to long-term effects of maltreatment in childhood may be at least partially genetically mediated [50].

Although not all adult survivors of sexual abuse experience long-term psychologic consequences, it is estimated that 20% to 50% of all adult survivors have identifiable adverse mental health outcomes [23]. Possible psychologic outcomes include [10]:

- Affective symptoms: Numbing, post-traumatic stress disorder, anxiety, depression, obsessions and compulsions, somatization

- Interpersonal problems: Difficulties trusting others, social isolation, feelings of inadequacy, sexual difficulties (e.g., difficulties experiencing arousal and orgasm), avoidance of sex

- Distorted self-perceptions: Poor self-esteem, self-loathing, self-criticism, guilt, shame

- Behavioral problems: Risk of suicide, substance abuse, self-mutilation, violence

- Increased risk-taking behaviors: Abuse of substances, cigarette smoking, sexual risk-taking

Adult male survivors of child sexual abuse are three times as likely to perpetrate domestic violence as non-victims. In addition, female survivors of child sexual abuse are more vulnerable to bulimia, being a victim of domestic violence, and alcohol use disorder [28].

In more recent years, research has focused on the impact of adverse childhood experiences (ACEs) in general. ACEs are defined as potentially traumatic experiences that affect an individual during childhood (before 18 years of age) and increase the risk for future health and mental health problems (including increased engagement in risky behaviors) as adults [66]. Abuse and neglect during childhood are clear ACEs, but other examples include witnessing family or community violence; experiencing a family member attempting or completing suicide; parental divorce; parental or guardian substance abuse; and parental incarceration [66]. Adults who experienced ACEs are at increased risk for chronic illness, impaired health, violence, arrest, and substance use disorder [28,52].

7. REPORTING SUSPECTED CHILD ABUSE

Pennsylvania has a delineated process in place to facilitate the reporting of suspected child abuse. In addition, in 2014, Governor Corbett signed four new bills intended to streamline and clarify the child abuse reporting process in Pennsylvania. These bills were spurred by the Sandusky child sexual abuse case.

PERMISSIVE REPORTERS

There are two general categories of child abuse reporters: mandated reporters and permissive reporters. Permissive reporters are individuals who report an incident of suspected child abuse. These persons are not required to act or intervene in cases of suspected abuse. Put plainly, permissive reporters can report abuse while mandated reporters must report. However, it is important to note that any person is encouraged to report suspected child abuse or cause a report of suspected child abuse to be made to the department, county agency, or law enforcement, if that person has reasonable cause to suspect that a child is a victim of child abuse.

MANDATED REPORTERS

In Pennsylvania, a mandated reporter is required to make a report of suspected child abuse when he or she has reasonable cause to suspect that a child is a victim of child abuse if [48]:

- The mandated reporter comes into contact with the child in the course of employment, occupation, and practice of a profession or through a regularly scheduled program, activity, or service.

- The mandated reporter is directly responsible for the care, supervision, guidance, or training of the child, or is affiliated with an agency, institution, organization, school, regularly established church or religious organization, or other entity that is directly responsible for the care, supervision, guidance, or training of the child, regardless of the setting of the disclosure of abuse (within or outside of the reporter's professional role).

- A person makes a specific disclosure to the mandated reporter that an identifiable child is the victim of child abuse either within or outside of the reporter's professional role.

- An individual 14 years of age or older makes a specific disclosure to the mandated reporter (either within or outside of the reporter's professional role) that the individual has committed child abuse.

The mandated reporter is not required to interrogate the victim or identify the person responsible for the child abuse in order to make a report of suspected child abuse.

By law, individuals who come into contact with children on a frequent and consistent basis due to their work are legally required to report any suspected child abuse [39]. Mandated reporters in the state of Pennsylvania include, but are not limited to, [39]:

- Physicians (including osteopaths)

- Medical examiners

- Coroners

- Funeral directors

- Dentists

- Optometrists

- Chiropractors

- Podiatrists

- Interns

- Registered nurses

- Licensed practical nurses

- Hospital personnel engaged in the admission, examination, care, or treatment of persons

- Christian Science practitioners

- Members of the clergy

- School administrators

- School teachers

- School nurses

- Social services workers

- Day-care center workers or any other child-care or foster-care workers

- Mental health professionals

- Peace officers or law enforcement officials

Senate Bill 21 and House Bill 436 were two of the bills signed into law and enacted in 2014. These bills elucidate that mandated reporters are "to include anyone who comes in contact with a child, or is directly responsible for the care, supervision, guidance, or training of a child" [51]. Under this expanded definition, additional individuals who are also classified as mandatory reporters include [39]:

- A person licensed or certified to practice in any health-related field under the jurisdiction of the Department of State

- A school employee

- A foster parent

- An individual, paid or unpaid, who, on the basis of the individual's role as an integral part of a regularly scheduled program, activity, or service, accepts responsibility for a child

- An employee of a social services agency

- An employee of a public library

- Those who are supervised by mandated reporters

- An independent contractor with direct contact with children

- An attorney affiliated with an agency, institution, or organization that is responsible for the care, supervision, guidance, or control of children

It has long been debated whether attorneys should be included as mandated reporters. With this new definition, there is a seeming compromise, limiting the mandate to attorneys who are affiliated with an organization that is responsible for the care or supervision of children [37].

Privileged communication between any mandated reporter and his or her patient or client does not apply in cases of child abuse, and failure to report this information is considered a violation of the law [39]. There are exceptions: confidential communication made to an ordained member of the clergy (within the scope of 42 Pennsylvania CS §§ 5943), and confidential communications made to an attorney so long as they are within the scope of 42 Pennsylvania CS §§ 5916 (relating to confidential communications to attorney) and 5928 (relating to confidential communications to attorney), the attorney work product doctrine, or the rules of professional conduct for attorneys [39].

The Pennsylvania Code states that whenever a person is a mandated reporter in his or her capacity as a member of the staff of a medical or other public or private institution, school, facility, or agency, that person shall report immediately and immediately thereafter notify the person in charge of the institution, school, facility, or agency (or the designated agent) [48]. Upon notification, the person in charge or the designated agent is responsible for facilitating the cooperation of the institution, school, facility, or agency with the investigation of the report.

Not surprisingly, more than three-quarters (85%) of suspected child abuse reports are made by mandated reporters [27]. More specifically, the majority of child abuse reports come from mandated reporters in public/private social services agencies.

THE PROCESS OF REPORTING CHILD ABUSE IN PENNSYLVANIA

In Pennsylvania, mandated reports of potential child abuse (CPS or GPS cases) are made either in writing (through the online portal) or orally to ChildLine. The ChildLine is available seven days per week, 24 hours per day at 800-932-0313 or 412-473-2000. In 2019, ChildLine answered 182,818 calls, including suspected child abuse cases, referrals for GPS, and inquiries for general information to services [27]. Electronic submission of suspected child abuse reports may be made in lieu of calling ChildLine.

All mandated reporters who report via telephone shall also make a written report, which may be submitted electronically, within 48 hours [51]. The written reports are made through the Child Welfare Information Solution (CWIS) Portal, available online at https://www.compass.state.pa.us/cwis. The written report will include all of the following information, if known [55]:

- The names and addresses of the child, the child's parents, and any other person responsible for the child's welfare

- Where the suspected abuse occurred

- The age and sex of each subject of the report

- The nature and extent of the suspected child abuse, including any evidence of prior abuse to the child or any sibling of the child

- The name and relationship of each individual responsible for causing the suspected abuse and any evidence of prior abuse by each individual

- Family composition

- The source of the report

- The name, telephone number, and e-mail address of the person making the report

- The actions taken by the person making the report, including collection of evidence, protective custody, or admission to hospital

- Any other information required by federal law or regulation

- Any other information that the department requires by regulation

According to Pennsylvania law, a person or official required to report cases of suspected child abuse may take or request photographs of the child who is subject to a report and, if clinically indicated, request a radiologic examination and other medical tests on the child [56]. If completed, medical summaries or reports of the photographs, x-rays, and relevant medical tests should be sent along with the written report or within 48 hours after a report is made electronically.

Mandated reporters must identify themselves when reporting [54]. However, their names are usually not released; only the Secretary of the Department of Human Services has this authority. If a mandated reporter so chooses, he/she can sign a consent form that gives consent to have his/her name released [54].

A specialist at ChildLine will interview the caller to determine what the next step should be. This includes assessing if the report will be forwarded to a county agency for investigation as CPS or GPS; if a report should be forward directly to law enforcement officials; or if the caller will be referred to local services [53].

For both GPS and CPS cases, the appropriate county agency is contacted immediately [35]. The county agency is then responsible for its investigation, completing both a "risk assessment" and a "safety assessment." In CPS cases, the agency sees and evaluates the child within 24 hours of receiving the report. The primary goal of the evaluations are to assess the nature and extent of the abuse reported; to evaluate the level of risk or harm if the child were to stay in the current living situation; and to determine action(s) needed to ensure the child's safety [53].

A GPS referral will be assessed for any further needs, and appropriate referrals for services may be made for the child and family. If it is a CPS case, further investigation will be conducted. During the investigation, the agency may take photographs of the child and his/her injuries for the files [34]. All investigations must be completed within 30 days from the date the report is taken at ChildLine [27]. Mandated reporters have a right to know of the findings of the investigation and the services provided to the child and may follow the case [33].

PROTECTIONS FOR REPORTERS

Reporters are afforded protections after reporting a suspected incidence of child abuse. Any person or institution who, in good faith, makes a report of child abuse, cooperates with a child abuse investigation, or testifies in a child abuse proceeding is considered immune from civil and criminal liability [44]. Mandated reporters who make a report in good faith and then later face discrimination in their workplace can take legal action [47]. For the most part, the reporter's identity is kept confidential. If a case is referred to law enforcement, then the name of the reporter must be given upon request; however, reporters are treated as confidential informants [49].

PENALTIES FOR FAILURE TO REPORT

According to Pennsylvania statutes, a person or official required to report a case of suspected child abuse or to make a referral to the appropriate authorities who willfully fails to do so commits a misdemeanor of the third degree for the first violation and a misdemeanor of the second degree for a second or subsequent violation [44,54]. An offense is a felony of the third degree if all three of the following are true:

- The person or official willfully fails to report.

- The child abuse constitutes a felony of the first degree or higher.

- The person or official has direct knowledge of the nature of the abuse.

A person who commits a second or subsequent offense commits a felony of the third degree, except if the child abuse constitutes a felony of the first degree or higher, in which case the penalty for the second or subsequent offenses is a felony of the second degree. In addition, if a person's willful failure continues while the person knows or has reasonable cause to believe the child is actively being subjected to child abuse, the person commits a misdemeanor of the first degree; if the child abuse constitutes a felony of the first degree or higher, the person commits a felony of the third degree [44,54].

BARRIERS TO REPORTING

Studies have shown that many professionals who are mandated to report child abuse and neglect are concerned and/or anxious about reporting. Identified barriers to reporting include [29,30,31,40]:

- Professionals may not feel skilled in their knowledge base about child abuse and neglect. In addition, they lack the confidence to identify sexual and emotional abuse.

- Professionals may be frustrated with how little they can do about poverty, unemployment, drug use, and the intergenerational nature of abuse.

- Although professionals understand their legal obligation, they may still feel that they are violating patient confidentiality.

- Many professionals are skeptical about the effectiveness of reporting child abuse cases given the bureaucracy of the child welfare system.

- Practitioners may be concerned that they do not have adequate or sufficient evidence of child abuse.

- Practitioners may have a belief that government entities do not have the right to get involved in matters within the family.

- There may be some confusion and emotional distress in the reporting process.

- Practitioners may fear that reporting will negatively impact the therapeutic relationship.

- Some professionals have concerns that there might be negative repercussions against the child by the perpetrator.

- Some simply underestimate the seriousness and risk of the situation and may make excuses for the parents.

When interviewing children whose first language is not English, it is highly recommended that they be interviewed through the use of an interpreter. It can cause additional stress for children who struggle to find the right words in English, which can result in more feelings of fear, disempowerment, and voicelessness [41].

8. CASE SCENARIOS

In the following case scenarios, consider if the case should be reported as possible child abuse in accordance with Pennsylvania law.

A young girl, 2 years of age, is brought to the emergency department by her mother and stepfather for a scalp laceration. The girl is very quiet and appears listless and out of sorts. Her mother reports that she was injured when she fell onto a rock outside, but that the injury occurred when the girl was being watched by the stepfather. The girl undergoes assessment for traumatic brain injury, including assessment of function using the modified Glasgow Coma Score. The toddler is found to have mild impairment (a score of 13), and the follow-up test two hours later indicates normal functioning. The nurse notices that the toddler appears to be afraid of the stepfather, leaning away and crying when he is near her. The stepfather also appears to be easily frustrated with the child, saying that he does not know why she cries so much.

A boy, 13 years of age, is undergoing a routine physical exam with his family physician. The physician asks the boy if he is excited to start school in the next few weeks and how his baseball team is doing. The boy becomes quiet and states that he is nervous about an upcoming trip with his baseball team but does not give additional information. When asked directly, the boy says that he is uncomfortable with the new assistant coach, who watches pornography with them during out-of-town tournaments and supplies them with pornographic magazines. However, the boy states that he doesn't think it's a big deal and that "all of the other kids seem to really like it."

9. CONCLUSION

Child abuse and neglect are considered significant social problems with deleterious consequences. As noted, a system has been implemented in all 50 states to ensure the safety of children, with laws defining what constitutes abuse and neglect and who is mandated to report. Healthcare professionals, regardless of their discipline or field, are in a unique position to assist in the identification, education, and prevention of child abuse and neglect.

It is the duty of all mandated reporters in the state of Pennsylvania to know their responsibilities and the laws that govern the reporting process. All reporters should adhere to the established laws and rules that govern child abuse reporting, taking into account the expanded definition of perpetrator, the updated processes in place for reporting cases of suspected child abuse, and the delineated roles of mandated reporters. Doing so will help ensure the safety of millions of children in Pennsylvania.

10. RESOURCES

ChildLine: Pennsylvania Child Abuse Hotline

1-800-932-0313

http://keepkidssafe.pa.gov

Child Welfare Information Gateway

330 C Street SW

Washington, DC 20201

1-800-394-3366

To report abuse: 1-800-422-4453

https://www.childwelfare.gov

Child Welfare League of America

727 15th Street NW, 12th Floor

Washington, DC 20005

202-688-4200

https://www.cwla.org

National Council on Child Abuse and Family Violence

P.O. Box 5222

Arlington, VA 22205

202-429-6695

https://www.preventfamilyviolence.org

Pennsylvania Chapter of Children's Advocacy Centers and Multidisciplinary Teams

P.O. Box 3323

Erie, PA 16508

814-431-8151

https://penncac.org

Pennsylvania Child Welfare Information Solution

877-343-0494

https://www.compass.state.pa.us/cwis

Pennsylvania Department of Human Services

P.O. Box 2675

Harrisburg, PA 17105

1-800-692-7462

https://www.dhs.pa.gov

University of Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania Child Welfare Resource Center

403 East Winding Hill Road

Mechanicsburg, PA 17055

717-795-9048

http://www.pacwrc.pitt.edu

Works Cited

1. Johnson JM. Horror stories and the construction of child abuse. In: Best J (ed). Images of Issues: Typifying Contemporary Social Problems. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Aldine De Gruyter; 1995: 5-19.

2. Tomison AM. A history of child protection: back to the future? Fam Matters. 2001;(60):46-57.

3. Gelles RJ. Family violence. In: Hampton RL (ed). Family Violence: Prevention and Treatment. 2nd ed. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications; 1999: 1-32.

4. Kempe HC, Silverman FN, Steele BF, Droegemueller W, Silver HK. The battered-child syndrome. JAMA. 1962;181(1):17-24.

5. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. The Child Abuse Prevention and Treatment Act (CAPTA) 2010. Available at https://www.acf.hhs.gov/cb/resource/capta. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

6. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Definitions of Child Abuse and Neglect. Available at https://www.childwelfare.gov/pubPDFs/define.pdf. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

7. Hunt CW. The Department of Public Welfare in Pennsylvania. Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science. 1923;105:104-112.

8. MedlinePlus. Child Abuse—Physical. Available at https://medlineplus.gov/ency/article/001552.htm. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

9. Dettmeyer RB, Verhoff MA, Schütz HF. Child sexual abuse. In: Forensic Medicine: Fundamentals and Perspectives. London: Springer; 2014: 309-319.

10. MedlinePlus. Child Sexual Abuse. Available at https://medlineplus.gov/childsexualabuse.html. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

11. McDonald KC. Child abuse: approach and management. Am Fam Physician. 2007;75(2):221-228.

12. MedlinePlus. Child Neglect and Emotional Abuse. Available at https://medlineplus.gov/ency/article/007225.htm. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

13. Myers JEB. A short history of child protection in America. Family Law Quarterly. 2008;42(3):449-463.

14. Hogelin JM. To prevent and to protect: the reporting of child abuse by educators. Brigham Young University Education & Law Journal. 2013;2013(2):225-252.

15. The Children's Bureau. Child Maltreatment 2018. Available at https://www.acf.hhs.gov/cb/resource/child-maltreatment-2018. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

16. Kellogg ND, American Academy of Pediatrics Committee on Child Abuse and Neglect. Evaluation of suspected child physical abuse. Pediatrics. 2007;119(6):1232-1241.

17. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Administration for Children and Families. Long-Term Consequences of Child Abuse and Neglect. Available at https://www.childwelfare.gov/pubs/factsheets/long-term-consequences. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

18. Philadelphia Department of Human Services. DHS History. Available at https://www.phila.gov/departments/department-of-public-health/about-us. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

19. Sheets LK, Leach ME, Koszewski IJ, Lessmeier AM, Nugent M, Simpson P. Sentinel injuries in infants evaluated for child physical abuse. Pediatrics. 2013;131(4):701-707.

20. Sousa C, Herrenkohl TI, Moylan CA, et al. Longitudinal study on the effects of child abuse and children's exposure to domestic violence, parent-child attachments, and antisocial behavior in adolescence. J Interpers Violence. 2011;26(1):111-136.

21. Garbarino J. Troubled youth, troubled families: the dynamics of adolescent maltreatment. In: Cicchetti D, Carlson V (eds). Child Maltreatment: Theory and Research on the Causes and Consequences of Child Abuse and Neglect. New York, NY: Cambridge University Press; 1989: 685-706.

22. Beaty PT, Woolley MR. Child molesters need not apply: a history of Pennsylvania's child protective services law and legislative efforts to prevent the hiring of abusers by child care agencies. Dickinson Law Review. 1985;89(3):669-690.

23. Springer KW, Sheridan J, Kuo D, Carnes M. The long-term health outcomes of childhood abuse: an overview and a call to action.J Gen Intern Med. 2003;18(10):864-870.

24. Norman RE, Byambaa M, De R, Butchart A, Scott J, Vos T. The long-term health consequences of child physical abuse, emotional abuse, and neglect: a systematic review and meta-analysis. PLoS Medicine. 2012;9(11):1-31.

25. Herrenkohl TI, Hong S, Klika JB, Herrenkohl RC, Russo MJ. Developmental impacts of child abuse and neglect related to adult mental health, substance use, and physical health. J Fam Violence. 2013;28(2):191-199.

26. Menniti DJ. Child abuse law in Pennsylvania. Pennsylvania Medicine. 1986;89(3):33-34.

27. Pennsylvania Department of Human Services. Annual Child Protective Services Report, 2019. Available at https://www.dhs.pa.gov/docs/Publications/Documents/2019%20child%20prev.pdf. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

28. Fagan AA, Novak A. Adverse childhood experiences and adolescent delinquency in a high-risk sample. Youth Violence Juv J. 2018;16(4):395-417.

29. Henderson KL. Mandated reporting of child abuse: considerations and guidelines for mental health counselors. J Ment Health Counsel. 2013;35(4):296-309.

30. Carleton RA. Does the mandate make a difference? Reporting decisions in emotional abuse. Child Abuse Rev. 2006;15(1):19-37.

31. Pietrantonio AM, Wright E, Gibson KN, Alldred T, Jacobson D, Niec A. Mandatory reporting of child abuse and neglect: crafting a positive process for health professionals and caregivers. Child Abuse Negl. 2013;37(2-3):102-109.

32. Mifflin County. Child Protective Services. Available at http://www.co.mifflin.pa.us/dept/CY/Pages/Child-Protective-Services.aspx. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

33. Pennsylvania Medical Society. PAMED Consult: Child Abuse Reporting. Available at https://www.pamedsoc.org/detail/article/Quick-Consult-Series#2. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

34. Penn State Hershey Children's Hospital Humanities Department and Dickinson School of Law Center on Children and the Law. Look Out for Child Abuse. Available at https://lookoutforchildabuse.org/. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

35. The Pennsylvania Code. 3490.32: ChildLine Reporting to the County Agency. Available at http://www.pacodeandbulletin.gov/Display/pacode?file=/secure/pacode/data/055/chapter3490/s3490.32.html. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

36. Nemeroff CB. Paradise lost: the neurobiological and clinical consequences of child abuse and neglect. Neuron. 2016;89(5):892-909.

37. Thompson C. Bills Would Change Child Abuse Reporting Requirements in PA, Defining who Reports and How. Available at http://www.pennlive.com/midstate/index.ssf/2014/04/bills_beefing_up_child_abuse_r.html. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

38. Mifflin County. General Protective Services. Available at http://www.co.mifflin.pa.us/dept/CY/Pages/General-Protective-Services.aspx. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

39. Yaw G. Changes to Pennsylvania's Child Protective Services Law. Available at https://www.senatorgeneyaw.com/changes-to-pennsylvanias-child-protective-services-law. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

40. Schols MWA, Ruiter C, Öry FG. How do public childcare professionals and primary school teachers identify and handle child abuse cases? A qualitative study. BMC Public Health. 2013;13(1):1-16.

41. Fontes LA. Interviewing immigrant children for suspected child maltreatment. J Psychiatry Law. 2010;38(3):283-305.

42. The Pennsylvania Code. Section 3490.4: Definitions. Available at http://www.pacodeandbulletin.gov/Display/pacode?file=/secure/pacode/data/055/chapter3490/s3490.4.html. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

43. Allegheny County Department of Human Services. Reporting Child Abuse or Neglect (Younger than 18 Years of Age). Available at https://www.alleghenycounty.us/Human-Services/About/Contact/Child-Abuse.aspx. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

44. The Pennsylvania Code. Chapter 63: Child Protective Services. Available at https://www.legis.state.pa.us/WU01/LI/LI/CT/HTM/23/00.063..HTM. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

45. Child Welfare Information Gateway. State Statutes Search: Pennsylvania. Available at https://www.childwelfare.gov/topics/systemwide/laws-policies/state. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

46. Domhardt M, Münzer A, Fegert JM, Goldbeck L. Resilience in survivors of child sexual abuse: a systematic review of the literature. Trauma Violence Abuse. 2015;16(4):476-493.

47. The Pennsylvania Legislature. Domestic Relations Code: Persons Required to Report Child Abuse and Protection from Employment Discrimination. Available at https://www.childwelfare.gov/topics/systemwide/laws-policies/state. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

48. The Pennsylvania Legislature. Section 6311: Provisions and Responsibilities for Reporting Suspected Child Abuse. Available at https://www.legis.state.pa.us/WU01/LI/LI/CT/HTM/23/00.063.011.000..HTM. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

49. The Pennsylvania Legislature. Section 6340: Release of Information in Confidential Reports. Available at https://www.legis.state.pa.us/WU01/LI/LI/CT/HTM/23/00.063.040.000..HTM. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

50. Nemeroff CB, Binder E. The preeminent role of childhood abuse and neglect in vulnerability to major psychiatric disorders: toward elucidating the underlying neurobiological mechanisms. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry. 2014;53(4):395-397.

51. PR Newswire. Governor Corbett Signs Additional Child Protection Bills: New Laws Define Mandatory Reporters of Suspected Child Abuse. Available at https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/governor-corbett-signs-additional-child-protection-bills-255338291.html. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

52. Rosinski A, Weiss RA, Clatch L. Childhood adverse events and adult physical and mental health: a national study. J Psychol Res. 2018;23(1):40-50.

53. Pennsylvania Department of Human Services. Report Abuse. Available at https://www.dhs.pa.gov/contact/Pages/Report-Abuse.aspx. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

54. Keep Kids Safe Pennsylvania. Mandated Reporter Frequently Asked Questions. Available at http://keepkidssafe.pa.gov/cs/groups/webcontent/documents/document/c_137646.pdf. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

55. Pennsylvania Code. 3490.18. Filing of a Written Report by a Required Reporter. Available at http://www.pacodeandbulletin.gov/Display/pacode?file=/secure/pacode/data/055/chapter3490/s3490.18.html. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

56. Pennsylvania Code. 3490.20. Other Medical Information. Available at http://www.pacodeandbulletin.gov/Display/pacode?file=/secure/pacode/data/055/chapter3490/s3490.20.html. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

57. Free the Slaves and Human Rights Center of the University of California, Berkeley. Hidden slaves forced labor in the United States. Berkeley Journal of International Law. 2005;23(1):47-109.

58. U.S. Congress. Victims of Trafficking and Violence Protection Act of 2000. Public Law 106-386. Available at https://www.congress.gov/bill/106th-congress/house-bill/3244. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

59. Bertone AM. Sexual trafficking in women: international political economy and the politics of sex. Gender Issues. 2000;18(1):2-22.

60. Kotrla K. Domestic minor sex trafficking in the United States. Soc Work. 2010;55(2):181-187.

61. Child Welfare Information Gateway. Child Maltreatment Prevention: Past, Present, and Future. Available at https://www.childwelfare.gov/pubs/issue-briefs/cm-prevention. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

62. Barga M. Children’s Aid Society of Pennsylvania. Available at http://socialwelfare.library.vcu.edu/programs/child-welfarechild-labor/childrens-aid-society-of-pennsylvania. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

63. Pennsylvania Department of Human Services. 2017 Annual Report. Available at http://www.keepkidssafe.pa.gov/cs/groups/webcontent/documents/document/c_275378.pdf. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

64. Pennsylvania Department of Human Services. 2018 Annual Report. Available at https://www.dhs.pa.gov/docs/OCYF/Documents/2018%20Annual%20Child%20Protective%20Services%20Report.pdf. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

65. Gonzalez D, Mirabal AB, McCall JD. Child Abuse and Neglect. Available at https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK459146. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

66. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Preventing Adverse Childhood Experiences. Available at https://www.cdc.gov/violenceprevention/childabuseandneglect/aces/fastfact.html. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

1. Wootton-Gorges SL, Soares BP, Alazraki AL, et al. ACR Appropriateness Criteria: Suspected Physical Abuse–Child. Reston, VA: American College of Radiology; 2016. Available at https://acsearch.acr.org/docs/69443/Narrative. Last accessed August 20, 2020.

94900 • Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease in Adults

Mark Rose, BS, MA, LP

www.netce.com

Copyright © 2018 NetCE, All rights reserved.

Gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) is recognized as a complex clinical entity, primarily a motility disorder with impaired lower esophageal sphincter structure and function playing a central role. However, GERD is widely seen as a simple disorder of acid over-secretion resolved by proton pump inhibitor (PPI) medication. While PPIs are the backbone of clinical management for patients with suspected GERD, many patients remain symptomatic even after initiating treatment. This reflects the diverse underlying pathology of GERD symptom presentation that requires proper diagnosis to effectively target with therapy. There is an increase in publications associating long-term PPI therapy with concerning adverse effects. This course will disentangle the conflicting and sometimes confusing clinical guidance and evidence that characterizes the large volume of publications on GERD, empowering primary care clinicians with the clarity and direction to improve the clinical care of these patients.

Table of Contents

94900 • Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease in Adults

Course Overview

Audience

Course Objective

Learning Objectives

Faculty

Faculty Disclosure

Division Planners

Division Planners Disclosure

About the Sponsor

Disclosure Statement

1. INTRODUCTION

2. DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS

3. EPIDEMIOLOGY OF GERD

EXTRAESOPHAGEAL MANIFESTATIONS OF GERD

FUNCTIONAL ESOPHAGEAL DISORDERS

GENDER DIFFERENCES IN THE GERD SPECTRUM

PATIENT, SOCIETAL, AND ECONOMIC IMPACT

4. ESOPHAGEAL COMPLICATIONS

ESOPHAGITIS AND EOSINOPHILIC ESOPHAGITIS

BARRETT ESOPHAGUS AND ESOPHAGEAL ADENOCARCINOMA

STRICTURE

5. PREDISPOSING AND RISK FACTORS FOR GERD

OBESITY

HIATAL HERNIA

PREGNANCY

DIETARY FACTORS

MEDICATIONS

COMORBID CONDITIONS

6. NATURAL HISTORY OF GERD

7. PATHOGENESIS AND PATHOPHYSIOLOGY

NORMAL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION

PATHOPHYSIOLOGY

8. SYMPTOMS ASSOCIATED WITH GERD

ALARM FEATURES

9. DIAGNOSIS OF GERD

EMPIRIC PPI TRIAL

DIAGNOSTIC WORKUP

AMERICAN GASTROENTEROLOGICAL ASSOCIATION RECOMMENDATIONS

FUNCTIONAL ESOPHAGEAL DISORDERS: ROME IV CRITERIA

ESOPHAGEAL DISORDERS

DYSPEPSIA

10. INITIAL MANAGEMENT OF GERD

LIFESTYLE INTERVENTIONS

ANTACIDS AND HISTAMINE-2 RECEPTOR ANTAGONISTS

PPI THERAPY

PPI SAFETY CONCERNS

11. MANAGEMENT OF GERD IN PATIENTS NONRESPONSIVE TO PPIs

MEDICATION OPTIONS IN PPI-REFRACTORY GERD

OPTIMIZING PPI ADHERENCE

SWITCHING TO ANOTHER PPI

REFRACTORY HEARTBURN AND NOCTURNAL HEARTBURN

PPI PARTIAL RESPONDERS

12. ANTIREFLUX SURGERY

LAPAROSCOPIC FUNDOPLICATION

MAGNETIC SPHINCTER AUGMENTATION

TRANSORAL INCISIONLESS FUNDOPLICATION

RADIOFREQUENCY ENERGY DELIVERY

BARIATRIC SURGERY IN PATIENTS WITH GERD AND OBESITY

13. CONSIDERATIONS FOR NON-ENGLISH-PROFICIENT PATIENTS

14. CONCLUSION

Works Cited

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

94900 • Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease in Adults

Education Category. Infection Control / Internal Medicine

Release Date. 10/01/2018

Expiration Date. 09/30/2021

Course Overview

Gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) is recognized as a complex clinical entity, primarily a motility disorder with impaired lower esophageal sphincter structure and function playing a central role. However, GERD is widely seen as a simple disorder of acid over-secretion resolved by proton pump inhibitor (PPI) medication. While PPIs are the backbone of clinical management for patients with suspected GERD, many patients remain symptomatic even after initiating treatment. This reflects the diverse underlying pathology of GERD symptom presentation that requires proper diagnosis to effectively target with therapy. There is an increase in publications associating long-term PPI therapy with concerning adverse effects. This course will disentangle the conflicting and sometimes confusing clinical guidance and evidence that characterizes the large volume of publications on GERD, empowering primary care clinicians with the clarity and direction to improve the clinical care of these patients.

Audience

This course is designed for physicians, nurses, and members of the interprofessional healthcare team involved in the diagnosis, treatment, and care of patients with gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD).

Course Objective

The purpose of this course is to provide members of the interprofessional healthcare team with the information necessary to appropriately diagnose, treat, and care for patients with GERD.

Learning Objectives

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

1. Outline the incidence and prevalence of gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD).

2. Describe the patient, social, and economic impact of GERD.

3. Identify risk factors for GERD.

4. Review the natural history and pathophysiology of GERD.

5. Appropriately categorize GERD according to underlying pathology.

6. Identify signs and symptoms of GERD.

7. Select appropriate diagnostic tests for patients with suspected GERD.

8. Analyze the pharmacologic treatment of GERD.

9. Outline the treatment options for refractory GERD.

10. Describe surgical options for GERD treatment.

Faculty

Mark Rose, BS, MA, LP, is a licensed psychologist in the State of Minnesota with a private consulting practice and a medical research analyst with a biomedical communications firm. Earlier healthcare technology assessment work led to medical device and pharmaceutical sector experience in new product development involving cancer ablative devices and pain therapeutics. Along with substantial experience in addiction research, Mr. Rose has contributed to the authorship of numerous papers on CNS, oncology, and other medical disorders. He is the lead author of papers published in peer-reviewed addiction, psychiatry, and pain medicine journals and has written books on prescription opioids and alcoholism published by the Hazelden Foundation. He also serves as an Expert Advisor and Expert Witness to law firms that represent disability claimants or criminal defendants on cases related to chronic pain, psychiatric/substance use disorders, and acute pharmacologic/toxicologic effects. Mr. Rose is on the Board of Directors of the Minneapolis-based International Institute of Anti-Aging Medicine and is a member of several professional organizations.

Faculty Disclosure

Contributing faculty, Mark Rose, BS, MA, LP, has disclosed no relevant financial relationship with any product manufacturer or service provider mentioned.

Division Planners

John M. Leonard, MD

Jane C. Norman, RN, MSN, CNE, PhD

Division Planners Disclosure

The division planners have disclosed no relevant financial relationship with any product manufacturer or service provider mentioned.

About the Sponsor

The purpose of NetCE is to provide challenging curricula to assist healthcare professionals to raise their levels of expertise while fulfilling their continuing education requirements, thereby improving the quality of healthcare.

Our contributing faculty members have taken care to ensure that the information and recommendations are accurate and compatible with the standards generally accepted at the time of publication. The publisher disclaims any liability, loss or damage incurred as a consequence, directly or indirectly, of the use and application of any of the contents. Participants are cautioned about the potential risk of using limited knowledge when integrating new techniques into practice.

Disclosure Statement

It is the policy of NetCE not to accept commercial support. Furthermore, commercial interests are prohibited from distributing or providing access to this activity to learners.

1. INTRODUCTION

Gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) is recognized as a complex clinical entity, primarily a motility disorder with impaired lower esophageal sphincter (LES) structure and function playing a central role. However, GERD is widely seen as a simple disorder of acid over-secretion resolved by proton pump inhibitor (PPI) medication. While PPIs are the backbone of clinical management for patients with suspected GERD, many patients remain symptomatic even after initiating treatment. The diverse underlying pathology of GERD symptom presentation requires proper diagnosis to effectively target with therapy. There is also evidence associating long-term PPI therapy with concerning adverse effects. This course will disentangle the conflicting and sometimes confusing clinical guidance and evidence that characterizes the large volume of publications on GERD, empowering primary care clinicians with the clarity and direction to improve the clinical care of these patients.

2. DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS

Acid reflux: Esophageal reflux with pH <4 [1].

Dyspepsia: A condition with epigastric pain that may include epigastric fullness, nausea, vomiting, or heartburn [2].

Eosinophilic esophagitis: An immune-mediated inflammatory disease of the esophageal mucosal layer, mainly caused by GERD [3].

Erosive esophagitis (also referred to as reflux esophagitis or erosive GERD): GERD symptoms with visible esophageal mucosal injury during endoscopy [4].

Esophagitis: Inflammation of the esophageal mucosa, usually associated with symptoms of heartburn, chest pain, or dysphagia (difficulty swallowing) [3].

Functional gastrointestinal disorders (FGIDs): Disorders of gut-brain interaction, with gastrointestinal (GI) symptoms related to any combination of motility disturbance, visceral hypersensitivity, altered mucosal and immune function, altered gut micro-biota, and altered central nervous system (CNS) processing [5]. Rome IV, the 2016 guideline for the diagnosis and management of GERD, eliminated the vague, potentially stigmatizing term "functional" and replaced FGIDs with disorders of gut-brain interaction, but recognized functional is an embedded terminology that will take time to replace [10]. With this terminology introduced in 2016, this course uses functional for consistency with the published literature.

Functional esophageal disorders (FEDs): FGIDs with esophageal symptoms (i.e., chest pain, heartburn, dysphagia) not adequately explained by structural, inflammatory, or motor abnormalities. Also includes reflux hypersensitivity. Treatment markedly differs from GERD [6].

Gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD): A condition defined by troublesome symptoms, impaired quality of life, and/or mucosal damage or complications resulting from reflux of gastric fluid into the esophagus, oropharynx, and/or respiratory tract [7].

GERD symptoms: Term used to describe heartburn and/or regurgitation symptoms, independent of actual GERD diagnosis.

Heartburn: A rising, burning sensation in the chest or throat.

Non-erosive reflux disease (NERD): GERD symptoms in the absence of visible esophageal mucosal injury during endoscopy; accounts for 70% of the GERD population [4,7,8].

Reflux (also referred to as gastroesophageal reflux or GER): An event in which stomach contents leak upward, or reflux, into the esophagus [9].

Regurgitation: Refluxed gastric content reaches the throat or mouth.

Visceral (esophageal) hypersensitivity: Lowered pain threshold and heightened sensitivity to noxious GI stimuli, such as acid reflux [6].

3. EPIDEMIOLOGY OF GERD

Symptoms suggestive of GERD affect an estimated 30% of Western populations, and the prevalence continues to increase [11]. A comparison of GERD prevalence in different continents showed the highest rates in North America [11]. As noted, the prevalence of NERD in the GERD population is roughly 70% [12].

Among adult residents of Olmsted County, Minnesota (home of the Mayo Clinic), 18.1% had GERD (defined by at least weekly heartburn and/or regurgitation) [13]. Combining these data with results from three other U.S. studies with similar GERD definitions found a prevalence of 18.1% to 27.8% and a sample size-weighted average prevalence of 19.8% [11].

American studies conducted after 1995 show a significantly higher prevalence of GERD than studies conducted before 1995. Among various ethnicities, the incidence of GERD is higher in white individuals, likely related to lifestyle rather than genetic factors [7]. GERD incidence increases with age, especially after 40 years [4].

GERD and functional GI disorders (defined by Rome criteria) frequently co-occur and overlap. In a large study, 83% of patients with irritable bowel syndrome with constipation (IBS-C) had comorbid GERD and/or functional dyspepsia [14].

EXTRAESOPHAGEAL MANIFESTATIONS OF GERD

Extraesophageal manifestations of GERD are typically pulmonary or ear/nose/throat (ENT) and may represent associated symptoms or complications. GERD can be considered a co-factor in the development of asthma, chronic cough, or laryngitis, and GERD-related esophageal disease is associated with chronic bronchitis, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, pulmonary fibrosis, bronchiectasis, and pneumonia [15,16]. In a study of 6,000 patients with erosive esophagitis or NERD, 30% had extraesophageal manifestations of GERD, including chronic cough (13.3%), laryngeal disorders (10.6%), and asthma (4.5%) [17]. Microaspiration (or "silent" aspiration) of gastric contents is thought to underlie the high prevalence of respiratory disorders in GERD. With multiple irritant and corrosive elements in gastric contents, this effect may be independent of aspirate acidity [18].

Hoarseness and Laryngitis

Hoarseness occurs more frequently in patients with weekly GERD symptoms. Patients with chronic laryngitis often lack typical GERD symptoms of heartburn and regurgitation, but esophageal inflammation is present in 19% to 40%. Abnormal esophageal presence of acidic reflux was found in 55% to 79% of patients with chronic hoarseness and 18% to 70% of those with posterior laryngitis [16,19,20,21].

Chronic Cough

GERD is the third most common cause of chronic cough in adults, after postnasal drip and asthma. The frequency of chronic cough in patients with no, infrequent, or frequent GERD symptoms is 11%, 15%, and 22%, respectively. GERD may be the primary cause in 10% of patients with chronic cough [16,17,22].

Non-Cardiac Chest Pain

Non-cardiac chest pain is recurrent chest pain that can be difficult to distinguish from ischemic heart pain, diagnosed after a cardiac cause is excluded. GERD is the most important esophageal cause of non-cardiac chest pain [16]. In a community study, 53% of patients with non-cardiac chest pain experienced heartburn and 58% experienced acid regurgitation. Non-cardiac chest pain was reported by 37% of patients with at least weekly heartburn symptoms, 30.7% with infrequent heartburn (less than weekly), and 7.9% of those without GERD symptoms. Around 50% of patients with non-cardiac chest pain show abnormal esophageal acid exposure [23].

Asthma

GERD is present in 50% to 80% of adults with asthma, and 65% to 77% of adults with asthma report GERD-related symptoms [24]. Roughly 35% of patients with asthma show abnormal esophageal pH [25]. In 341 patients with severe or difficult-to-treat asthma despite standard treatment, 46.3% were diagnosed with GERD at 12- to 15-year follow-up [26]. The prevalence of asthma in patients with GERD increased over five years, from 4.5% to 7.8% [27].

FUNCTIONAL ESOPHAGEAL DISORDERS

Functional Chest Pain

The prevalence of functional chest pain is unknown and is largely inferred from studies of non-cardiac chest pain. Population surveys estimate the lifetime prevalence of functional chest pain at 19% to 33%, but this includes chest pain from GERD, eosinophilic esophagitis, and esophageal motor disorders [23,28].

Within non-cardiac chest pain cohorts, 50% to 60% have GERD, 15% to 18% have esophageal dysmotility, and 32% to 35% have functional chest pain. The prevalence appears gender-equal but is higher in patients younger than 55 years of age [29].

Functional Heartburn

The prevalence of heartburn is difficult to estimate because its diagnosis is linked to ambulatory reflux testing and PPI response, both of which have limited ability to differentiate from GERD. Up to 70% of patients with heartburn have normal endoscopy findings and are categorized by the presence or absence of abnormal acid exposure, symptom-reflux association, and PPI response [30]. Functional heartburn is found in roughly 50% of PPI nonresponders and 25% of PPI responders [6,31].

Reflux Hypersensitivity

The epidemiology of reflux hypersensitivity is unknown but can be inferred from the NERD population. An estimated 37% to 60% of patients with NERD have normal esophageal presence of acidic reflux (measured by ambulatory pH testing) off their PPIs. Less than 10% show acid sensitivity [6,32,33].

Functional Dysphagia

Functional dysphagia is considered the least prevalent functional esophageal disorder, but the true prevalence is unknown. A population survey of functional disorders estimated that 7% to 8% of dysphagia was unaccounted for by exclusionary criteria, and another study found 0.6% of patients with functional GI disorder complained of frequent dysphagia [6,34,35].

GENDER DIFFERENCES IN THE GERD SPECTRUM

Gender differences are found across the GERD spectrum. Differences in GERD symptom expression have been suggested, with women more likely to have heartburn, regurgitation, belching, and extraesophageal symptoms than men [36]. Testing of subjects without reflux symptoms or GERD using ambulatory 24-hour esophageal pH monitoring, which evaluates esophageal acid presence, suggests women experience fewer reflux events, lower total reflux time, and fewer periods with pH <4 [37,38]. This suggests differences in upper GI response to reflux exposure, with greater sensitivity and symptoms in women despite less noxious acid exposure. However, men are more likely to develop pathologic changes of the esophagus [38]. Women are more likely to have partial response to PPIs, persistent GERD symptoms despite PPI treatment, and a need for PPI dose escalation [14,39,40].

PATIENT, SOCIETAL, AND ECONOMIC IMPACT

The frequency and severity of reflux-related symptoms falls on a continuum. Some individuals have occasional, mild heartburn that is not troublesome. Such persons do not meet diagnostic criteria for GERD, and symptoms should be managed with low-intensity, as-needed treatments and lifestyle adjustments [7].

In patients who meet the criteria for GERD, symptoms can impose a serious negative burden on quality of life. Disruptive GERD (more than once weekly symptoms) increases patient time off from work and decreases work productivity. These patients often have sleep impairment and decreases in physical functioning compared with patients with infrequent symptoms. Nocturnal GERD has a greater negative impact on quality of life compared with daytime symptoms. Nocturnal symptoms and sleep disturbances are critical to assess when evaluating the patient with GERD [15]. One nationwide survey of 1,000 adults with heartburn at least once a week found that 79% reported nocturnal heartburn. Of these respondents, 75% reported sleep disruption and 40% reported impaired functioning the next day. In addition, 71% were taking over-the-counter medications, but only 29% rated this approach as effective [16,41].

Considering the potentially severely deleterious effects on productivity, sleep, and quality of life, GERD criteria were loosened in recognition that once-weekly reflux events can be disruptive in some patients. Even mild symptom severity, when experienced two or more times per week, can be impairing on quality of life [7]. Reflux symptoms in NERD can be as severe as those experienced by patients with esophageal erosion and mucosal damage [42].

Regulatory and treatment guidelines focus on individual upper GI disorders, but clinicians often see patients with overlapping conditions. These patients experience more frequent and more bothersome symptoms, a greater negative impact on work and school activities, and are more likely to seek physician care [14].

GERD accounts for 8.9 million outpatient visits each year, with an estimated annual cost of $24 billion. The annual cost of upper GI endoscopy is estimated at $12.3 billion [43]. PPI therapy is the first-line treatment for GERD and represents a substantial proportion of associated costs [1]. In 2009, more than 119 million prescriptions for PPIs were filled, making this class of medications the third-highest in sales in the United States ($13.6 billion) [44]. This figure does not include the cost burden to patients from over-the-counter purchase of PPIs.

4. ESOPHAGEAL COMPLICATIONS

GERD results from stomach and bile acid reflux through the LES into the distal esophagus. The stomach is lined by a mucinous columnar epithelium to withstand the acidic environment required for digestion. However, the esophagus is lined by squamous epithelium, which can become inflamed with exposure to the acidic contents of reflux [45].

Left untreated, continued esophageal acid exposure can lead to persistent inflammation (esophagitis), erosive esophagitis, and scarring, fibrosis, or strictures. Barrett esophagus can occur with refractory GERD due to histopathologic changes in the lower esophageal epithelium. Barrett esophagus may develop into a malignant dysplasia and is a risk factor for esophageal adenocarcinoma [46].

ESOPHAGITIS AND EOSINOPHILIC ESOPHAGITIS

Esophagitis is an inflammatory condition of the esophageal mucosa, usually associated with symptoms of heartburn, chest pain, and dysphagia. As noted, the esophageal wall has limited defense against injury from gastric acid, which can induce erosive or nonerosive esophagitis [3,47].

Erosive esophagitis is esophagitis with more extensive reflux-induced injury, such as inflammation or ulceration [48]. Eosinophilic esophagitis is an immune-mediated inflammatory disease, characterized by eosinophilic infiltration of the esophageal mucosal layer [49]. Eosinophilic esophagitis was first described in the 1970s and became a distinct clinical entity in the early 1990s. GERD is the main cause of eosinophilic esophagitis [3].

Stricture formation is a consequence of untreated erosive esophagitis or eosinophilic esophagitis that develops over time into a diffusely narrow-caliber esophagus. Dominant strictures can potentially cause persistent dysphagia [50]. Length of delay in diagnosis correlates with the presence of fibrostenotic features [51].

BARRETT ESOPHAGUS AND ESOPHAGEAL ADENOCARCINOMA

Barrett esophagus is a pre-malignant condition whereby the normal esophageal squamous epithelium becomes replaced by metaplastic columnar epithelium. Most cases result from chronic GERD. Barrett esophagus is found in 1.3% to 1.6% of the general population and in 5% to 15% of patients with symptomatic GERD during endoscopy [45].

The main concern with Barrett esophagus is the increased risk for esophageal adenocarcinoma, an outcome with a poor prognosis and high mortality rate [7,45]. Patients with Barrett esophagus have at least a 20-fold increased risk of developing esophageal adenocarcinoma, but fewer than 4% of patients with Barrett esophagus develop the malignancy [52]. Why Barrett esophagus develops in some patients with GERD and not in others is unclear, but risk factors include male gender, white race, and increased age. Obesity, especially abdominal adiposity, is a strong risk factor for GERD, erosive esophagitis, and Barrett esophagus [45].

Men are more likely to develop pathologic changes of the esophagus, and women have a higher average age (often post-menopause) of esophageal adenocarcinoma onset than men. Beneficial effects of estrogen, including possible anti-inflammatory action and promotion of esophageal epithelial resistance against refluxate, may account for the lower rates and delayed onset in women [38].

STRICTURE

Strictures are advanced forms of esophagitis. Chronic, deep esophageal injury from acid reflux leads to circumferential fibrosis, typically in the mid-to-distal esophagus and visible by endoscopy. Strictures can result in dysphagia to solid meals and vomiting of nondigested foods. As a rule, the presence of esophageal stricture indicates that surgical consultation is needed for the patient [53].

5. PREDISPOSING AND RISK FACTORS FOR GERD

Predisposing factors for GERD include conditions that weaken the LES (e.g., hiatal hernia, pregnancy), increase pressure on the stomach (e.g., obesity, pregnancy, asthma), or affect transit of food from the stomach to the small intestine (e.g., diabetes, peptic ulcer disease, connective tissue disorders) [45].

OBESITY

Overweight (body mass index [BMI] 25–29.9) and obesity (BMI ≥30) are risk factors for GERD. GERD occurs in up to 70% of obese patients, and symptoms increase with weight gain [16]. Higher BMI and larger waist circumference are associated with the development of GERD complications, including Barrett esophagus [7].

With higher BMI, gastric compression from visceral adiposity increases the separation between the crural diaphragm and the LES, compromising the functional integrity of this antireflux barrier. Obese patients are also likely to have hiatal hernias, which contribute to reflux risk [54].

HIATAL HERNIA

Hiatal hernias are frequently seen in patients with reflux disease. Many patients with hiatal hernias do not have symptomatic reflux, and large hernias (>3 cm) have substantially greater association with GERD than smaller hernias [53,55].

Large hiatal hernias in patients with GERD are associated with higher amounts of acid reflux and delayed esophageal acid clearance. Large hernias can separate the LES from the crural diaphragm and decrease LES tone, which weakens the gastroesophageal barrier and leads to its functional incompetence. Hiatal hernias are found in 25% of patients with non-erosive GERD, 75% of those with erosive GERD, and more than 90% of patients with Barrett esophagus [4,56]. Laparoscopic hernia repair should be performed when a large hiatal hernia is present in patients with GERD who remain symptomatic despite twice-daily PPIs [55].

PREGNANCY

GERD symptoms, particularly heartburn, are common during pregnancy. Symptoms can begin in any trimester, with severity increasing throughout the pregnancy. Predictors of heartburn are advanced gestational age, heartburn before pregnancy, and parity, while maternal age is inversely related to heartburn. Race, pre-pregnancy BMI, and weight gain are unrelated to symptom severity. Despite its frequent occurrence in pregnancy, heartburn usually resolves after delivery. The amount of weight gain during pregnancy predicts persistent GERD symptoms one year post-delivery [15].

GERD diagnosis and treatment during pregnancy are based on symptoms; diagnostic testing and ambulatory pH monitoring are generally not required for most patients. In pregnant patients who require testing, upper endoscopy is the test of choice, but it should be reserved for patients whose symptoms are refractory to medical therapy or with suspected complications of GERD. If possible, endoscopy should be delayed until after the first trimester [15].

DIETARY FACTORS

High dietary fat intake is linked to a greater risk of GERD and erosive esophagitis. Carbonated drinks are also a risk factor for heartburn during sleep in patients with GERD. The role of coffee and alcohol as risk factors is unclear; they may increase heartburn in some patients, but the mechanism is unknown. Specific dietary factors will trigger reflux symptoms in some patients, and despite lack of confirmation in randomized controlled trials, these patients should identify and avoid trigger foods or beverages [7]. Excessive, long-term alcohol use has been associated with progression to esophageal malignancy, but this may be independent of an effect of alcohol on GERD. Smoking, like alcohol, is associated with an increased risk of malignancy.

MEDICATIONS

Nonsteroidal Anti-Inflammatory Drugs

Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) are widely used for anti-inflammatory, analgesic, and antipyretic effects. NSAIDs act by inhibiting cyclo-oxygenase-1 and -2 (COX-1 and COX-2). COX is an enzyme that converts arachidonic acid to inflammatory mediators (e.g., prostaglandins, thromboxanes). By blocking this conversion, NSAIDs reduce pain and inflammation [57]. However, prostaglandins are important for GI protection and other normal physiologic processes. NSAIDs are associated with adverse GI effects ranging from dyspepsia, heartburn, and abdominal discomfort, to peptic ulcer with life-threatening or fatal complications from upper GI bleeding and perforation. Symptoms are unreliable indicators of upper GI mucosal damage, and risks are similar for short-course and long-term NSAID therapy. NSAIDs are also associated with cardiovascular, hepatic, and renal adverse effects [58].

Combining NSAIDs and selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) increases the risk of upper GI bleeding greater than either drug alone. NSAIDs with SSRIs can markedly decrease serotonin platelet content, which impairs platelet aggregation in response to injury. This can prolong bleeding time, increase gastric acid secretion, and potentially promote ulcers and perforation. Combining SSRIs and NSAIDs should be avoided, if possible [59,60,61,62].

The recommended approach to mitigate upper GI risk is switching to or initiating the COX-2 inhibitor-dominant NSAID celecoxib and starting a PPI [63]. PPIs can reduce or resolve GERD-like symptoms of heartburn and dyspepsia and are more effective than histamine-2 receptor antagonists (H2RAs). Treatment adherence should be assessed, especially in the elderly [58].

NSAID-induced GI toxicity can also involve non-gastric intestinal ulceration and bleeding. PPIs do not prevent, and may aggravate, intestinal damage by inducing gut dysbiosis. Celecoxib has better intestinal tolerability than other NSAIDs, but this advantage is partially lost by adding a PPI [64,65,66]. Given the GI and cardiovascular risk profiles of NSAIDs, the appropriateness of NSAID prescriptions should be assessed. These agents are indicated to control inflammation and pain, rather than pain alone [58].

Other Medications

Increased GERD symptoms are also associated with beta-adrenergic agonists, anticholinergics, nitrates, phosphodiesterase type 5 (PDE5) inhibitors, theophylline, calcium channel blockers, and benzodiazepines [57].

Medication-Induced Esophagitis

Esophageal mucosa damage can be induced by commonly prescribed drugs, but this is under-appreciated due in part to sparse attention in the published research. Drug-induced esophagitis is characterized by dysphagia, chest pain, and/or odynophagia. Endoscopic findings of ulcers or erosions are usually confined to the middle third of the esophagus [67]. Antibiotics (e.g., doxycycline, amoxicillin, ciprofloxacin, metronidazole, rifaximin) are the primary cause of drug-induced esophagitis and are potentially more damaging than NSAIDs [3].

COMORBID CONDITIONS

Diabetes, metabolic syndrome, cardiovascular disease, and sleep apnea are seen frequently in patients with GERD. This may be due in part to overweight and obesity, common risk factors for GERD and its comorbidities. GERD is frequently comorbid with functional GI syndromes, such as IBS [7]. The lifetime prevalence of IBS in patients with GERD is 71% [68].

Patients with diabetes are more prone to developing GERD and may present with atypical manifestations. Although there are several proposed mechanisms for the higher prevalence of GERD in patients with diabetes, this complex inter-relationship requires further research [69]. Studies involving treatment options for comorbid disease suggest conflicting drug-drug interactions.

6. NATURAL HISTORY OF GERD

GERD is a chronic disease. Approximately 70% of patients with GERD experience chronic or relapsing symptoms and require long-term intermittent, on-demand, or continuous acid suppressant therapy, mostly with PPIs, while others may require antireflux surgery [55]. A large longitudinal population study found that among those with GERD at study initiation, GERD persisted for 10 years in 33% [70]. Patients with GERD followed clinically may have more severe and chronic illness than persons with GERD followed in the community. However, in a community study, the rate of chronic, unabated GERD was high and showed a substantial and persistent symptom burden.

Around 10% of patients with NERD may progress to erosive esophagitis and manifest more severe reflux disease. Erosive esophagitis is a major risk factor for Barrett esophagus, and the presence of erosive esophagitis at baseline was associated with a fivefold increased risk of Barrett esophagus at five-year follow-up [71].

The long-term natural history of functional heartburn is incompletely known. Up to 67% of patients with functional heartburn remain symptomatic two years after diagnosis, while symptom intensity and frequency decrease in 20%. This suggests functional heartburn is durable in most patients [6].

7. PATHOGENESIS AND PATHOPHYSIOLOGY

GERD is widely assumed to arise from acid over-secretion. However, GERD symptoms can result from non-acidic reflux, and the core pathology in GERD involves impaired structure and function of the lower esophagus.

NORMAL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION

Upper GI

Infrequent or occasional gastroesophageal reflux is normal, particularly after a large meal. The reflux is diluted with saliva, and the esophagus clears the diluted refluxed acid with peristaltic action (a part of esophageal motility). A fully functioning LES, with normal pressure and a normal frequency of transient relaxation episodes, is a crucial physiologic defense against damage from reflux. The LES performs this function with assistance from the diaphragmatic crura, which relies on gastroesophageal junction positioning in the abdomen. This abdominal positioning enables the crura to essentially function as an external sphincter [46].

The crura and LES normally relax during swallowing. Relaxations not initiated by swallowing are termed transient LES relaxations. Transient LES relaxations are also part of normal LES function unrelated to swallowing or peristaltic action, but allow gas to be vented from the stomach (belching) as a normal function. Gastric distention can trigger reflux during transient relaxation and may underlie postprandial reflux [4,56].

Normal LES function is illustrated by air swallowing when drinking carbonated beverages in the upright position. The ingested air accumulates in the proximal stomach to cause distention. This elicits transient relaxations of the LES, allowing the ingested gas (air) to be vented as a belch. Air swallowing during eating and drinking is normal [72].

To function properly, the LES sustains a higher than normal tone from increased calcium, mediated by excitatory cholinergic neurons. The resting LES has higher intracellular levels of calcium than adjacent esophageal muscle, and decreased LES calcium levels are found in GERD [46].

Persons without GERD have a balance between the aggressive forces associated with injury and irritation of the esophagus and the defensive forces that impede reflux and help clear the refluxate. The primary aggressive forces are reflux causticity and volume burden, and defensive forces are related to the antireflux barrier, clearance mechanisms, and tissue resistance at the cellular level [73].

Gastric Acid Release

In parietal cells that line the stomach wall, proton pumps produce stomach acid by moving hydrogen ions from the parietal cell into the stomach lumen against a concentration gradient. Proton pump release of acid is prompted by signaling from acetylcholine, released by vagal nerve endings; gastrin, a local hormone produced by G cells in the antrum; and histamine, produced by enterochromaffin-like cells in the stomach wall [74]. Gastric acid kills micro-organisms, assists digestion, and facilitates absorption of iron, calcium, and vitamin B12 [75]. It also plays a crucial role in filtering out bacteria and in preventing development of enteric infections [76].

As discussed, PPIs are the foundation of GERD management. They directly inhibit hydrogen ion exchange and acid release prompted by all three stimulatory signaling agents, thus blocking the proton pump. H2RAs only block H2 receptors on the parietal cells, leaving gastrin and acetylcholine as potential signaling stimuli. PPIs are more potent inhibitors of gastric acid secretion than H2RAs [74].

PATHOPHYSIOLOGY

Anti-Reflux Barriers

Reflux occurs when the normal function of antireflux barriers between the stomach and esophagus become impaired. GERD develops when reflux of gastric contents is large or aggressive enough to cause troublesome symptoms and/or complications and adversely affect health-related quality of life [58]. The primary factor in GERD pathogenesis is defective function of the LES and the diaphragmatic crura antireflux barrier [48].

LES incompetence results in frequent transient LES relaxations, defined as LES relaxation occurring in absence of swallowing, lasting longer than 10 seconds, and associated with crural diaphragm inhibition [77]. Frequent or longer-lasting transient LES relaxations result in reflux of gastric fluid through the gastroesophageal junction. Most reflux events (about 90%) occur during transient LES relaxations rather than low resting LES pressure [48,77]. Mechanisms more likely with hiatal hernia include low gastroesophageal junction pressure, strain, or air swallow-associated reflux [77].

Symptoms develop when offensive factors in reflux make repeated contact with esophageal mucosa [58]. Potential esophageal injury from reflux increases as more elements of esophageal defense break down [78]. With LES compromise, increasing contact with caustic, corrosive reflux elements can induce esophageal mucosal injury and degrade esophageal mucosal defense by impairing mucosal resistance and esophageal clearance of acid and reflux [48]. Other pathogenic factors can include delayed gastric emptying and hiatal hernia [58]. As discussed, pathophysiologic mechanisms of GERD are exaggerated in obese patients [79].

In patients with GERD, reflux markedly increases after meals due to increased transient LES relaxations to accommodate food-induced gastric expansion. Despite the buffering effect of food, the pH of reflux into the distal esophagus is acidic due to a "pocket" of unbuffered gastric acid that accumulates in the proximal stomach after meals and serves as a reservoir for acid reflux [58,80].

Esophageal Injury

As discussed, GERD causes reflux esophagitis, reflux esophagitis causes Barrett esophagus, and the metaplasia of Barrett esophagus predisposes to esophageal adenocarcinoma. Until recently, the presumed cause of reflux esophagitis was caustic, chemical injury induced by acid and pepsin in reflux. Repeated exposure made the esophageal squamous epithelium permeable to acid, causing epithelial cell death that triggers a proliferative response to repair epithelial injury [81].

Reflux esophagitis is now shown to develop as a cytokine-mediated inflammatory injury. Instead of direct destruction of epithelial cells, acid and bile salts in reflux induce these cells to release pro-inflammatory cytokines. The cytokines initially attract T lymphocytes that trigger the basal cell proliferation characteristic of GERD-induced injury. The inflammatory cells recruit neutrophils to the site of injury, ultimately mediating the epithelial damage [81].

Barrett esophagus develops through metaplasia, a process whereby one type of tissue replaces another type of tissue. Acid and bile reflux damages the squamous mucosa of the distal esophagus. This mucosal damage can heal through regeneration of more squamous epithelium, or through columnar metaplasia, whereby columnar cells replace the damaged squamous cells [81,82].

Non-acidic elements of reflux (e.g., pepsin, trypsin) also induce esophageal mucosal injury, esophagitis, and GERD. Most patients with NERD show non-acid-reflux-induced alteration in esophageal epithelium. Dilation of spaces between adjacent esophageal epithelial cells is the hallmark feature of microscopic esophagitis and increases penetration of hydrogen ions, pepsin, and bile into esophageal sub-mucosa. Non-acid reflux is mostly alkaline from the presence of duodeno-gastric biliary reflux. Acid and duodeno-gastric biliary reflux act synergistically to induce lesions and increase the risks of Barrett esophagus and esophageal adenocarcinoma [83]. PPIs are very effective at healing inflammation caused by acid reflux but do not suppress duodeno-gastric biliary reflux [81,82].

GERD Symptom Pain and Discomfort

Most reflux events do not produce GERD symptoms, but symptom-producing events tend to involve lower pH, longer acid clearance time, and higher total acid exposure. In some cases, weekly acidic or non-acidic reflux can also produce symptoms [56,84].

The relationship between symptom severity and endoscopic findings is non-linear. Severe GERD symptoms can occur with negative endoscopic findings, while endoscopic findings of erosive esophagitis, Barrett esophagus, hemorrhagic esophageal stricture, or esophageal adenocarcinoma can be asymptomatic [56,85].

In patients with chronic pain or upper GI disorders without obvious pathology on imaging, the symptoms are termed "functional," a reference to the apparent lack of structural pathology (and explanation). Functional pain symptoms are now known to reflect durable abnormalities in peripheral and CNS pain signaling and processing. This also explains functional esophageal symptoms.

Reflux events become bothersome and distressing through complex mechanisms. Proteinase-activated receptor 2 (PAR2) and transient receptor potential vanilloid-1 (TRPV1) are thought to play key roles. Esophageal expression of PAR2 is activated by acid or weakly acidic reflux exposure. PAR2 releases interleukins (IL-8, IL-1b) and other inflammatory cytokines, promoting inflammatory injury in the esophageal mucosa [86,87]. The sensation of heartburn is generated by visceral sensory neurons within the deep layers of esophageal mucosa [81]. When activated by PAR2, acid, and other inflammatory mediators, visceral sensory neurons upregulate the expression of chemosensitive receptors TRPV1 and acid-sensing ion channel 3 (ASIC3), which release pain mediators that generate heartburn symptoms [88,89]. Repeated activation can induce inflammatory and neuroinflammatory effects and promote visceral hypersensitivity [90]. Elevated levels of IL-8 are found in biopsy specimens from patients with GERD and NERD, and high levels of IL-8 in biopsies of patients with NERD predict symptomatic recurrence [91,92,93].

Psychologic stress can increase the perception of heartburn and aggravate GERD symptoms [38]. Acute stress can enhance sensitivity to intraesophageal acid perception in patients with reflux esophagitis or NERD, and greater emotional response to stress correlates with increased perceptual response to acid [94,95]. Previous reports have revealed that low quality of life was severe in patients with extraesophageal symptoms. The quality of life of patients with GERD is also associated with psychologic factors [38,96,97].

Functional Esophageal Disorders

Reflux-related esophageal disorders fall on a spectrum, based on interaction between esophageal hypersensitivity and acid exposure and its contribution to reflux symptoms. On one end, symptom contribution from abnormal acid exposure dominates erosive esophagitis; on the other end, contribution from hypersensitivity dominates functional heartburn. Acid exposure and hypersensitivity both contribute to symptoms in reflux hypersensitivity and NERD (Table 1) [6].

Table 1: HYPERSENSITIVITY, ABNORMAL ACID EXPOSURE, AND REFLUX-RELATED DISORDERS

Symptom Contributor

Erosive Esophagitis

Non-Erosive Reflux Disease

Reflux Hypersensitivity

Functional Heartburn

Acid exposure

++++

+++

++

+

Esophageal hypersensitivity

+

++

+++

++++

Key: ++++, strongly influenced; +, weakly influenced.

Source: [6]

Patients with functional esophageal disorders present with reflux-related esophageal symptoms (e.g., heartburn, chest pain) not adequately explained by structural, inflammatory, or major motor abnormalities. In these patients, clinical findings typically include [6,10]:

- Normal endoscopy

- Absence of mechanical obstruction or biopsy-confirmed eosinophilic esophagitis

- Absence of esophageal motor disorder (e.g., achalasia, esophagogastric junction outflow obstruction, distal esophageal spasm)

- Esophageal acid exposure absent or borderline (i.e., pH 4–7)

Structural, motor, or inflammatory abnormality can be present, but a pathologic finding is not sufficient or necessary for diagnosis.

In the context of normal or borderline functional testing, symptom perception is driven by mechanisms that include hypersensitivity from peripheral and/or central sensitization, altered central processing of visceral stimuli, and altered autonomic activity. Altered pain perception with heightened visceral sensitivity and symptom perception and lowered symptom thresholds to chemical, mechanical, or emotional stimuli are consistently shown [1,98].

Esophageal tissue injury, inflammation, and repetitive mechanical stimuli can all sensitize peripheral afferent nerves. Esophageal hypersensitivity can remain long after resolution of the original insult [6,99].

Psychologic features are an important aspect of functional esophageal disorders. With recurrent or long-standing states of psychologic stress, centrally mediated processes can alter autonomic nervous system activity and modulate spinal transmission of nociceptive signals. Peripherally, gut mucosa permeability can be altered by mast cell degranulation [100]. These mechanisms contribute to exaggerated perception of physiologic stimuli [6].

8. SYMPTOMS ASSOCIATED WITH GERD

As noted, the typical symptoms of GERD are heartburn and regurgitation [46,101]. Heartburn is defined as a burning, retrosternal, rising sensation associated with meals. Clinicians should be aware this definition is often misunderstood by the general population and clarify the nature of symptoms discussed when the term is used. Regurgitation is the effortless appearance of gastric contents in the throat or mouth without associated nausea or retching.

Although heartburn and regurgitation are cardinal features of GERD, they lack sensitivity and specificity in diagnosis. GERD is found in 54% of patients with heartburn-dominant symptoms and 29% with regurgitation-dominant symptoms. This is because heartburn and regurgitation can also be presenting symptoms of a variety of other disorders [1,58].

In addition to these cardinal symptoms, patients may display atypical symptoms and/or extraesophageal manifestations of GERD, including [7,46,73]:

- Gastric

- Nausea

- Belching

- Slow digestion

- Early satiety

- Epigastric pain

- Bloating

- Respiratory

- Non-cardiac chest pain

- Chronic cough

- Asthma

- ENT

- Laryngopharyngeal reflux

- Hoarseness

- Sore throat

- Otitis media

- Pharyngeal pain

- Globus

- Chronic rhinosinusitis

- Repetitive throat clearing

- Dental

- Enamel erosion

- Other dental manifestations

ALARM FEATURES

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

The University of Michigan recommends that patients with warning or alarm signs and symptoms suggesting complications from GERD should be referred to a specialist.

https://www.med.umich.edu/1info/FHP/practiceguides/gerd/gerd.12.pdf

Last Accessed: September 7, 2018

Level of Evidence: Expert Opinion/Consensus Statement

Alarm features are associated with, but are not specific to, GERD and are symptoms and signs associated with gastric cancer, complicated ulcer disease, or other serious conditions requiring urgent evaluation. They include [7,46,101]:

- Recurrent nausea and vomiting

- Dysphagia or odynophagia (painful swallowing)

- Unintentional weight loss

- GI tract bleeding

- Persistent pain

- Evidence of iron deficiency or anemia

- Duration of symptoms longer than five years or less than six months

- Epigastric mass or other abnormalities on physical examination

- Family history of esophageal or gastric adenocarcinoma

9. DIAGNOSIS OF GERD

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

According to the University of Michigan, if classic symptoms of heartburn and acid regurgitation dominate a patient's history, then they can help establish the diagnosis of GERD with sufficiently high specificity, although sensitivity remains low compared with 24-hour pH monitoring.

https://www.med.umich.edu/1info/FHP/practiceguides/gerd/gerd.12.pdf

Last Accessed: September 7, 2018

Level of Evidence: B (Controlled trials, no randomization)

GERD is diagnosed based on frequent reflux events (one or more events per week) with troublesome symptoms, impaired patient quality of life, and/or mucosal damage or complications from reflux of gastric contents into the esophagus, oropharynx, and/or respiratory tract [7]. Although heartburn and regurgitation are the classic presentation of GERD, other presentations considered markers include dyspepsia and a general gastric discomfort that includes nausea, abdominal pain, and bloating, and non-cardiac chest pain, which can be the presenting symptom after diagnostic workup excludes cardiac causes [15,46].

Publications on the GERD diagnostic process increasingly point to the need for a more tailored approach, but the initial empiric PPI trial remains the standard of care.

EMPIRIC PPI TRIAL

Patients presenting with typical symptoms of GERD and no alarm features typically receive a presumptive diagnosis of GERD, confirmed by positive response to an empiric trial of PPI therapy. With a PPI trial, patients are prescribed once-daily PPIs for four to eight weeks. Nonresponders receive dose escalation to twice-daily PPIs for eight weeks. All PPI responders continue PPI therapy. The emphasis on the empiric PPI trial as a diagnostic and therapeutic tool is based on the premise that GERD symptoms and severity are proportional to exposure of esophageal tissue to acidic reflux. By targeting this core pathophysiology, response to PPI acid suppression therapy reliably confirms the diagnosis of GERD [1,73,101].

The empiric PPI trial has advantages of being simple, cost-effective, and informative of whether further investigation is required [46,101]. The clinical approach that emphasizes the empiric PPI trial as a diagnostic and therapeutic tool has been endorsed by professional organizations including the American College of Gastroenterology (ACG), the American Gastroenterological Association (AGA), the American College of Physicians (ACP), the American Society of Gastrointestinal Endoscopy (ASGE), and the World Gastroenterology Organization [7,15,102,103,104,105].

Although empiric PPI trials have clear utility in ease and practicality, over-reliance has come under increasing criticism. This dissent centers on the diverse symptom profile and pathogenesis of reflux presentations that require management guided by symptom presentation and focused diagnostic testing instead of the uniform PPI trial approach [73]. A substantial placebo response is shown during empiric PPI trials, and PPI response widely varies by presenting symptom and underlying mechanism. This model has led to 30% to 60% of patients unsatisfied with their treatment, high levels of inappropriate PPI use, and failure to address visceral hypersensitivity, which amplifies symptom perception and complicates patient coping [73,106,107].

To better align initial management with disease complexity, updated practice recommendations for GERD were published by the Italian Society of Pharmacology and Italian Association of Hospital Gastroenterologists in 2016 and the AGA in 2017 [58,73]. In addition, guidelines for dyspepsia by the ACG and the Canadian Association of Gastroenterology (CAG) were updated in 2017, and recommendations for functional esophageal disorders by the Rome Foundation were revised in 2016 [2,6]. With growing evidence of adverse effects with long-term PPIs, safe PPI prescribing recommendations by the AGA and PPI deprescribing guidelines by the University of Ottawa in Ontario, Canada, were both published in 2017 [63,108].

As of 2018, clinical guidance for GERD management is conflicting and appears to be in a transition phase. In aggregate, the most useful approach retains the PPI trial while incorporating diagnostic advances that identify underlying causes of GERD symptoms to better inform treatment selection.

DIAGNOSTIC WORKUP

As mentioned, patients presenting with heartburn and acid regurgitation (sometimes with non-cardiac chest pain or dysphagia) are considered to have suspected GERD, confirmed by response to an empiric PPI trial. PPI nonresponse does not rule out GERD, but prompts diagnostic testing [1]. Typical GERD symptoms can reflect non-GERD conditions with or without abnormal (pathologic) esophageal acid exposure, and GERD can be erosive or non-erosive [48,109]. With extraesophageal symptoms associated with GERD, reflux is more often a co-factor than an etiology, and these patients should receive proper evaluation for non-GERD causes such as allergic, pulmonary, or ENT disorders [110].

Phenotypic characterization, a key diagnostic concept, means that different underlying pathologies can look similar in symptom expression. The underlying pathologies in GERD-related disorders differ in treatment response, and effective therapeutic targeting hinges on diagnostic findings [55]. Dual phenotypic characterization is recommended. With this approach, esophageal structure and function are both assessed and diagnosed if abnormal. Endoscopy and biopsy assessment of structure and pH-impedance monitoring plus manometry assessment of function establish the proper diagnosis in most cases [55].

Structural and Histologic Assessment

Upper GI Endoscopy

Endoscopy identifies and documents reflux-related esophageal mucosal damage; the presence and severity of reflux disease complications, such as erosive esophagitis, Barrett esophagus, or peptic ulcers; and anatomic abnormalities, such as hiatal hernia, masses, and strictures [110]. Upper GI endoscopy is the most common initial test in patients with GERD symptoms and PPI nonresponse and is performed urgently in patients with alarm features [1,111]. This procedure consists of an endoscope being fed down the esophagus into the stomach and duodenum, where a small camera sends video images to a monitor screen for close inspection of the esophageal lining [112].

Endoscopic findings of esophagitis, esophageal erosion, eosinophilic esophagitis, or Barrett esophagus are highly suggestive of chronic esophageal epithelial exposure to reflux [48]. Erosive esophagitis is visually graded during endoscopy using Los Angeles (LA) classification [30].

GERD is diagnosed when endoscopy shows erosive esophagitis, and further testing is usually not needed. However, esophagitis is present in only 33% of patients with GERD symptoms and the absence of esophagitis does not rule out GERD. Patients with negative endoscopy should receive functional assessment [73].

Esophageal Biopsy

Esophageal biopsy specimens allow histologic assessment of esophageal mucosal injury. Biopsies are obtained during endoscopy to confirm or rule out suspicions of eosinophilic esophagitis (suggested by esophageal symptoms) or Barrett esophagus (suggested during endoscopy) [73]. Biopsies can also identify dilated distal intercellular spaces, a possible mechanism of GERD symptoms. Esophageal biopsy is not recommended in suspected GERD with normal endoscopy [73].

Functional Assessment

pH Monitoring

pH monitoring in the distal esophagus measures the extent of acid exposure using either a trans-nasal catheter (24 hours) or wireless, capsule-based pH testing (48 hours) [1,110]. The capsule-based approach is preferred because it increases detection. Extension of pH monitoring to 96 hours is an option. This increases pathologic findings and diagnostic yield over 24- and 48-hour pH monitoring in more complex patients [113].

Wireless pH monitoring uses a small capsule, endoscopically attached to the esophageal wall, to record and transmit pH data to a receiver worn on the belt. Patients push a button when experiencing symptoms. The capsule detaches and is excreted 7 to 10 days later [112].

pH monitoring measures:

- Acid exposure time (i.e., the percentage of time esophageal pH is <4)

- Number of acid reflux episodes

- Number of episodes lasting longer than five minutes

- Longest reflux episode

Esophageal acid exposure time is the most useful indicator of pathologic acid reflux. Off-PPI testing assesses symptom provocation by acid reflux events; on-PPI testing measures persistent esophageal acid exposure despite PPI acid suppression [48].

In patients with GERD symptoms, NERD is diagnosed with negative endoscopy and pathologic acid reflux. Further testing is performed when endoscopy and pH monitoring are negative.

Esophageal Impedance Monitoring

Non-acid reflux is undetectable by standard pH monitoring but can induce symptoms in patients with GERD or functional esophageal disorders and is common in patients maintained on PPIs [48]. Impedance monitoring is a valuable test in patients with suspected GERD but negative pH testing, atypical or extraesophageal symptoms, or refractory GERD [4].

Esophageal impedance monitoring detects changes in the resistance of electrical current on a catheter placed into the esophagus. Impedance monitoring is usually combined with pH monitoring to record antegrade or retrograde movement of liquid and gas into the esophagus and to identify reflux as acidic, weakly acidic, or weakly alkaline [4]. Acid reflux is defined as a pH <4 in the esophagus; non-acid reflux is pH >4. The latter includes weakly acidic (4 <pH<7) and weakly alkaline (pH ≥7) reflux [1].

High-Resolution Esophageal Manometry

Functional assessment of the LES and the esophageal body is performed by esophageal manometry. High-resolution manometry (HRM) is often used with esophageal impedance; some devices combine both. HRM uses a catheter, inserted transnasally, with closely spaced sensors that measure the intraluminal pressure of the entire esophagus during swallowing [77]. In patients with GERD symptoms or NERD with poor PPI response, HRM identifies altered esophageal motility, impaired LES function, and/or transient LES relaxations to explain symptom persistence [55,114]. HRM is also valuable in excluding possible underlying esophageal motility disorders [115]. HRM is combined with 48-hour pH testing to assess patients with [1,73]:

- Persistent esophageal symptoms during PPI therapy to exclude non-GERD causes

- Recurrent symptoms after PPI discontinuation

- Atypical symptoms (e.g., chest pain, asthma) in patients without esophagitis

It should also be conducted before antireflux surgery for diagnostic confirmation.

Gastric Scintigraphy

Gastroparesis (delayed gastric emptying) is an important contributor to GERD symptoms in many patients. These patients generally have negative endoscopy findings and greater odds of PPI nonresponse. With suspicion of gastroparesis, a four-hour gastric emptying scintigraphy is used [110,116].

Barium Swallow

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

The University of Michigan asserts that barium radiography has limited usefulness in the diagnosis of GERD and is not recommended.

https://www.med.umich.edu/1info/FHP/practiceguides/gerd/gerd.12.pdf

Last Accessed: September 7, 2018

Strength of Recommendation/Level of Evidence: IIIB (Generally should not be performed based on controlled trials with no randomization)

Achalasia is an esophageal motility disorder with incomplete LES relaxation, increased LES pressure, and esophageal body aperistalsis, leading to poor clearance and esophageal dilation. Aside from dysphagia to solids and liquids, patients with achalasia may experience heartburn and regurgitation. Barium swallow with HRM can differentiate achalasia and other esophageal motility disorders from GERD [48].

AMERICAN GASTROENTEROLOGICAL ASSOCIATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The diagnostic process is relatively straightforward until patients with GERD symptoms show negative endoscopic, pH, and impedance findings. At this point, the diagnostic pathway becomes vague, but it is clarified by practice recommendations from the AGA and the Rome Foundation.

The AGA has stated that treatment guidelines emphasizing empiric PPI trials should be rewritten to stress the importance of clinical management guided by symptom presentation, anatomy, and focused diagnostic testing [73]. To this end, the AGA published a novel approach to GERD management in 2017, guided by the four GERD symptom domains identified by the National Institutes of Health and based on patient-reported outcomes [117]:

- Liquid and food sensations (e.g., reflux sensations, regurgitation)

- Painful sensations (e.g., heartburn, chest pain)

- Belching and hiccups (supragastric and gastric belching)

- Head and neck sensations (e.g., ENT and respiratory symptoms)

While GERD diagnosis lacks a criterion standard, the AGA states that focused diagnostic testing based on clinical history and GERD symptom domains can identify the diverse GERD-related phenotypes. This, in turn, best informs the optimal management approach [73].

The AGA stresses the importance of considering visceral hypersensitivity and psychosocial distress when patients fail PPIs and diagnostic testing is negative. In any GERD symptom domain, these factors can exacerbate the primary symptoms and adversely impact patients' ability to cope with symptoms [73].

Patients with Food and Liquid Sensation

Primary regurgitation and reflux symptoms (e.g., reflux into throat and mouth, wet burps, choking on liquid or food reflux) may reflect esophageal dysmotility or rumination syndrome. The step-wise diagnostic process outlined by the AGA starts with endoscopy to detect mechanical obstruction, eosinophilic esophagitis, or hiatal hernia [73]. With negative endoscopy, esophageal HRM is used. With meal-related regurgitation or suspected rumination syndrome, postprandial HRM is indicated.

In these patients, PPI response is less than 50%, because symptoms often result from reflux burden/volume instead of reflux acidity [118]. Reflux volume can reflect esophagogastric junction distensibility [48]. With hypotensive gastroesophageal junction or impaired esophageal motility on HRM, the next step is to assess with pH-impedance testing.

With abnormal reflux on PPI, dose-escalation benefit is unlikely and treatment addresses other pathophysiology [73]. With incompetent gastroesophageal junction and/or hiatal hernia, antireflux surgery is indicated to restore antireflux barrier function. Without hiatal hernia or hypotensive gastroesophageal junction, patients may still benefit from antireflux surgery. Transient LES relaxations may drive reflux with normal gastroesophageal junction pressure and anatomy; in these patients, use baclofen for reflux inhibition.

Patients with Painful Sensations

Pain (e.g., chest pain, heartburn, throatburn) is a primary symptom of GERD, and PPI response is often sufficient to guide management [73]. In cases of PPI nonresponse, endoscopy is used to explore alternative diagnoses. With negative endoscopy, pH-impedance testing off-PPI should be done to assess esophageal acid exposure, type of reflux event, and reflux/symptom correlation.

With normal impedence testing findings, functional heartburn or chest pain is the likely diagnosis, so HRM should be done to rule out esophageal motility disorders. Patients with positive HRM may have reflux hypersensitivity or refractory GERD (abnormal acid exposure with or without reflux symptom correlation) [6]. With confirmed pathologic acid exposure, pH-impedance testing on-PPI is used to assess PPI-refractory reflux mechanism (e.g., impaired gastric acid suppression, continued reflux, functional overlap) [73,119]. For patients with functional heartburn/chest pain or reflux hypersensitivity, pain modulators and behavioral therapies are indicated to target visceral hypersensitivity. Patients with reflux hypersensitivity may also require PPIs and baclofen for reflux inhibition.

Patients with Belching Syndromes

Aerophagia is a functional GI disorder of repetitive troublesome belching and abdominal discomfort from excessive air swallowing, also associated with visceral hypersensitivity [72,110]. Other belching syndromes include [72,110]:

- Gastric belching (the venting of gas from the stomach)

- Supragastric belching (esophageal air ingestion followed by immediate expulsion before reaching the stomach)

- Rumination syndrome (a behavioral condition with symptoms of postprandial belching and regurgitation often mistaken for GERD)

It is important to distinguish supragastric from gastric belching, because supragastric belches do not originate from the stomach, making transient LES relaxation therapy ineffective.

The first step in assessing these patients is the use of HRM/impedance testing to differentiate belching type, rumination syndrome, or GERD [73,110,120,121]. PPIs may reduce heartburn or chest pain with a transient LES relaxation-mediated belching syndrome. If only belching is present (not other reflux symptoms), PPIs should be discontinued. Patients with supragastric belching or rumination syndrome should be referred to behavioral therapy or a speech pathologist.

If postprandial HRM/impedance is negative for gastric belching, pH-impedance testing is indicated to assess belching pattern and reflux burden [73]. With normal reflux burden and gastric belching, patients may benefit from reflux inhibition with baclofen. Patients with gastric belching and abnormal reflux burden may benefit from the addition of PPIs. Antireflux surgery should be used cautiously in belching syndromes, as the risks of gas bloat and worsening supragastric belching can be substantial.

Patients with Head and Neck Sensations

In the context of presumed GERD, prominent ENT and/or respiratory symptoms are challenging; non-reflux cause is likely. PPI response is comparable to placebo in randomized trials [19]. The extent of symptom association with GERD guides initial management [15,73]. Without close symptom association, clinicians should focus on non-reflux causes. With closer symptom association, pH-impedance testing off-PPI should be used to guide management decisions. Patients with normal results are unlikely to benefit from PPI dose escalation, but patients with abnormal esophageal acidity may benefit from antireflux procedures, with the caveat that symptoms are more refractory.

FUNCTIONAL ESOPHAGEAL DISORDERS: ROME IV CRITERIA

Functional esophageal disorders are diagnosed and classified using Rome Foundation criteria, which has changed over time to incorporate new scientific evidence. Functional esophageal disorders are highly prevalent in patients with suspected GERD, but their consideration in the GERD diagnostic process is often neglected. It is essential to include these disorders, because treatment is distinct from other GERD-related disorders [5].

Functional esophageal disorders do not progress along a tangible organic natural history, with chronicity reflecting greater pathophysiology and disease burden [6]. All functional esophageal disorders require the following for diagnosis [6]:

- Diagnostic criteria present in the past three months

- Symptom onset at least six months before diagnosis

- Symptom frequency two or more days per week (or one or more days per week for functional chest pain and functional dysphagia)

- Absence of major esophageal motor disorders (e.g., achalasia/gastroesophageal junction outflow obstruction, diffuse esophageal spasm, aperistalsis, hypercontractile peristalsis)

Functional Chest Pain

Functional chest pain is a subtype of non-cardiac chest pain. Initial cardiac evaluation is required in both, because history and physical examination do not reliably differentiate esophageal from cardiac chest pain. Functional chest pain is defined as recurring, unexplained, retrosternal chest pain of presumed esophageal origin, not explained by reflux disease or other mucosal or motor processes and with pain differing from heartburn [6].

Clinical Evaluation and Diagnosis

After exclusion of a cardiac cause, further workup is necessary and is guided by common underlying causes of non-cardiac chest pain and clinical evaluation findings [6,122]. With high prevalence in GERD, a high-dose PPI trial is used to assess for a possible GERD trigger of chest pain. With PPI nonresponse, pH-impedance testing off-PPI is recommended if suspicion of GERD remains. Endoscopy with biopsy is recommended to rule out eosinophilic esophagitis and Barrett esophagus. HRM may be considered when GERD is ruled out, because major motor disorders are exclusion criteria.

In order to diagnose functional chest pain, all of the following criteria must be present [6]:

- Retrosternal chest pain or discomfort, after cardiac causes are ruled out

- No associated esophageal symptoms, such as heartburn and dysphagia

- No evidence that acid reflux or eosinophilic esophagitis is the cause of symptoms

Functional Heartburn

The definition of functional heartburn has evolved from a NERD-spectrum disorder in Rome III to a stand-alone functional esophageal diagnosis in Rome IV [123]. The current diagnosis emphasizes a lack of conclusive evidence for GERD; the absence of symptom-reflux correlation and PPI nonresponse alert to a possible functional disorder [6].

Clinical Evaluation and Diagnosis

Functional heartburn is diagnosed after careful history identifies heartburn as the dominant symptom and stepwise evaluation is negative for GERD, eosinophilic esophagitis, and esophageal motor disorders. Most patients are identified by PPI nonresponse, a core diagnostic criteria [6,124]. After nonresponse to PPI trial, endoscopy and esophageal biopsies are used, regardless of esophageal mucosa appearance, to assess for reflux esophagitis, Barrett esophagus, eosinophilic esophagitis, or a nonpeptic inflammatory process. pH-impedance testing is used to identify acidic reflux and symptom/reflux correlation.

Diagnosis of NERD is made when there is evidence of abnormal esophageal acid exposure. When symptoms correlate with weakly acidic/non-acidic reflux events, the diagnosis is reflux hypersensitivity. Functional heartburn is diagnosed with normal esophageal acid and no symptom/reflux correlation. Diagnostic criteria are [6]:

- Burning retrosternal discomfort or pain

- No symptom relief despite optimal PPI therapy

- No evidence that reflux (abnormal acid exposure or symptom/reflux correlation) or eosinophilic esophagitis is the cause of symptoms

GERD (proven by endoscopy and pH testing) and PPI nonresponse may reflect [6]:

- True refractory reflux (abnormal acidity during pH-impedance testing on-PPI)

- Overlapping functional heartburn and GERD (normal acid exposure, no symptom/reflux correlation during pH-impedance testing on-PPI)

- Overlapping reflux hypersensitivity and GERD (normal acid exposure, symptom/reflux association during pH-impedance testing on-PPI)

Reflux Hypersensitivity

Reflux hypersensitivity describes heartburn or chest pain symptoms, endoscopy negative for reflux injury, and pH-impedance testing negative for abnormal acid burden but positive for symptom triggering by non-acidic reflux [6].

Clinical Evaluation and Diagnosis

As with functional chest pain and functional heartburn, an empiric PPI trial begins the diagnostic process for reflux hypersensitivity. Partial or poor PPI response points to functional heartburn or reflux hypersensitivity. Endoscopy should be used to rule out esophagitis, Barrett esophagus, and eosinophilic esophagitis [124].

A reflux hypersensitivity diagnosis hinges on sensitivity to reflux events. Acid parameters should be in the normal range on- and off-PPI [125]. Reflux hypersensitivity differs from functional heartburn by significant symptom/non-acidic reflux correlation [6,33]. The diagnostic criteria are [6]:

- Retrosternal symptoms, including heartburn and chest pain

- Normal endoscopy and no evidence that eosinophilic esophagitis is the cause for symptoms

- Symptoms triggered by reflux events, despite normal acid exposure on pH or pH-impedance testing

A PPI response does not exclude this diagnosis.

Functional Dysphagia

Functional dysphagia is a sensation of abnormal bolus transit through the esophageal body in the absence of structural, mucosal, or motor abnormalities to explain the symptom. Diagnosis requires exclusion of oropharyngeal mechanisms of dysphagia, structural lesions in the tubular esophagus, GERD, eosinophilic esophagitis, and major motor disorders [6].

Clinical Evaluation and Diagnosis

Careful history should be obtained for patients with suspected functional dysphagia to exclude oropharyngeal dysphagia and to detect conditions that mimic or contribute to dysphagia (e.g., globus, xerostomia, odynophagia) [6,126,127,128]. PPI trial and upper endoscopy with biopsy can exclude GERD and eosinophilic esophagitis. Barium contrast using solid boluses is indicated to detect subtle strictures often overlooked on endoscopy and other obstructive processes, such axial hiatal hernias.

In the absence of structural lesions, HRM should be used to exclude major motor disorders. During HRM, multiple rapid swallows, water drinking, or food ingestion can improve detection of obstructive motor mechanisms that explain dysphagia. Borderline or minor motor disorders are compatible with functional dysphagia.

The diagnostic criteria for functional dysphagia are [6]:

- Sense of solid and/or liquid foods sticking, lodging, or passing abnormally through the esophagus

- No evidence that esophageal mucosal or structural abnormality is the cause of symptoms

- No evidence that reflux or eosinophilic esophagitis is the cause of symptoms

ESOPHAGEAL DISORDERS

Erosive Esophagitis

Esophageal erosions are observable during endoscopy and visually graded using the LA classification, which provides endoscopic stratification of esophagitis severity [30]:

- Grade A: One or more mucosal breaks ≤5 mm, does not extend between the tops of two mucosal folds

- Grade B: One or more mucosal breaks >5 mm, does not extend between the tops of two mucosal folds

- Grade C: One or more mucosal breaks that are continuous between the tops of two or more mucosal folds but involve less than 75% of the circumference

- Grade D: One or more mucosal breaks that involve ≥75% of the esophageal circumference

Mucosal breaks are areas of slough or erythema with discrete demarcation from adjacent, more normal-looking mucosa. In a validation study, severity of esophageal acid exposure was significantly related to the severity grade of esophagitis. Pretreatment esophagitis grades A through C were significantly related to heartburn severity, PPI treatment outcomes, and risk for symptom relapse off of PPIs [30].

Eosinophilic Esophagitis

Eosinophilic esophagitis is a chronic disorder characterized by an aberrant inflammatory response involving local production of eotaxin-3, a chemokine that attracts eosinophils to the esophageal mucosa. Eosinophils cause local tissue damage and recruit and/or activate other effector cells, such as mast cells, which facilitate esophageal fibrous remodeling [129]. Progressive loss of tissue elasticity from inflammatory cell infiltration can elicit motor abnormalities [3,130].

Patients with eosinophilic esophagitis that does not respond to PPIs are diagnosed with "true eosinophilic esophagitis;" good PPI response or abnormal acid reflux on pH testing results in a diagnosis of GERD. The term "PPI-responsive eosinophilic esophagitis" was coined for the latter group, despite nearly identical clinical, endoscopic, and histologic features in both groups [129]. GERD is associated with eosinophilic esophagitis and should be ruled out by pH testing [48].

Therapy in patients with PPI-responsive eosinophilic esophagitis can reverse the inflammatory signature, but PPI response as diagnostic exclusion for eosinophilic esophagitis has been controversial [129]. In 2017, the first practice guidelines that eliminated the eosinophilic esophagitis vs. PPI-responsive eosinophilic esophagitis dichotomy were published [131]. In this guideline, diagnostic criteria for eosinophilic esophagitis are organized into three categories [131]:

- Clinical features

- Symptoms of esophageal dysfunction with dysphagia

- Food impaction

- Abdominal pain

- Nausea

- Reflux-like symptoms

- Histologic features

- Esophageal eosinophil-predominant inflammation limited to the esophagus

- Detection of 15 eosinophils in at least one high-power field

- Other causes ruled out

- Eosinophilic gastroenteritis

- Crohn disease

- Hypereosinophilic syndrome

- Parasites

- Drug hypersensitivity

- Achalasia

- Vasculitis

- Connective tissue disorders

Barrett Esophagus

As noted, reflux injury to the esophageal squamous epithelium can lead to Barrett esophagus, a metaplastic process whereby the squamous cells are replaced by columnar epithelium-containing goblet cells [48]. Patients with Barrett esophagus may experience heartburn, regurgitation, or less commonly, dysphagia or a globus sensation, but others remain asymptomatic [45].

The ACG states that Barrett esophagus diagnosis requires endoscopic detection of columnar metaplasia plus biopsy confirmation of metaplasia with goblet cells [132]. In contrast, the British Society of Gastroenterology and the GERD Society Study Committee in Japan state that the presence of goblet cells is not required to diagnose Barrett esophagus, with diagnosis based solely on endoscopic detection of columnar metaplasia [45,133,134].

DYSPEPSIA

Dyspepsia is a common GI condition of epigastric pain, and dyspeptic symptoms are common in patients with GERD, especially with frequent reflux-related symptoms [58]. Rome IV minimized the diagnosis of GERD in those with dyspepsia by excluding patients with heartburn and acid regurgitation [135].

This definition is best suited for clinical research, but it is less relevant in clinical practice, because many patients have overlapping GERD and dyspepsia symptoms [2,136]. To improve relevance in the real-world clinical setting, dyspepsia criteria were jointly updated in 2017 by the ACG/CAG [2]. They are:

- Predominant epigastric pain lasting at least one month

- Associated with any other upper GI symptom (e.g., epigastric fullness, nausea, vomiting, heartburn), but epigastric pain is the primary feature

Functional dyspepsia is dyspepsia in which endoscopy (and other tests, when relevant) has ruled out apparent pathology that explain symptoms.

Based on their definition of dyspepsia and functional dyspepsia, recommendations for clinical management were published by ACG/CAG, presented sequentially for patients who fail initial or subsequent therapies [2]. The ACG/CAG states this guideline does not apply to patients with alarm features in the absence of epigastric pain; to patients with epigastric pain that suggests a pancreatic or biliary source; or to patients with other alarm features that require non-endoscopic testing [2].

Patients with dyspepsia should undergo noninvasive testing for Helicobacter pylori. If testing is positive, treatment should focus on this infection. When patients are H. pylori-negative or remain symptomatic after H. pylori eradication, PPIs should be prescribed. With nonresponse to PPIs or H. pylori eradication therapy, prokinetic therapy and a tricyclic antidepressant should be offered [2]. With nonresponse to medications, psychologic therapy should be explored.

Endoscopy is not suggested for patients younger than 60 years of age to investigate alarm features or exclude upper GI neoplasia. However, endoscopy is indicated to exclude upper GI neoplasia in patients 60 years of age and older. Motility studies are suggested in selected patients when gastroparesis is strongly suspected.

10. INITIAL MANAGEMENT OF GERD

The objective of GERD treatment is to control symptoms, heal the esophagus, and prevent recurrent esophagitis or other complications by reducing gastric acidity and decreasing esophageal reflux [46,53,137]. The diverse clinical presentation and underlying pathology of GERD has imposed significant challenges in long-term symptomatic management. A patient-centered, individualized approach can optimize patient outcomes across the GERD spectrum, and the following elements are important for clinicians to consider in all patients: a secure and clear diagnosis, early patient engagement, adherence to therapy, and a targeted approach [55].

A secure and differentiated diagnosis is vital, especially in PPI-refractory GERD. Extraesophageal symptoms and their relationship to pathologic acid exposure should be evaluated, because abnormal perception frequently contributes to symptom expression and therapy response.

Early patient engagement is important to help patients' understanding of their GERD symptoms, long-term implications on quality of life, and possible complications of strictures, extraesophageal symptoms, Barrett esophagus, and cancer. This information-sharing empowers patients to take ownership and control of their chronic disease management and minimizes undue fear and anxiety [55,138].

Clinicians should emphasize the importance of lifelong adherence to dietary and lifestyle measures to prevent relapse or exacerbations, even during long-term PPI or postsurgical remission. Unless such measures are understood and practiced by patients, therapy is likely to fail. Medically or surgically refractory GERD often originates from poor dietary habits and weight gain [55,139].

Most patients respond well to PPIs, but many can require changes in dose timing, dose doubling, switching to alternative or adjunctive agents, or endoscopic antireflux therapy or antireflux surgery [55]. A tailored, treat-to-target approach that considers long-term safety, tolerability, and patient preference is highly preferable to therapy based on empiricism or cost savings.

LIFESTYLE INTERVENTIONS

Before making pharmacologic recommendations to patients, consider lifestyle modifications that can considerably improve symptoms alone or combined with other strategies. During history-taking and physical examination, note the presence of risk factors for GERD, including agents or physical states that decrease pressure in the LES and increase transient LES relaxations. When these factors are present and modifiable by patient behavior change, they are targets for lifestyle interventions [46].

Most commonly, patients are recommended to avoid foods that decrease LES pressure and to minimize behaviors that predispose to increased esophageal acid exposure [46]. In contrast to the extensive data on acid inhibiting medication in GERD, relatively few studies are published on lifestyle intervention [140]. Lifestyle modifications with the strongest evidence support are weight loss and head-of-bed elevation [46].

Weight Loss

Weight gain and weight loss are associated with an increase and decrease in reflux symptoms, respectively, in both normal and overweight individuals [54]. Weight loss in overweight or obese patients with GERD symptoms is one of the most strongly supported lifestyle modification interventions. Several randomized controlled trials and well-designed observational studies have shown reduced reflux symptoms and esophageal acid exposure with weight loss, with a dose-dependent decreased presence of reflux symptoms following weight reduction [140].

The AACE/ACE recommends all overweight or obese patients with GERD should undergo weight loss, with the goal loss of 10% of body weight or greater. PPI therapy should be administered during dietary and weight-loss interventions [141]. Bariatric and other surgical options for obese patients may be considered.

Head-of-Bed Elevation

The recumbent position is associated with worsening of esophageal pH values and GERD symptoms. Several randomized controlled trials have demonstrated improvement in GERD symptoms and esophageal pH values with head-of-bed elevation. Wood or cement blocks may be placed under the feet of the bed to raise the head end 6 to 10 inches. Wedges can also be inserted between the mattress and box-spring to elevate the body from the waist up and are available at drugstores and medical supply stores. Stacking pillows is ineffective [15,140]. Some patients may invest in adjustable beds that allow for easy personalization of this elevation. Patients with nocturnal GERD symptoms may find substantial relief from head-of-bed elevation and avoiding meals three hours before bedtime, especially foods with high fat content [46].

Smoking Cessation

Tobacco smoking reduces LES pressure and salivary bicarbonate secretion, which facilitates reflux and decreases acid buffering [140]. However, smoking cessation has shown inconsistent benefits in GERD [15]. A large prospective study of 29,610 participants found smoking cessation was associated with decreased severe reflux symptoms in normal-weight individuals on PPI treatment (versus those who continued daily smoking), but no effect was found in overweight or obese individuals. This was thought to reflect the minimal added contribution from smoking compared with obesity in GERD pathophysiology, with smoking a more important factor in non-obese individuals [142].

Foods and Beverages

Consumption of chocolate and carbonated beverages has been found to decrease LES pressure, but cessation of these agents does not necessarily raise LES pressure, decrease transient relaxations, or improve GERD symptoms [46]. Clinicians routinely recommend patients with GERD avoid coffee and caffeinated beverages, but whether coffee or caffeine itself is a factor in the pathophysiology of GERD is unclear; studies show conflicting results [54].

Protein and dietary fat have shown opposite effects on the LES; protein ingestion increases LES pressure, and fat ingestion decreases LES pressure. Ingestion of total fat, saturated fat, and cholesterol were higher in patients with GERD symptoms than those without symptoms in one study, but this effect only held in patients with BMI >25 [54,143,144].

A study examined dietary guideline adherence in 317 patients with GERD and whether adherence was related to reflux symptom severity and frequency. Compared with GERD-free controls, patients with GERD, even with moderate-severe or frequent symptoms, were as likely to consume tomato products and large-portion meals and were significantly more likely to consume soft drinks and tea and eat fried and high-fat foods. The results held when PPI users were excluded. If dietary modification is effective in reducing GERD, the results suggest substantial potential for nondrug interventions for many patients with GERD [145]. BMI was not analyzed separately.

Clinical trials have failed to consistently capture the aggravating effect of the consumption of chocolate, carbonated beverages, alcohol, coffee/caffeine, spicy foods, tomatoes or tomato sauce, citrus, or fatty foods on GERD symptoms. The equivocal findings are partly due to methodology problems [146]. More recent evidence supports the role of certain trigger foods, while population studies endorse decreased reflux symptoms with specific diets [139]. Specific foods or beverages are clearly GERD symptom triggers for some patients. When triggers are identified, their avoidance can bring considerable symptom relief [15].

Interestingly, a comparison of patients with GERD who performed Ramadan fasting and those who did not found significant reductions in GERD symptoms and severity in the fasting group before the end of the month compared with the non-fasting group [147].

Medications

Common medications that facilitate decrease in LES pressure and increase in transient relaxations include beta-adrenergic agonists, anticholinergics, nitrates, PDE-5 inhibitors (e.g., sildenafil, tadalafil), theophylline, calcium channel blockers, and benzodiazepines [46]. As discussed, regular use of NSAIDs is linked to a range of adverse GI effects; concurrent use of NSAIDs and SSRIs further elevates risks of upper GI ulceration and bleeding [108]. In patients prescribed these medications, possible contribution to GERD symptoms should be discussed. It is also worth revisiting if a patient has poor response to acid suppressant medications to determine if therapeutic alternatives are feasible.

NSAIDs should be discontinued whenever possible. If this is not feasible, PPI therapy should be initiated and NSAID dose reduction considered. PPIs are more effective than H2RAs in reducing NSAID-induced upper GI injury [148].

Misoprostol is a prostaglandin analogue also used for gastroprotection during NSAID use and is approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for prevention of NSAID-induced ulcer disease. Misoprostol is more effective than H2RAs in preventing NSAID-induced mucosal injury and equally effective as PPI in ulcer prevention with NSAID use. However, GI side effects, especially diarrhea, can limit patient tolerability [148].

ANTACIDS AND HISTAMINE-2 RECEPTOR ANTAGONISTS

GERD is a chronic disease, and proper treatment should be preventive in nature instead of reactive. PPIs are the standard of care, but less potent interventions may be suitable for some patients [46].

Antacids

Antacids are popular for treating occasional mild episodes of reflux and use different combinations of three basic salts—magnesium, calcium, and aluminum—with hydroxide or bicarbonate ions to neutralize gastric acid [9]. Antacids only provide quick, short-acting relief for 30 to 60 minutes, do not promote healing of erosive esophagitis, and only neutralize acid already secreted [78]. The role of antacids in the treatment of GERD is limited to patients with known triggers or breakthrough symptoms not effectively controlled by other medications. If used, antacids should be taken after each meal and at bedtime. Patients should receive education on the differences between occasional indigestion and GERD so they do not try to self-treat and subsequently fail to achieve relief [46].

Histamine-2 Receptor Antagonists

Cimetidine, ranitidine, famotidine, and nizatidine are currently the FDA-approved H2RA agents for the treatment of GERD and are available over the counter. H2RAs decrease gastric acid secretion in a reversible fashion by blocking the action of histamine on H2 receptors of gastric parietal cells. The inhibition of acid secretion results in an increase in gastric pH and a decrease in pepsin activity. Over-the-counter formulations are available at a dose that is typically half the lowest standard prescription dosage [46].

This class of drugs is uniformly safe and well tolerated. The risk of adverse effects is slightly increased with cimetidine because it interacts with cytochrome P-450, potentially leading to drug-drug interactions [78].

Taken in standard divided doses, H2RAs can achieve symptom relief in some patients with milder or intermittent GERD. However, H2RAs have a dose ceiling; dose escalation above the recommended range does not further improve response. Over-the-counter H2RAs are particularly useful when taken before reflux. The peak potency of antacids and H2RAs is similar, but H2RAs have a much longer duration of action—up to 10 hours [78].

The ACG practice guidelines recommend H2RA use as a maintenance option in patients without erosive disease if patients experience heartburn relief [15]. A main limitation of H2RAs is tachyphylaxis (development of tolerance), often within two weeks of daily use. This pharmacologic phenomenon results in declining acid suppression and limits the regular use of H2RAs in clinical practice [149].

PPI THERAPY

Evidence from a systematic review of publications and practice guidelines addressing safe and appropriate PPI use were synthesized into an expert consensus statement on appropriate indications and treatment durations for PPI therapy (Table 2) [150,151]. The consensus statement reflects current knowledge based on published evidence and real-world clinical use that may not have been available to the FDA when PPI indications were approved.

Table 2: INDICATIONS FOR APPROPRIATE PPI THERAPY

FDA-Approved Indications for PPI Therapy

Treatment of GERD

Healing of erosive esophagitis

Maintenance of healed erosive esophagitis

Risk reduction for gastric ulcer associated with NSAIDs

Helicobacter pylori eradication to reduce the risk of duodenal ulcer recurrence in combination with antibiotics

Zollinger-Ellison syndrome and other hypersecretory conditions

Short-term and maintenance treatment of duodenal ulcer

Long-Term PPI Therapy Appropriate

Barrett esophagus, asymptomatic patients with Barrett esophagusa

Healing/maintenance of healed Los Angeles grade C or D erosive esophagitis

PPI-responsive esophageal eosinophilia

Idiopathic (H. pylori- and NSAID/aspirin-negative) peptic ulcer disease

Zollinger-Ellison syndromeb

PPI-responsive GERD/NERDc, d

Patients at risk for ulcer-related bleeding from NSAIDs, for the duration of regular NSAID usea

Anti-platelet therapy in patients at high-risk for upper GI complications (i.e., age older than 65 years; concomitant use of corticosteroids or anticoagulants; or a history of peptic ulcer disease)

Steatorrhea refractory to enzyme replacement therapy in chronic pancreatitis

Short-Term PPI Therapy Appropriate (4 to 12 Weeks)

Healing of Los Angeles grade A or B erosive esophagitis

Eosinophilic esophagitis

H. pylori eradication (combined with antibiotics)e

Stress ulcer prophylaxis in high-risk patients (e.g., critically ill patients)

Functional dyspepsia

Treatment and maintenance of peptic ulcer disease

Prior to endoscopy for acute upper GI bleeding

Following endoscopic treatment of a high-risk ulcer GI bleed

PPI Use Not Appropriate

Corticosteroid users without concomitant NSAID therapy

To prevent bleeding from hypertensive gastropathy in patients with cirrhosis

Acute pancreatitis

Stress ulcer prophylaxis in non-critically ill hospitalized patients not at high-risk for ulcer formation and GI bleeding

PPI Use of Uncertain Benefit

PPI-nonresponsive GERD

Extradigestive GERD (e.g., asthma, pseudoangina, dysphoria)

GERD = gastroesophageal reflux disease, GI = gastrointestinal, NERD = non-erosive reflux disease, NSAID = nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drug.

aAGA recommendation

bRequires three to four times the usual dose

cPPI taper should be attempted to lowest effective dose, on-demand dosing, or intermittent dosing.

dAGA recommends the dose of long-term PPIs should be periodically re-evaluated so the lowest effective PPI dose can be prescribed to manage the condition.

eOne- to two-week PPI course appropriate

Source: [63,150,151]

The initial PPI approved for use in the United States was omeprazole, followed by lansoprazole, rabeprazole, pantoprazole, esomeprazole, and dexlansoprazole. Most are now available in generic forms [152]. Their introduction and widespread use revolutionized the management of acid-related diseases and minimized the role of surgery [153]. By 2015, PPIs ranked in the top 10 national health-related drug expenditures in the United States [151].

PPIs are substituted benzimidazoles and are the most potent inhibitors of gastric acid secretion available. They block the final common pathway of acid secretion in gastric parietal cells by irreversibly binding to and inactivating the proton pump [148]. For gastric secretory activity to be restored, new enzymes need to be resynthesized, a process that normally takes two to five days [78].

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

The American Society for Gastrointestinal Endoscopy suggests that repeat esophagogastroduodenoscopy be performed in patients with severe erosive esophagitis after at least an eight-week course of PPI therapy to exclude underlying Barrett esophagus or dysplasia.

https://www.asge.org/docs/default-source/education/practice_guidelines/doc-endoscopy_in_the_managment_of_gerd.pdf

Last Accessed: September 7, 2018

Level of Evidence: Low quality

As discussed, in patients without alarm features, management of GERD usually begins with an empiric PPI trial [154]. An initial trial of once-daily PPIs for at least eight weeks is recommended by the ASGE and the ACG, with four to eight weeks recommended by the ACP [15,103,111]. With nonresponse to once-daily PPIs, twice-daily PPI is initiated. Patient response and adherence is assessed after eight weeks before PPI failure/nonresponsiveness is concluded [63,154]. Some argue that incomplete response to once-daily PPI is sufficient to define PPI failure, but twice-daily dosing achieves adequate symptom control and eliminates residual acid reflux in 20% to 30% of patients with once-daily PPI nonresponse [16,155,156].

PPI Efficacy

GERD and NERD

Numerous clinical trials have shown PPIs to be superior to H2RAs, antacids, and sucralfate in alleviating GERD symptoms. PPIs result in a significantly faster healing rate of peptic ulcers (12% per week) and heartburn (11.5% per week) compared with H2RAs (6% and 6.4% per week, respectively) [148]. Long-term PPI maintenance is also more effective in preventing recurrence of reflux esophagitis (80% PPIs vs. 49% H2RAs) and esophageal strictures (46% PPIs vs. 30% H2RAs) [63].

A meta-analysis of 98 randomized controlled trials evaluated PPI and H2RA effectiveness after four to eight weeks in adults with GERD. Effectiveness (defined as esophageal healing and GERD symptom relief) and tolerability (defined as discontinuation from ineffectiveness, adverse effects, or non-adherence) was calculated for low- and high-dose daily use; high doses were uniformly more effective [157]. The agent with top-ranked effectiveness was esomeprazole (40 mg/day), followed by rabeprazole (40–50 mg/day) and pantoprazole (80 mg/day). Best tolerability was noted with omeprazole (40 mg/day), then pantoprazole (40 mg/day), lansoprazole (60 mg/day), and the H2RA ranitidine (1,200 mg/day). However, sponsorship bias was detected. Higher PPI outcomes in studies with pharmaceutical company funding may have led to overestimated esophageal healing efficacy [157].

Once-daily PPIs for eight weeks heals reflux esophagitis in more than 80% of patients, and this is further improved by twice-daily dose escalation. Esomeprazole achieves higher short-term healing rates of reflux esophagitis than omeprazole, lansoprazole, and pantoprazole, but this advantage is negligible in less severe esophagitis. PPIs are effective for symptom relief in erosive and non-erosive disease, but efficacy in reducing regurgitation is considerably lower than with heartburn [158,159].

The belief that PPIs have lower efficacy in NERD was dispelled by a meta-analysis showing that PPI efficacy for NERD was comparable to erosive disease when functional testing using pH-HRM or pH-impedance testing was added to confirm NERD after negative endoscopy findings [58,160].

GERD practice guidelines and review papers often state that PPIs lack meaningful differences in potency. However, a comparative study of PPI efficacy in intragastric pH control, measured by percentage of time at pH >4 over 24 hours, found relative potencies, compared with omeprazole (1.00; reference), of 0.23 for pantoprazole, 0.90 for lansoprazole, 1.60 for esomeprazole, and 1.82 for rabeprazole [161]. This pharmacodynamic non-equivalence should be considered when prescribing or switching PPIs [58].

Short-term PPIs are generally well-tolerated, with infrequent adverse reactions including flatulence, headache, diarrhea, abdominal pain, and nausea. These reactions are often self-limiting or can be addressed by switching to a different agent [151].

Extraesophageal Manifestations

In contrast to typical symptoms, PPI efficacy in extraesophageal manifestations of GERD is less clear-cut. PPIs are usually given twice-daily for extended periods, but evidence is not strong enough to allow clear recommendations to be made for patients with only extraesophageal symptoms. Nonetheless, an empiric PPI trial can be the initial approach to diagnose and treat the potential underlying cause of extraesophageal disease [58].

As noted, GERD is the most common and best-studied cause of non-cardiac chest pain, and PPIs are the initial pharmacologic approach in these patients. Patients with non-cardiac chest pain and endoscopic or pH-monitoring evidence of GERD tend to improve, but not resolve, with PPI therapy. In contrast, GERD-negative patients show little or no PPI response. The therapeutic benefit of PPIs in patients with chronic cough is demonstrated, but efficacy in reflux laryngitis is much weaker. Asthma and GERD often coexist, and while asthma medications can trigger GERD, PPIs may improve asthma control [58].

Dyspepsia

Dyspeptic symptoms are common in patients with GERD, especially with frequent reflux-related symptoms. In these patients, PPI therapy improves epigastric pain, belching, bloating, and early satiety, but lacks benefit with nausea and vomiting [162]. PPI efficacy in functional dyspepsia occurs at standard doses, but long-term PPI therapy for functional dyspepsia is not indicated [58].

Dyspeptic symptoms may worsen with PPI therapy or new symptoms (especially postprandial fullness) may emerge from PPI-induced inhibition of gastric motility and delayed gastric emptying. In these cases, patients should be switched to the H2RA ranitidine or nizatidine. In addition to antisecretory activity, these agents display cholinergic-like activity and accelerated gastric emptying [58,163].

Optimal Use and Duration

Optimizing PPI Use

To achieve maximum response, it is important that patients receive correct instructions on how to use PPIs. The timing of PPI administration is essential. Patients are usually initiated on once-daily dosing, which must be taken 30 to 60 minutes before the first meal of the day, as the agents are most effective after a prolonged fast (i.e., overnight). Proton pumps are highly active during the postprandial period, and with a plasma half-life of one to two hours, PPIs reach peak concentration at the time of a meal [101,148]. If increased acid suppression is required, a second dose taken 30 to 60 minutes before the evening meal is more effective than doubling the morning dose [101].

With initial therapy, patients must adhere to daily use. The antisecretory action of PPIs increases with consecutive daily dosing, and full steady-state acid inhibition is achieved after four to five days. Steady-state acid inhibition is lost with non-adherence to daily use [148].

Treatment Duration and Discontinuation

With evidence that links long-term PPI use to potential risks, GERD practice guidelines recommend PPI dose reduction or discontinuation in some patients. In 2017, the AGA recommended that after a three- to six-month treatment course with good PPI response, patients with uncomplicated GERD should attempt to stop or reduce PPIs because patients who cannot reduce PPIs face the likelihood of lifelong PPI use [63]. In these patients, esophageal pH-impedance monitoring distinguishes acid-related disorders from a functional syndrome. The best candidates for this strategy may be patients with primarily atypical symptoms and those who lack obvious predisposition to GERD from central obesity or large (>3 cm) hiatal hernia.

PPIs can be very difficult to quit, and 75% to 90% of patients with GERD relapse in the initial six months after PPI discontinuation. This is attributed to the chronicity of GERD and NERD and contribution from PPIs, as abrupt cessation may be followed by rebound acid hypersecretion and symptom exacerbation [58,101,164].

Before continuing a likely long-term PPI treatment, or for patients already on long-term PPIs, an attempt to stop PPI therapy should be considered. Tapering is more effective as a discontinuation strategy than abrupt withdrawal, patient education, or lifestyle modifications [165]. Weight loss can also be an effective strategy in obese/overweight patients. One study found 54% of patients remaining adherent to a hypocaloric diet were able to stop PPIs, and 32% reduced their PPI dose by 50% [166].

PPIs can induce parietal cell proliferation to promote a hyperacidity state after discontinuation. This rebound hyperacidic can create a dependence on continued PPI use [167]. In a study of 120 healthy volunteers, rebound acid hypersecretion occurred after 8 weeks of PPI treatment, and 44% experienced acid-related symptoms 9 to 12 weeks after discontinuation. The authors concluded patients should taper off PPIs more gradually than is commonly suggested [168]. These results have been replicated in other studies as well [56,169,170].

Because relapse frequency and severity are highly variable among patients, long-term PPI maintenance should be individualized based on clinical characteristics of the patient. Strategies include continuous/daily use, intermittent cycles of daily use, and on-demand/symptom-driven therapy. Infrequent reflux symptoms are less likely to be chronic and may respond to a different approach [58].

An alternative approach is a PPI step-down, in which the dose is reduced to determine the minimum needed. This involves a gradual reduction in dose or frequency and may include a goal of switching to "as-needed" therapy. The step-down approach allows patients to implement lifestyle modifications and find the lowest dose they need for adequate symptom control [101]. While full-dose PPIs are superior to half-dose in maintaining remission, step-down dosing with esomeprazole 20 mg maintained a significantly higher proportion of patients with GERD in symptomatic remission than lansoprazole 15 mg or pantoprazole 20 mg [158]. Because PPIs do not correct the underlying esophageal motor abnormalities of GERD, patients may require continuous acid suppression treatment to maintain remission [58].

The AGA guideline for long-term use of PPIs concludes the best current approaches to mitigate potential risks of long-term PPIs are to avoid prescribing when PPIs are not indicated and to reduce their use to the minimum dose when PPIs are indicated [63]. The AGA states most patients with uncomplicated GERD can reduce from twice-daily to once-daily PPI dosing, 33% can successfully transition from PPIs to H2RAs, and 16% are able to transition off all acid suppression. Patients with non-erosive disease who cannot transition off PPIs are usually satisfied with on-demand PPI therapy. Because PPI reduction is often successful in uncomplicated GERD, it is recommended that clinicians periodically re-evaluate patients to ensure they are taking the lowest dose sufficient to manage their condition [63].

Patients with complicated GERD (e.g., erosive disease) are usually unable to successfully reduce PPIs. Patients with good symptom control from daily PPIs who cannot reduce face lifelong PPI therapy. Assessment for an acid-related disorder with esophageal pH-impedance monitoring is recommended. This testing shows a subset of patients with poor correlation between symptoms and acidic reflux events, and strenuous efforts should be made to discontinue or reduce PPIs in these patients [63].

A Canadian guideline was published in 2017 to help clinicians identify when to taper or stop PPI therapy. In adults with upper GI symptoms who have completed a minimum four-week course of PPI treatment with resolution of upper GI symptoms, the following is recommended [108]:

- Decrease the daily dose or stop and change to on-demand (as-needed) use.

- Consider an H2RA as an alternative to PPIs.

- Patients with erosive disease, or who require daily NSAIDs, should continue their regular-dose PPI.

Criteria have also been proposed that may predict greater success halting PPIs in elderly patients living in care facilities. PPI discontinuation outcomes were evaluated in 27 elderly residents (mean age: 80 years) taking a PPI for more than six months who met all of the following criteria: 1) no indication for long-term PPIs; 2) not currently experiencing GI symptoms; 3) no previous PPI discontinuation without success; and 4) no anxiety when medications are discontinued. PPIs were stopped without taper with participants receiving medical monitoring and support. After eight weeks, 70% remained asymptomatic and did not need PPIs to manage GI symptoms [171].

PPI Chemoprevention in Barrett Esophagus

With Barrett esophagus of any mucosal length, long-term PPI use for potential chemopreventive effects against neoplastic transformation is advocated by the ACG and the AGA, but is not recommended by the British Society of Gastroenterology [63,132,172]. The evidence supporting this practice is inconsistent. A meta-analysis of observational studies found PPI use associated with a 71% reduction in risk of esophageal adenocarcinoma and/or high-grade dysplasia in Barrett esophagus, but another study concluded standard PPI therapy was unable to normalize esophageal exposure to acid in most patients with Barrett esophagus [173,174]. Individually tailored maximal acid suppression is needed to control GERD and to achieve any chemopreventive effect in Barrett esophagus [58].

PPI SAFETY CONCERNS

PPI Overuse

Following their introduction and uptake into clinical practice, PPIs became highly successful in managing patients with GERD. However, once PPIs are taken regularly, many patients remain on long-term PPIs often indefinitely, especially the elderly [58]. PPIs are available over the counter and are used indiscriminately for treating conditions without appropriate indication [74]. PPI prescriptions doubled from 1999 to 2012, and an estimated 53% to 69% of PPI prescriptions are written for inappropriate indications—cases in which the benefits of PPI use may not justify the risks [175,176]. PPIs are often overprescribed, rarely deprescribed, and frequently started inappropriately during a hospital stay, with their use extended to long-term without appropriate medical indication [177].

Use of PPIs appears disproportionate to prescribing guidelines and to the prevalence of acid-related diseases of GERD and NSAID-related gastropathy. Contributing to the continuous increase in PPI use over the last decade is inappropriate prescribing for inappropriate purposes, including prevention of gastroduodenal ulcers in low-risk patients; stress-ulcer prophylaxis in patients receiving corticosteroid therapy or anticoagulant treatment without risk factors for gastroduodenal injury; functional dyspepsia; and mistaken diagnosis of acid-related disorder [153]. The widespread overuse and inappropriate use of PPIs is especially concerning in the elderly, who have greater risk of long-term PPI-related adverse outcomes and drug-drug interactions [58].

Other Safety Concerns

Awareness that PPI use may be associated with adverse effects has increased since they were first approved for marketing. The FDA issued safety warnings for potential increased risk of osteoporosis-related fractures and Clostridium difficile infection associated with PPI therapy in 2010 and 2012, respectively [178]. In 2015, the American Geriatrics Society recommended avoiding PPI use longer than eight weeks in older adults, due to potential risk of C. difficile infection, bone loss, and fractures [179]. Reports also associate PPIs with increased risk of community-acquired pneumonia, vitamin B12 deficiency, dementia, and kidney disease [178].

The association between PPI exposure and increased risk of acute interstitial nephritis, chronic kidney disease, kidney disease progression, end-stage renal disease, and rare but potentially fatal hypomagnesemia is strong [177]. The data linking PPI use with increased risk of C. difficile infection are convincing, but the magnitude of risk is very low [148]. The relationship between PPI use and risk of community-acquired pneumonia or cardiovascular events is inconsistent and weak [177]. The duration of PPI therapy that may elevate the risks of some adverse effects is not known [178].

Of note, PPI use and mortality risk were examined in a study of Veterans Affairs healthcare system patients. Among patients newly prescribed PPIs or H2RAs and followed a median 5.71 years, PPI use was associated with a 25% greater risk of death compared with H2RAs [177]. Among new users of PPI therapy, risk of death was associated with greater PPI exposure. Compared with PPI use ≤30 days, the risk of death increased by 31% with 181 to 360 days of exposure and 51% with 361 to 720 days of PPI exposure [177]. Cause of death was not reported in this study, but the authors state the heightened risk of death was likely mediated by adverse events associated with PPI use, including kidney disease, dementia, hypomagnesemia, C. difficile infection, and/or osteoporotic fracture [177].

PPIs may also adversely impact microbial biodiversity of the GI tract. The gut microbiome is important in maintaining overall health, and alterations in its biodiversity can promote pathologic conditions. Streptococcus spp. are over-represented in biopsies of patients with gastritis and may contribute to the development of peptic ulcer disease. PPI use favors relative streptococcal abundance independent of H. pylori status and may explain the persistence of dyspeptic symptoms in patients on PPI therapy. Patients on long-term PPIs also have increased risk of enteric infections. PPI overuse may significantly shift the GI microbiome toward a less healthy state, with significant changes in the microbial composition of gastric and intestinal microbiota [76].

Considering the high prevalence of PPI use, the adverse events associated with PPI use may have public health implications. Given the potential for these risks, limiting the duration and use of PPIs to medically indicated conditions seems warranted [148,177,178].

Safety of Over-the-Counter PPIs

PPI safety concerns mostly originate from studies evaluating their prescription use, but over-the-counter use differs in several relevant ways. Patients prescribed PPIs generally take higher doses over longer treatment durations for more severe underlying conditions than over-the-counter users. In contrast, over-the-counter PPIs are generally used for shorter durations at lower dose ranges. A concern with over-the-counter PPI use is that direct consumer access without physician direction may promote inappropriate use. Real-world-use data suggest the opposite; persons using over-the-counter PPIs tend to self-select appropriately based on symptoms and are more likely to take the appropriate or fewer number of doses [180]. When over-the-counter PPI use is consistent with label instructions, a consensus panel of experts concluded that available evidence does not suggest an association with substantial health risks [180].

11. MANAGEMENT OF GERD IN PATIENTS NONRESPONSIVE TO PPIs

MEDICATION OPTIONS IN PPI-REFRACTORY GERD

If switching to rabeprazole or esomeprazole is ineffective, it is essential to assess for other disorders that may be the cause of persistent symptoms in PPI nonresponders. pH testing and HRM assess bolus clearance, reflux episodes, transient LES relaxations, and the integrity of the antireflux barrier, providing important information for treatment targeting. Excluding functional disorders is critical, as these patients are managed differently from those with pathologic reflux [149].

Pharmacologic options are available to target various mechanisms of PPI-refractory GERD, including transient LES relaxations with reflux, incomplete acid suppression, impaired esophageal clearance, and delayed gastric emptying. Targeting these mechanisms may improve symptoms and eliminate the need for antireflux surgeries [149].

An important criticism of the body of published evidence on non-PPI medications is the pervasive neglect of phenotyping to determine the underlying mechanism of symptom persistence. Without phenotyping, many patients with functional symptoms have been included in these studies, making assessment of efficacy in target populations difficult [73,149]. The medications discussed in the following sections should be added to PPIs (rather than used alone), because their efficacy alone is less-evaluated and may be poor [1,181].

H2RAs

H2RAs may improve PPI gastric acid suppression, particularly nocturnal acid breakthrough that occurs in up to 75% of patients on PPIs [149].

Adding ranitidine 300 mg or famotidine 40 mg before bed improved overall symptoms (72%) and night-time symptoms (74%) in patients taking PPIs [182]. Compared with PPI alone, adding a night-time H2RA for PPI nonresponse significantly reduced nocturnal acid breakthrough (17% vs. 64%) and percent intragastric time pH <4 (18% vs. 31.5%). Esophageal acid exposure (1.9% vs. 3.3%) and positive acid reflux/symptom correlation (0% vs. 10%) were lower but not significantly different [149,183]. Night-time H2RAs may help suppress nocturnal acid breakthrough, but tachyphylaxis limits their long-term use [149].

Promotility/Prokinetic Agents

Agents with prokinetic properties are proposed as adjunctive medications for PPI nonresponse when delayed gastric emptying is a suspected symptom contributor. Metoclopramide and domperidone are selective dopamine receptor antagonists that may improve esophageal peristalsis, accelerate esophageal acid clearance, increase LES basal pressure, and improve gastric emptying. Other possible agents include revexepride, prucalopride, and mosapride [149].

A select group of PPI nonresponders may benefit from adjunctive promotility agents. However, mosapride, the most-studied agent, is not approved in the United States. Domperidone reduced symptom scores better than PPI alone, but is also not approved and carries significant arrythmogenic risks [149]. Metoclopramide is associated with several adverse effects and use in GERD has been limited by safety concerns [184,185]. In patients with persistent GERD symptoms despite PPI treatment, two randomized controlled trials found revexepride no more effective than placebo in controlling regurgitation and reflux [186,187]. A small randomized controlled trial of prucalopride in patients with GERD and ineffective esophageal motility suggested this drug may be useful in augmenting peristalsis in these patients [188].

Transient LES Relaxation Inhibitors

Baclofen acts as an agonist of gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA) type B receptors and is prescribed to decrease transient LES relaxation-related acidic and non-acidic reflux episodes [149]. Baclofen physiologically inhibits transient LES relaxations, and studies measuring baclofen effects with pH-impedance monitoring show significant reductions in postprandial acid- and non-acid-related symptoms in patients with heartburn by reducing transient LES relaxations, increasing LES tone, and decreasing reflux episodes. Studies have also demonstrated that baclofen reduces the number of postprandial and non-acid reflux events, nocturnal reflux activity, and belching episodes [46,48]. In patients with symptomatic GERD treated with daily omeprazole plus baclofen 10 mg or placebo, baclofen significantly reduced the rates of heartburn (46% vs. 4%) and regurgitation (54% vs. 4%) [189]. Baclofen may be particularly beneficial for patients with abnormally high non- or weakly-acidic reflux events [149]. However, baclofen requires adherence to twice or three times daily dosing, and common side effects include drowsiness, fatigue, and confusion [101].

Mucosal Protective Agents

Especially in patients with NERD, PPI response is often partial or limited and symptom relief requires additional medications. Esophageal mucosal protection from acidic and non-acidic contents is another approach to PPI nonresponse. Some of these agents target the gastric acid pocket in the proximal stomach, a contributor to the pathogenesis of postprandial reflux [190].

Alginates

Alginate is a polysaccharide derived from seaweed that binds water in the acid pocket to form a viscous gel, displacing the acid pocket distally below the diaphragm. Sodium bicarbonate, often added to alginate, is converted to carbon dioxide and forms bubbles trapped within the gel. This changes the gel to a lighter substance that rises to the surface of gastric contents and floats, hence the term "raft-forming agent." Alginates offer a supplemental mechanism of acid suppression [191,192].

Gaviscon is a common raft-forming alginate formulation. In a randomized controlled trial of 136 patients with persistent reflux symptoms taking once-daily PPIs, adding alginate (10 mL four times/day) for seven days led to significantly greater reductions in reflux score and number of nights with symptoms than placebo [193].

A review of 14 studies in patients with NERD or atypical GERD symptoms found alginate-based therapies more effective in resolving reflux symptoms than placebo or antacids, and somewhat less effective than PPIs or H2RAs [192]. This review evaluated alginate monotherapy, but in practice, alginates are typically added to PPIs. Alginate-antacid formulations show efficacy comparable to single-dose omeprazole in patients with NERD [190].

Mirgeal is an alginate formulation that combines glycyrrhetinic acid and anthocyanosides, both of which have mucosal protective properties. Use in combination with PPIs showed greater reflux symptom control in patients with NERD and poor PPI response compared with alginic acid plus PPI [149].

Sucralfate

Sucralfate is a salt of sucrose sulfate and aluminum hydroxide that creates a physical barrier to block esophageal mucosa exposure to, and diffusion of, hydrochloric acid, pepsin, and bile salts. As an add-on to PPIs, sucralfate can further reduce GERD symptoms and may help induce mucosal healing and reduce recurrent esophagitis during maintenance therapy [190,194].

Hyaluronic Acid and Chondroitin Sulfate

Hyaluronic acid is involved in several key processes, including cell signaling and wound repair and regeneration. Chondroitin sulfate has possible benefits in inflammatory diseases. Formulations that combine hyaluronic acid and chondroitin sulfate have been introduced and evaluated as treatment of reflux disease [195].

In adults with NERD and poor PPI response, hyaluronic acid/chondroitin sulfate (four times per day) for 14 days led to significantly greater reductions in heartburn and regurgitation symptom intensity than placebo. Onset of effect within 30 minutes was more frequent with hyaluronic acid/chondroitin sulfate than placebo (60% vs. 30%). Complete remission was attained by 50% with hyaluronic acid/chondroitin sulfate and 10% with placebo [195].

A larger randomized controlled trial evaluated improved symptom relief with hyaluronic acid/chondroitin sulfate plus PPI compared with PPI alone in 154 patients with NERD. After two weeks of hyaluronic acid/chondroitin sulfate or placebo, significant reduction in total symptom score (on measures of heartburn, acid regurgitation, retrosternal pain, and acid taste in mouth) was reached by 52.6% with hyaluronic acid/chondroitin sulfate and 32.1% with placebo. The synergistic effect of hyaluronic acid/chondroitin sulfate and PPI treatment suggests mucosal protection added to acid suppression could improve symptom control in patients with NERD [153].

Based on current knowledge, mucosal protective compounds cannot replace PPIs, but show promise in PPI-refractory GERD or NERD in combination with PPIs [149,190]. The ACG states there is no role for sucralfate or other membrane-protectors, but these agents may represent the only effective medication protection against biliary reflux injury of the esophageal mucosa [15,83].

Pain Modulators

Compared with healthy subjects, patients with non-cardiac chest pain demonstrate higher pain sensation with esophageal exposure to balloon distension, acid infusion, and electrical and thermal stimulation [196]. In these patients, esophageal hypersensitivity results from sensitization of both peripheral afferent nerves (peripheral sensitization) and spinal dorsal horn neurons (central sensitization). Esophageal hypersensitivity and objective pathology can occur together; around 30% of patients with non-cardiac chest pain have abnormal esophageal findings on HRM [198].

Most PPI-refractory patients have NERD or functional symptoms, making treatment with pain modulators a reasonable option. Antidepressants are the most-studied medications for this indication and include tricyclic antidepressants (e.g., imipramine, nortriptyline), SSRIs (e.g., sertraline), serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors (e.g., venlafaxine), and trazodone. Doses used are lower than in depression, and randomized controlled trials have found them effective in reducing esophageal pain, especially in patients with esophageal hypersensitivity [197,199]. Antidepressants act by modulating the esophagus-brain axis. Patients with NERD and painful heartburn received functional magnetic resonance imaging (off-PPI) after 21 days of nortriptyline or placebo. Acid-induced activation in prefrontal cortex, caudate, insula, cingulate, and hippocampus brain areas were significantly reduced with nortriptyline compared with placebo [200].

A systematic review of 15 randomized controlled trials found that, compared to baseline, antidepressants increased esophageal pain thresholds 7% to 37%, reduced functional chest pain 18% to 67%, and reduced heartburn in patients with GERD 23% to 61%. Antidepressants modulate esophageal sensation, reduce functional chest pain, and may benefit a subgroup with GERD [201]. In these patients, PPI therapy can (and should) be discontinued when ineffective. The clinical relevance of distinguishing functional heartburn from esophageal hypersensitivity is unclear [202].

In patients with non-cardiac chest pain, chest pain was reduced by 50% to 63% with venlafaxine, sertraline, or imipramine, compared with 1% to 15% in those randomized to placebo. This improvement was independent of effects on depression. Side effects are the main drawback with antidepressant therapy for esophageal hypersensitivity and can adversely impact their tolerability and lead to discontinuation. Antidepressant study drop-out rates as high as 53% have been reported in this population, highlighting the need for safer, more tolerable drugs [1,203].

Novel Agents

Vonoprazan

A novel potassium-competitive acid blocker, vonoprazan, has demonstrated more potent and sustained acid suppressive effects than the PPIs lansoprazole, esomeprazole, and rabeprazole [149]. The metabolism of vonoprazan is not impacted by genetic polymorphisms of CYP2C19, which impair the efficacy of some PPIs. Vonoprazan was comparable to lansoprazole for the treatment of erosive esophagitis and overall shows more favorable pharmacodynamic and pharmacogenetic properties compared to PPIs. As of 2018, vonoprazan is not approved in the United States, but this may change in the future [149].

Melatonin

Melatonin is an important signaling molecule in gut motility and gut-liver communication, and the esophageal mucosa possesses large numbers of melatonin-binding sites [56]. Exogenous melatonin is thought to control GERD symptoms by stimulating production of nitric oxide and prostaglandin E2, inhibiting gastric acid secretion, reducing inflammatory cytokines, and preventing acid/pepsin-induced esophagitis. Melatonin is not conventional therapy but may represent an alternative for patients lacking benefit from PPIs [46].

Clinical trials in GERD are limited, but published results suggest improvements in heartburn, epigastric pain, and LES function [46]. Ramelteon is a melatonin (MT) receptor agonist with high affinity for MT1 and MT2 receptors, essentially a pharmaceutical version of melatonin that is FDA-approved for insomnia. Ramelteon is considerably more expensive than melatonin but is produced under quality control not found with melatonin supplements, because the quality and purity of supplements are unregulated in the United States. In one study, patients with frequent heartburn and/or regurgitation and chronic insomnia received ramelteon 8 mg or placebo before bed for four weeks. Ramelteon led to significant decreases in symptom scores (vs. placebo) for daytime heartburn, night-time heartburn, 24-hour heartburn, and 24-hour acid regurgitation. Insomnia severity scores were significantly reduced with ramelteon compared with placebo. Ramelteon also led to improvements in sleep efficiency and sleep latency. No significant adverse events were observed [204].

OPTIMIZING PPI ADHERENCE

Up to 40% of patients report persistent GERD symptoms despite PPI therapy [149]. An important cause of PPI failure is treatment non-adherence, with inadequate dosing or poor timing [48].

Treatment adherence should be assessed to determine true PPI nonresponse, because PPIs are often taken inappropriately; 27% of patients with GERD dose their PPI correctly and only 12% dose optimally [205]. There is poor understanding of PPI pharmacokinetics, with nearly 70% of primary care physicians and 20% of gastroenterologists incorrectly instructing patients about when to take doses [206].

PPI failure can result from taking PPIs incorrectly. As noted, gastric acid production is stimulated by food, and PPIs inactivate proton pumps only during acid production. Thus, PPI effectiveness is lost by failure to dose 30 to 60 minutes before a meal. Patients may take PPIs at bedtime for night-time symptoms, which is far less effective than before meals. Taking PPIs infrequently or as-needed, before stable efficacy is achieved, significantly reduces their benefit [1].

SWITCHING TO ANOTHER PPI

Another reason for PPI failure is variation in PPI metabolism. PPIs are primarily metabolized by the hepatic cytochrome (CY) P450 enzymatic system. CYP2C19 and CYP3A4 are the most important isoenzymes in metabolic degradation of PPIs. CYP2C19 polymorphisms (genetic variations) are common and influence the rate of serum clearance and elimination of metabolized drugs. Patient genotypes include extensive metabolizers (normal) and rapid/ultra-rapid metabolizers [48].

Omeprazole is extensively metabolized by CYP2C19. Rapid/ultra-rapid metabolizers show lower serum levels of omeprazole, reduced efficacy from rapid drug clearance, and lower rates of endoscopic healing, remission, and GERD symptom response with CYP2C19-dependent PPIs [1]. Measuring a patient's PPI metabolizer genotype is expensive, but switching to a CYP2C19-independent PPI (rabeprazole or esomeprazole) is a simple, conservative measure that may be useful in patients with incomplete acid suppression from other PPIs [149].

REFRACTORY HEARTBURN AND NOCTURNAL HEARTBURN

PPIs tend to be more effective in postprandial reflux control during the daytime than in night-time heartburn [207]. PPI-refractory heartburn is more common in NERD than erosive disease. Once-daily PPIs may control symptoms, but nocturnal intragastric acidity often remains elevated enough to produce nocturnal acid breakthrough in these patients [208]. In patients with persistent nocturnal acid breakthrough despite twice-daily PPIs, adding an H2RA at bedtime may control nocturnal acid breakthrough and associated esophageal acidification, but development of tolerance to the H2RA is likely [58].

PPI PARTIAL RESPONDERS

PPI partial responders are patients with some improvement in GERD symptoms but a significant remaining symptom burden despite optimized PPIs. Assessment of this patient population suggests functional GI disorders are common [73].

12. ANTIREFLUX SURGERY

Antireflux surgery was introduced when acid reflux was the presumed cause of GERD. Refinements in antireflux surgery and the introduction of minimally invasive options may eliminate or markedly reduce GERD symptoms by structurally restoring anatomic failure of the LES antireflux barrier—the primary underlying pathology [83].

Outcomes after any surgical management of refractory GERD are highly dependent on adherence to strict surgical indications and appropriate patient and procedure selection [209]. Guidelines for patient-procedure matching have been established (Table 3).

Table 3: PATIENT-PROCEDURE MATCHING FOR INDIVIDUALS WITH REFRACTORY GERD

Patient Characteristics

Indicated Surgical Procedure

Symptomatic GERD despite twice-daily PPIs

Laparoscopic hernia repair plus magnetic sphincter augmentation (LINX) for hernias <2 cm

Laparoscopic hernia repair plus Nissen fundoplication surgery (NFS) for hernias

Postoperatively, follow patients to ensure lifestyle and dietary adherence, minimize disease recurrence, and detect treatment failure

Incomplete PPI response, ongoing regurgitation, and patient wish for an endoscopic option

Offer transoral incisionless fundoplication (TIF)

Refractory patients with ineffective esophageal motility

TIF or a modified (Toupet) fundoplication to avoid postoperative dysphagia

Patients with good symptom control who want to discontinue PPIs

LINX or NFS

Obese patients (BMI >35) with GERD

Bariatric surgery, with Roux-en-Y bypass preferred over adjustable gastric banding or sleeve gastrectomy

Source: [48,55]

LAPAROSCOPIC FUNDOPLICATION

Fundoplication was introduced in 1955 and subsequently modified to laparoscopic fundoplication in 1991 by Dr. Rudolph Nissen, hence the term Nissen fundoplication surgery (NFS) [156]. NFS is also referred to as laparoscopic antireflux surgery or laparoscopic Nissen fundoplication. It is considered the criterion-standard antireflux surgery approach [15,55,210].

With NFS, the gastric fundus is used as a wrap to tightly augment the LES in order to reduce reflux episodes [101]. While effective at preventing reflux, this technique also prevents the normal venting of swallowed air (belching) and reduces normal reflux episodes, which can result in side effects of gas bloating syndrome, flatulence, inability to belch or vomit, and dysphagia [15,53].

Appropriate patient selection is essential for a positive outcome with this procedure, and the strongest predictors include abnormal acidic pH, symptoms of heartburn and regurgitation, and positive PPI trial [15,211]. In practice, many common indications for NFS (e.g., PPI-refractory GERD symptoms/esophagitis, GERD medication intolerance, desire to discontinue PPIs, large hiatal hernia, PPI non-adherence) deviate from positive outcome predictors [7,15]. PPI nonresponse is considered a predictor of unfavorable NFS outcomes but remains the most common indication [156]. Antireflux surgery does not lead to significant regression of Barrett esophagus or reduce the risk of esophageal adenocarcinoma [101].

Patients with GERD symptoms who are considered for NFS are recommended to undergo diagnostic confirmation beforehand. pH monitoring rules out functional heartburn, while HRM and barium swallow rule out other possible diagnoses [206].

In GERD with PPI nonresponse, NFS remains the most-studied treatment with the largest data on outcomes after 10 years. NFS can provide symptomatic and physiologic relief of acid reflux, including in patients with NERD and those without symptom/reflux event correlations [156,212].

Unfortunately, efficacy wanes with time. Ten years after NFS, nearly 35% of patients experience recurrent heartburn and 30% experience regurgitation. Resumption of PPI use increases from 8.8% at 1 year to 18.2% at 10 years, and 9.6% of patients require surgical re-intervention within 10 years [213,214,215]. One study concluded as many as 50% patients who underwent NFS resumed PPI use 10 to 15 years post-surgery [216].

Only a minority of patients with GERD are offered a surgical option, mainly due to concerns over potential side effects, variable success rates, and the extreme alteration of gastric anatomy with NFS [210]. The potentially significant side-effect profile of NFS can negatively impact patient quality of life, and this has contributed to the declining popularity of this procedure, with fewer than 20,000 patients undergoing NFS annually. Clinicians may be wary of fundoplication due to significant side effects of dysphagia, gas-bloat syndrome, and inability to vomit [217,218]. In typical patients with GERD and good symptom control using PPIs, some experts have concluded there appears to be no net benefit over PPI therapy to warrant the use of NFS [219,220,221].

MAGNETIC SPHINCTER AUGMENTATION

Magnetic sphincter augmentation (MSA), transoral incisionless fundoplication (TIF), and radiofrequency energy delivery (RFED) are emerging as alternatives to NFS. As with NFS, patient selection remains crucial.

MSA was designed to obviate many of issues experienced with NFS. The LINX Reflux Management System is a flexible, expandable MSA device laparoscopically placed around the external gastroesophageal junction. The device augments LES function to prevent reflux into the esophagus, while allowing normal LES opening during swallowing, belching, and vomiting often prevented with fundoplication [222]. The LINX is FDA-approved for patients diagnosed with GERD, defined by abnormal pH testing, who continue having chronic GERD symptoms despite maximum PPI therapy [223].

The body of published evidence demonstrates that MSA is an effective alternative to NFS [156]. Compared with NFS, five-year MSA outcomes showed comparable esophageal acid exposure, heartburn, regurgitation, PPI use, quality-of-life scores, and dysphagia, and lower rates of bloating and inability to belch or vomit [156,219]. MSA has the other advantages of being a less extensive surgical procedure, requiring minimally invasive removal, and less inter-surgeon variability with a standardized device. MSA is not indicated for patients with severe erosive disease, motility disorders, or large hiatal hernia (>3 cm) [156]. Negative predictors of excellent/good outcome with MSA include BMI >35, structurally defective LES, and elevated LES residual pressure [224].

TRANSORAL INCISIONLESS FUNDOPLICATION

TIF and the Medigus endoscopic stapling procedure avoid the risks of laparoscopic fundoplication by creating endoscopic fundoplications to correct anatomical defects of the LES. EsophyX, the only FDA-approved TIF, uses a 270-degree anterior wrap fundoplication. These procedures are limited to patients with normal anatomy, because hiatal hernia repair cannot be performed [54,156,219].

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

Based on existing evidence, the Society of American Gastrointestinal and Endoscopic Surgeons recommends transoral incisionless fundoplication (TIF) can be performed with an acceptable safety risk in appropriately selected patients with GERD.

https://www.sages.org/publications/guidelines/endoluminal-treatments-for-gastroesophageal-reflux-disease-gerd

Last Accessed: September 7, 2018

Strength of Recommendation: Strong

In PPI-responsive patients, TIF shows good long-term results up to six years, with lasting symptom relief, decreased reflux on pH-impedance monitoring, and reduced esophageal acid exposure. PPI use is slightly higher in TIF than with NFS or MSA, and symptom remission is lower than with NFS [54]. The longest follow-up in PPI nonresponsive patients is 22 months [156,219].

RADIOFREQUENCY ENERGY DELIVERY

RFED to the LES via the Stretta system was introduced in 2000 as a minimally invasive endoscopic treatment for PPI-nonresponsive GERD [219]. Stretta delivers radiofrequency energy to a broad region of the LES, on the premise that postprocedure ablation scarring and fibrosis will increase LES tone. A systematic review evaluating the efficacy of Stretta in GERD found no difference between Stretta, sham treatment, or PPIs in time spent at pH <4, LES pressure, PPI cessation, or health-related quality of life [225]. Use of RFED has limited evidence support; MSA and TIF are better minimally invasive alternatives [156].

BARIATRIC SURGERY IN PATIENTS WITH GERD AND OBESITY

As discussed, obesity plays a major role in the development of GERD, and treating obesity is an important step in the treatment of GERD. While many studies show comparable outcomes with NFS across weight groups, other surgical options are recommended for obese patients with GERD [15,48]. For patients with moderate obesity (BMI 35–40), LNF shows good symptom control and moderate weight loss. For patients with BMI >40, bariatric surgery with gastric bypass is preferred [54,226].

Roux en-Y gastric bypass (RYGB) remains the favored bariatric approach due to its benefit in GERD and long-term weight loss. Performed laparoscopically, RYGB involves creation of a small gastric pouch connected directly to the small intestine to bypass a major portion of the mid/distal stomach and duodenum [48]. A comparative study found laparoscopic RYGB as safe as fundoplication for morbidly obese patients. In-hospital complications were significantly lower in the bypass group, while the mean length of hospitalization, mortality, and treatment costs were comparable [227].

Bariatric surgery options are broadening for obese patients with GERD, including laparoscopic adjustable gastric banding (LAGB) and laparoscopic sleeve gastrectomy. However, there are growing concerns about side effects induced by these techniques. LAGB is associated with high rates of reoperation or conversion to more definitive bariatric surgery, band erosion, and motor dysfunction of the esophagus, stomach, and small bowel in obese patients with GERD, and is not recommended [16,54]. Sleeve gastrectomy is considered an effective weight-loss surgery but is consistently associated with new-onset reflux in non-GERD populations and worsening GERD symptoms when reflux is already present, and is not recommended in patients with GERD and obesity as a first-line option [15,54].

13. CONSIDERATIONS FOR NON-ENGLISH-PROFICIENT PATIENTS

As a result of the evolving demographics in the United States, interaction with patients for whom English is not a native language is inevitable. It is each practitioner's responsibility to ensure that information and instructions are explained in such a way that allows for patient understanding. In this multicultural landscape, interpreters are a valuable resource to help bridge the communication and cultural gap between clients/patients and practitioners. Interpreters are more than passive agents who translate and transmit information back and forth from party to party. When they are enlisted and treated as part of the interdisciplinary clinical team, they serve as cultural brokers, who ultimately enhance the clinical encounter. In any case in which information regarding diagnostic procedures, treatment options, and medication/treatment measures is being provided, the use of an interpreter should be considered.

14. CONCLUSION

GERD is a far more complex clinical entity than is often appreciated, with impaired lower esophageal structure and function, not gastric acid over-secretion, the core pathology. Advances in characterizing GERD also show a diverse underlying pathology of symptom presentations and point to the need for a more tailored approach to diagnosis. PPI acid-suppressant medication is the backbone of GERD management, and an empiric PPI trial is a reasonable starting point for most patients. Patients who remain symptomatic require a diagnostic workup to identify the underlying cause of symptom persistence for effective therapeutic targeting. The importance of patient adherence with PPI therapy cannot be overstated. A range of medications and antireflux procedures are available for PPI-refractory patients.

Works Cited

1. Bashashati M, Hejazi RA, Andrews CN, Storr MA. Gastroesophageal reflux symptoms not responding to proton pump inhibitor: GERD, NERD, NARD, esophageal hypersensitivity or dyspepsia? Can J Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2014;28(6):335-341.

2. Moayyedi PM, Lacy BE, Andrews CN, et al. ACG and CAG clinical guideline: management of dyspepsia. Am J Gastroenterol. 2017;112(7):988-1013.

3. Grossi L, Ciccaglione AF, Marzio L. Esophagitis and its causes: who is "guilty" when acid is found "not guilty"? World J Gastroenterol. 2017;23(17):3011-3016.

4. Antunes C, Curtis SA. Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease. Treasure Island, FL: StatPearls Publishing; 2017.

5. Drossman DA. Functional gastrointestinal disorders: history, pathophysiology, clinical features and Rome IV. Gastroenterology. 2016;150:1262-1279.

6. Aziz Q, Fass R, Gyawali P, Miwa H, Pandolfino JE, Zerbib F. Esophageal disorders. Gastroenterology. 2016;150(6):1368-1379.

7. Hunt R, Armstrong D, Katelaris P, et al. World Gastroenterology Organisation Global Guidelines: GERD global perspective on gastroesophageal reflux disease. J Clin Gastroenterol. 2017;51(6):467-478.

8. Zentilin P, Marabotto E, Pellegatta G, et al. Complexity and diversity of GERD phenotypes. Minerva Gastroenterol Dietol. 2017;63(3):198-204.

9. Cleveland Clinic. GERD or Acid Reflux or Heartburn Overview. Available at http://my.clevelandclinic.org/health/articles/gastroesophogeal-reflux-disease-gerd-dd-overview. Last accessed May 17, 2018.

10. Schmulson MJ, Drossman DA. What is new in Rome IV. J Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2017;23(2):151-163.

11. El-Serag HB, Sweet S, Winchester CC, Dent J. Update on the epidemiology of gastro-oesophageal reflux disease: a systematic review. Gut. 2014;63(6):871-880.

12. Hershcovici T, Fass R. Nonerosive reflux disease (NERD): an update. J Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2010;16(1):8-21.

13. Jung HK, Halder S, McNally M, et al. Overlap of gastro-oesophageal reflux disease and irritable bowel syndrome: prevalence and risk factors in the general population. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2007; 26(3):453-461.

14. Vakil N, Stelwagon M, Shea EP, Miller S. Symptom burden and consulting behavior in patients with overlapping functional disorders in the US population. United European Gastroenterol J. 2015;4(3):413-422.

15. Katz PO, Gerson LB, Vela MF. Guidelines for the diagnosis and management of gastroesophageal reflux disease. Am J Gastroenterol. 2013;108(3):308-328.

16. Dickman R, Maradey-Romero C, Gingold-Belfer R, Fass R. Unmet needs in the treatment of gastroesophageal reflux disease.J Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2015;21(3):309-319.

17. Jaspersen D, Kulig M, Labenz J, et al. Prevalence of extra-oesophageal manifestations in gastro-oesophageal reflux disease: an analysis based on the ProGERD Study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2003;17(12):1515-1520.

18. Lee JS. The role of gastroesophageal reflux and microaspiration in idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis. Clin Pulm Med. 2014;21(2):81-85.

19. Qadeer MA, Phillips CO, Lopez AR, et al. Proton pump inhibitor therapy for suspected GERD-related chronic laryngitis: a meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. Am J Gastroenterol. 2006;101(11):2646-2654.

20. Vaezi MF, Richter JE, Stasney CR, et al. Treatment of chronic posterior laryngitis with esomeprazole. Laryngoscope. 2006;116(2):254-260.

21. Havas T, Huang S, Levy M. Posterior pharyngolaryngitis: double-blind randomized placebo-controlled trial of proton pump inhibitor therapy. Aust J Otolaryngol. 1999;3:243-246.

22. Wong WM, Fass R. Extraesophageal and atypical manifestations of GERD. J Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2004;19(suppl 3):S33-S43.

23. Eslick GD, Jones MP, Talley NJ. Non-cardiac chest pain: prevalence, risk factors, impact and consulting—a population-based study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2003;17(9):1115-1124.

24. Sontag SJ. The spectrum of pulmonary symptoms due to gastroesophageal reflux. Thorac Surg Clin. 2005;15(3):353-368.

25. Kiljander TO, Salomaa ER, Hietanen EK, Terho EO. Gastroesophageal reflux in asthmatics: a double-blind, placebo-controlled crossover study with omeprazole. Chest. 1999;116(5):1257-1264.

26. Chipps BE, Haselkorn T, Paknis B, et al. More than a decade follow-up in patients with severe or difficult-to-treat asthma. The Epidemiology and Natural History of Asthma: Outcomes and Treatment Regimens (TENOR) II. J Allergy Clin Immunol. 2017;6749(17)31270-1278.

27. Jaspersen D, Nocon M, Labenz J, et al. Clinical course of laryngo-respiratory symptoms in gastro-oesophageal reflux disease during routine care: a 5-year follow-up. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2009;29(11):1172-1178.

28. Locke GR 3rd, Talley NJ, Fett SL, Zinsmeister AR, Melton LJ 3rd. Prevalence and clinical spectrum of gastroesophageal reflux: a population-based study in Olmsted County, Minnesota. Gastroenterology. 1997;112(5):1448-1456.

29. Fass R, Dickman R. Non-cardiac chest pain: an update. Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2006;18(6):408-417.

30. Lundell LR, Dent J, Bennett JR, et al. Endoscopic assessment of oesophagitis: clinical and functional correlates and further validation of the Los Angeles classification. Gut. 1999;45(2):172-180.

31. de Bortoli N, Martinucci I, Savarino E, et al. Proton pump inhibitor responders who are not confirmed as GERD patients with impedance and pH monitoring: who are they? Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2014;26(1):28-35.

32. Martinez SD, Malagon IB, Garewal HS, Cui H, Fass R. Non-erosive reflux disease (NERD): acid reflux and symptom patterns. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2003;17(4):537-545.

33. Kushnir VM, Sayuk GS, Gyawali CP. The effect of antisecretory therapy and study duration on ambulatory esophageal pH monitoring. Dig Dis Sci. 2011;56(5):1412-1419.

34. Drossman DA, Li Z, Andruzzi E, et al. U.S. householder survey of functional gastrointestinal disorders: prevalence, sociodemography, and health impact. Dig Dis Sci. 1993;38(9):1569-1580.

35. Kwan AC, Bao T, Chakkaphak S, et al. Validation of Rome II criteria for functional gastrointestinal disorders by factor analysis of symptoms in Asian patient sample. J Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2003;18(7):796-802.

36. Lin M, Gerson LB, Lascar R, Davila M, Triadafilopoulos G. Features of gastroesophageal reflux disease in women. Am J Gastroenterol. 2004;99(8):1442-1447.

37. Vega KJ, Langford-Legg T, Palacio C, Watts J, Jamal MM. Females without reflux symptoms or gastroesophageal reflux disease have less distal esophageal acid exposure than males without reflux symptoms or gastroesophageal reflux disease. Dis Esophagus. 2013;26(3):246-249.

38. Kim YS, Kim N, Kim GH. Sex and gender differences in gastroesophageal reflux disease. J Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2016;22(4):575-588.

39. El-Serag H, Becher A, Jones R. Systematic review: persistent reflux symptoms on proton pump inhibitor therapy in primary care and community studies. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2010;32(6):720-737.

40. Lundell L, Hatlebakk J, Galmiche JP, et al. Long-term effect on symptoms and quality of life of maintenance therapy with esomeprazole 20 mg daily: a post hoc analysis of the LOTUS trial. Curr Med Res Opin. 2015;31(1):65-73.

41. Shaker R, Castell DO, Schoenfeld PS, Spechler SJ. Nighttime heartburn is an under-appreciated clinical problem that impacts sleep and daytime function: the results of a Gallup survey conducted on behalf of the American Gastroenterological Association. Am J Gastroenterol. 2003;98(7):1487-1493.

42. Modlin IM, Moss SF. Symptom evaluation in gastroesophageal reflux disease. J Clin Gastroenterol. 2008;42(5):558-563.

43. Pearl J, Pauli E, Dunkin B, Stefanidis D, Society of American Gastrointestinal and Endoscopic Surgeons. Clinical Spotlight Review: Endoluminal Treatments for Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD). Available at https://www.sages.org/publications/guidelines/endoluminal-treatments-for-gastroesophageal-reflux-disease-gerd. Last accessed September 7, 2018.

44. Ajumobi AB, Vuong R, Ahaneku H. Analysis of nonformulary use of PPIs and excess drug cost in a Veterans Affairs population.J Manag Care Pharm. 2012;18(1):63-67.

45. Khieu M, Bhimji SS. Barrett Esophagus. Treasure Island, FL: StatPearls Publishing; 2017.

46. Zeid Y, Confer J. Standards of care for GERD. US Pharmacist. 2016;41(12):24-29.

47. Orlando RC, Paterson WG, Harnett KM, et al. Esophageal disease: updated information on inflammation. Ann N Y Acad Sci. 2011;1232:369-375.

48. Subramanian CR, Triadafilopoulos G. Refractory gastroesophageal reflux disease. Gastroenterology Report. 2015;3(1):41-53.

49. de Bortoli N, Penagini R, Savarino E, Marchi S. Eosinophilic esophagitis: update in diagnosis and management. Position paper by the Italian Society of Gastroenterology and Gastrointestinal Endoscopy (SIGE). Dig Liver Dis. 2017;49:254-260.

50. Moawad FJ, Molina-Infante J, Lucendo AJ, Cantrell SE, Tmanova L, Douglas KM. Endoscopic dilation Is highly effective and safe in children and adults with eosinophilic oesophagitis. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2017;46(2):96-105.

51. Schoepfer AM, Safroneeva E, Bussmann C, et al. Delay in diagnosis of eosinophilic esophagitis increases risk for stricture formation in a time-dependent manner. Gastroenterology. 2013;145(6):1230-1236.

52. Bennett C, Vakil N, Bergman J, et al. Consensus statements for management of Barrett's dysplasia and early-stage esophageal adenocarcinoma, based on a Delphi process. Gastroenterology. 2012;143(2):336-346.

53. Patti MG. Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease. Available at https://emedicine.medscape.com/article/176595-overview. Last accessed September 7, 2018.

54. Khan A, Kim A, Sanossian C, Francois F. Impact of obesity treatment on gastroesophageal reflux disease. World J Gastroenterol. 2016;22(4):1627-1638.

55. Triadafilopoulos G, Clarke JO, Hawn M. Precision GERD management for the 21st century. Dis Esophagus. 2017;30(9):1-6.

56. Patrick L. Gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD): a review of conventional and alternative treatments. Altern Med Rev. 2011;16(2):116-133.

57. Bozimowski G. A review of nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs. AANA J. 2015;83(6):425-433.

58. Scarpignato C, Gatta L, Zullo A, et al. Effective and safe proton pump inhibitor therapy in acid-related diseases: a position paper addressing benefits and potential harms of acid suppression. BMC Medicine. 2016;14(1):179.

59. Anglin R, Yuan Y, Moayyedi P, Tse F, Armstron D, Leontiadis GI. Risk of upper gastrointestinal bleeding with selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors with or without concurrent nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory use: a systematic review and meta-analysis.Am J Gastroenterol. 2014;109(6):811-819.

60. Jiang HY, Chen HZ, Hu XJ, et al. Use of selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors and risk of upper gastrointestinal bleeding: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2015;13(1):42-50.

61. Laporte S, Chapelle C, Caillet P, et al. Bleeding risk under selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) antidepressants: a meta-analysis of observational studies. Pharmacol Res. 2017;118:19-32.

62. Oka Y, Okamoto K, Kawashita N, Shirakuni Y, Takagi T. Meta-analysis of the risk of upper gastrointestinal hemorrhage with combination therapy of selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors and non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs. Biol Pharm Bull. 2014;37(6):947-953.

63. Freedberg DE, Kim LS, Yang YX. The risks and benefits of long-term use of proton pump inhibitors: expert review and best practice advice from the American Gastroenterological Association. Gastroenterology. 2017;152(4):706-715.

64. Washio E, Esaki M, Maehata Y, et al. Proton pump inhibitors increase incidence of nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drug-induced small bowel injury: a randomized placebo-controlled trial. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2016;14(6):809-815.

65. Scarpignato C, Lanas A, Blandizzi C, et al. Safe prescribing of non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs in patients with osteoarthritis: an expert consensus addressing benefits as well as gastrointestinal and cardiovascular risks. BMC Med. 2015;13:55.

66. Marlicz W, Loniewski I, Grimes DS, Quigley EM. Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, proton pump inhibitors, and gastrointestinal injury: contrasting interactions in the stomach and small intestine. Mayo Clin Proc. 2014;89(12):1699-1709.

67. Jaspersen D. Drug-induced oesophageal disorders: pathogenesis, incidence, prevention and management. Drug Saf. 2000;22(3):237-249.

68. Pimentel M, Rossi F, Chow EJ, et al. Increased prevalence of irritable bowel syndrome in patients with gastroesophageal reflux.J Clin Gastroenterol. 2002;34(3):221-224.

69. Punjabi P, Hira A, Prasad S, Wang X, Chokhavatia S. Review of gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) in the diabetic patient.J Diabetes. 2015;7(5):599-609.

70. Ford AC, Forman D, Bailey AG, Axon AT, Moayyedi P. The natural history of gastro-oesophageal reflux symptoms in the community and its effects on survival: a longitudinal 10-year follow-up study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2013;37(3):323-331.

71. Ronkainen J, Talley NJ, Storskrubb T, et al. Erosive esophagitis is a risk factor for Barrett's esophagus: a community-based endoscopic follow-up study. Am J Gastroenterol. 2011;106(11):1946-1952.

72. Bredenoord AJ, Weusten BLAM, Sifrim D, Timmer R, Smout AJ. Aerophagia, gastric, and supragastric belching: a study using intraluminal electrical impedance monitoring. Gut. 2004;53(11):1561-1565.

73. Vaezi MF, Pandolfino JE, Vela MF, Shaheen NJ. White paper AGA: optimal strategies to define and diagnose gastroesophageal reflux disease. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2017;15(8):1162-1172.

74. Dacha S, Razvi M, Massaad J, Cai Q, Wehbi M. Hypergastrinemia. Gastroenterol Rep. 2015;3(3):201-208.

75. Schubert ML. Physiologic, pathophysiologic, and pharmacologic regulation of gastric acid secretion. Curr Opin Gastroenterol. 2017;33(6):430-438.

76. Minalyan A, Gabrielyan L, Scott D, Jacobs J, Pisegna JR. The gastric and intestinal microbiome: role of proton pump inhibitors. Curr Gastroenterol Rep. 2017;19(8):42.

77. Roman S, Holloway R, Keller J, et al. Validation of criteria for the definition of transient lower esophageal sphincter relaxations using high-resolution manometry. Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2017;29(2).

78. Cleveland Clinic. Peptic Ulcer Disease. Available at https://my.clevelandclinic.org/health/diseases/10350-peptic-ulder-disease. Last accessed September 7, 2018.

79. Chang P, Friedenberg F. Obesity and GERD. Gastroenterol Clin North Am. 2014;43(1):161-173.

80. Kahrilas PJ, McColl K, Fox M, et al. The acid pocket: a target for treatment in reflux disease? Am J Gastroenterol. 2013;108(7):1058-1064.

81. Souza RF. From reflux esophagitis to esophageal adenocarcinoma. Dig Dis. 2016;34(5):483-490.

82. McQuaid KR, Laine L, Fennerty MB, Souza R, Spechler SJ. Systematic review: the role of bile acids in the pathogenesis of gastro-oesophageal reflux disease and related neoplasia. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2011;34(2):146-165.

83. Tebala GD. Gastroesophageal reflux disease: are we acting in the best interest of our patients? Eur Rev Med Pharmacol Sci. 2016;20(21):4553-4556.

84. Bredenoord AJ, Weusten BL, Curvers WL, Timmer R, Smout AJ. Determinants of perception of heartburn and regurgitation. Gut. 2006;55(3):313-318.

85. Zagari RM, Fuccio L, Wallander MA, et al. Gastro-oesophageal reflux symptoms, oesophagitis and Barrett's oesophagus in the general population: the Loiano-Monghidoro study. Gut. 2008;57(10):1354-1359.

86. Dunbar KB, Agoston AT, Odze RD, et al. Association of acute gastroesophageal reflux disease with esophageal histologic changes. JAMA. 2016;315(19):2104-2112.

87. Kim JJ, Kim N, Choi YJ, Kim JS, Jung HC. Increased TRPV1 and PAR2 mRNA expression levels are associated only with the esophageal reflux symptoms, but not with the extraesophageal reflux symptoms. Medicine (Baltimore). 2016;95(32):e4387.

88. Holzer P. Acid sensing by visceral afferent neurones. Acta Physiologica (Oxf). 2011;201(1):63-75.

89. Ma J, Altomare A, Guarino M, et al. HCl-induced and ATP-dependent upregulation of TRPV1 receptor expression and cytokine production by human esophageal epithelial cells. Am J Physiol Gastrointest Liver Physiol. 2012;303(5):G635-G645.

90. Choi YJ, Kim N, Kim JJ, Lee DH, Park JH, Jung HC. Upregulation of vanilloid receptor-1 in functional dyspepsia with or without Helicobacter pylori infection. Medicine (Baltimore). 2016;95(19):e3410.

91. Isomoto H, Saenko VA, Kanazawa Y, et al. Enhanced expression of interleukin-8 and activation of nuclear factor kappa-b in endoscopy-negative gastroesophageal reflux disease. Am J Gastroenterol. 2004;99(4):589-597.

92. Isomoto H, Wang A, Mizuta Y, et al. Elevated levels of chemokines in esophageal mucosa of patients with reflux esophagitis.Am J Gastroenterol. 2003;98(3):551-556.

93. Isomoto H, Wang A, Nishi Y, et al. Interleukin 8 and 1beta and RANTES levels in esophageal mucosa predict recurrence of endoscopy-negative gastroesophageal reflux disease. Hepatogastroenterology. 2008;55(82-83):482-485.

94. Lee SP, Sung IK, Kim JH, Lee SY, Park HS, Shim CS. The effect of emotional stress and depression on the prevalence of digestive diseases. J Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2015;21(2):273-282.

95. Fass R, Naliboff BD, Fass SS, et al. The effect of auditory stress on perception of intraesophageal acid in patients with gastroesophageal reflux disease. Gastroenterology. 2008;134(3):696-705.

96. Dean BB, Aguilar D, Johnson LF, et al. Night-time and daytime atypical manifestations of gastro-oesophageal reflux disease: frequency, severity and impact on health-related quality of life. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2008;27(4):327-337.

97. Dubois RW, Aguilar D, Fass R, et al. Consequences of frequent nocturnal gastro-oesophageal reflux disease among employed adults: symptom severity, quality of life and work productivity. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2007;25(4):487-500.

98. Rao SS, Gregersen H, Hayek B, Summers RW, Christensen J. Unexplained chest pain: the hypersensitive, hyperreactive, and poorly compliant esophagus. Ann Intern Med. 1996;124(11):950-958.

99. Yoshida N, Kuroda M, Suzuki T, et al. Role of nociceptors/neuropeptides in the pathogenesis of visceral hypersensitivity of nonerosive reflux disease. Dig Dis Sci. 2013;58(8):2237-2243.

100. Santos J, Yang PC, Soderholm JD, Benjamin M, Perdue M. Role of mast cells in chronic stress induced colonic epithelial barrier dysfunction in the rat. Gut. 2001;48(5):630-636.

101. Keung C, Hebbard G. The management of gastro-oesophageal reflux disease. Aust Prescr. 2016;39(1):6-10.

102. Kahrilas PJ, Shaheen NJ, Vaezi MF. American Gastroenterological Association Institute technical review on the management of gastroesophageal reflux disease. Gastroenterology. 2008;135(4):1392-1413.

103. Shaheen NJ, Weinber DS, Denberg TD, et al. Upper endoscopy for gastroesophageal reflux disease: best practice advice from the clinical guidelines committee of the American College of Physicians. Ann Int Med. 2012;157(11):808-816.

104. Muthusamy VR, Lightdale JR, Acosta RD, et al.; ASGE Standards of Practice Committee. The role of endoscopy in the management of GERD. Gastrointest Endosc. 2015;81(6):1305-1310.

105. DeVault KR, Castell DO. Updated guidelines for the diagnosis and treatment of gastroesophageal reflux disease. Am J Gastroenterol. 1999;94(6):1434-1442.

106. Boeckxstaens G, El-Serag HB, Smout AJPM, Kahrilas PJ. Symptomatic reflux disease: the present, the past and the future. Gut. 2014;63(7):1185-1193.

107. Riehl ME, Kinsinger S, Kahrilas PJ, Pandolfino JE, Keefer L. Role of a health psychologist in the management of functional esophageal complaints. Dis Esophagus. 2015;28(5):428-436.

108. Farrell B, Pottie K, Thompson W, et al. Deprescribing proton pump inhibitors. Can Fam Physician. 2017;63(5):354-364.

109. Pandolfino JE, Shi G, Trueworthy B, Kahrilas PJ. Esophagogastric junction opening during relaxation distinguishes non-hernia reflux patients, hernia patients, and normal subjects. Gastroenterology. 2005;125(4):1018-1024.

110. Hussain ZH, Henderson EE, Maradey-Romerao C, George N, Fass R, Lacy BE. The proton pump inhibitor non-responder: a clinical conundrum. Clin Transl Gastroenterol. 2015;6:e106.

111. American Society for Gastrointestinal Endoscopy. The role of endoscopy in the management of GERD. Gastrointest Endosc. 2015;81(6):1305-1310.

112. National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases. Acid Reflux (GER & GERD) in Adults. Available at https://www.niddk.nih.gov/health-information/digestive-diseases/acid-reflux-ger-gerd-adults/all-content. Last accessed September 7, 2018.

113. Capovilla G, Salvador R, Spadotto L, et al. Long-term wireless pH monitoring of the distal esophagus: prolonging the test beyond 48 hours is unnecessary and may be misleading. Dis Esophagus. 2017;30(10):1-8.

114. Martinucci I, de Bortoli N, Giacchino M, et al. Esophageal motility abnormalities in gastroesophageal reflux disease. World J Gastrointest Pharmacol Ther. 2014;5(2):86-96.

115. Izawa S, Funaki Y, Iida A, et al. The role of gastroesophageal reflux in relation to symptom onset in patients with proton pump inhibitor-refractory nonerosive reflux disease accompanied by an underlying esophageal motor disorder. Digestion. 2014;89(1):61-67.

116. Dickman R, Boaz M, Aizic S, Beniashvili Z, Fass R, Niv Y. Comparison of clinical characteristics of patients with gastroesophageal reflux disease who failed proton pump inhibitor therapy versus those who fully responded. J Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2011;17(4):387-389.

117. Spiegel BM, Hays RD, Bolus R, et al. Development of the NIH Patient-Reported Outcomes Measurement Information System (PROMIS) gastrointestinal symptom scales. Am J Gastroenterol. 2014;109(11):1804-1814.

118. Kahrilas PJ, Howden CW, Hughes N. Response of regurgitation to proton pump inhibitor therapy in clinical trials of gastro-esophageal reflux disease. Am J Gastroenterol. 2011;106(8):1419-1425.

119. Fass R, Sifrim D. Management of heartburn not responding to proton pump inhibitors. Gut. 2009;58(2):295-309.

120. Bredenoord AJ. Management of belching, hiccups, and aerophagia. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2013;11(1):6-12.

121. Hemmink GJ, Ten Cate L, Bredenoord AJ, Timmer R, Weusten BL, Smout AJ. Speech therapy in patients with excessive supragastric belching: a pilot study. Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2010;22(1):24-28.

122. Patel A, Sayuk GS, Gyawali CP. Parameters on esophageal pH-impedance monitoring that predict outcomes of patients with gastroesophageal reflux disease. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2015;13(5):884-891.

123. Galmiche JP, Clouse RE, Balint A, et al. Functional esophageal disorders. Gastroenterology. 2006;130(5):1459-1465.

124. Dellon ES, Gonsalves N, Hirano I, et al. ACG clinical guideline: evidenced based approach to the diagnosis and management of esophageal eosinophilia and eosinophilic esophagitis (EoE). Am J Gastroenterol. 2013;108(5):679-692.

125. Pandolfino JE, Vela MF. Esophageal-reflux monitoring. Gastrointest Endosc. 2009;69(4):917-930.

126. Fox M, Sweis R. Future directions in esophageal motility and function: new technology and methodology. Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2012;24(Suppl 1):48-56.

127. van Westen D, Ekberg O. Solid bolus swallowing in the radiologic evaluation of dysphagia. Acta Radiol. 1993;34(4):372-375.

128. Shaker A, Stoikes N, Drapekin J, Kushnir V, Brunt LM, Gyawali CP. Multiple rapid swallow responses during esophageal high-resolution manometry reflect esophageal body peristaltic reserve. Am J Gastroenterol. 2013;108(11):1706-1712.

129. Molina-Infante J, Gonzalez-Cordero PL, Lucendo AJ. Proton pump inhibitor-responsive esophageal eosinophilia: still a valid diagnosis? Curr Opin Gastroenterol. 2017;33(4):285-292.

130. Roman S, Zerbib F, Belhocine K, des Varannes SB, Mion F. High-resolution manometry to detect transient lower oesophageal sphincter relaxations: diagnostic accuracy compared with perfused-sleeve manometry, and the definition of new detection criteria. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2011;34(3):384-393.

131. Lucendo AJ, Molina-Infante J, Arias A, et al. Guidelines on eosinophilic esophagitis: evidence-based statements and recommendations for diagnosis and management in children and adults. United European Gastroenterol J. 2017;5(3):335-358.

132. Shaheen NJ, Falk GW, Iyer PG, Gerson LB. ACG Clinical Guideline: diagnosis and management of Barrett's esophagus. Am J Gastroenterol. 2016;111(1):30-50.

133. Lowes H, Somarathna T, Shepherd NA. Definition, derivation, and diagnosis of Barrett's esophagus: pathological perspectives.Adv Exp Med Biol. 2016;908:111-136.

134. Iwakiri K. Kinoshita Y, Habu Y, et al. Evidence-based clinical practice guidelines for gastroesophageal reflux disease, 2015.J Gastroenterol. 2016;51(8):751-767.

135. Stanghellini V, Chan FKL, Hasler WL, et al. Gastroduodenal disorders. Gastroenterology. 2016;150(6):1380-1392.

136. Vakil N, Halling K, Ohlsson L, Wernersson B. Symptom overlap between post-prandial distress and epigastric pain syndromes of the Rome III dyspepsia classification. Am J Gastroenterol. 2013;108(5):767-774.

137. Park HJ, Park S-H, Shim K-N, et al. The prevalence and clinical features of non-responsive gastroesophageal reflux disease to practical proton pump inhibitor dose in Korea: a multicenter study. Korean J Gastroenterol. 2016;68(1):16-22.

138. Rosmolen WD, Nieuwkerk PT, Pouw RE, van Berge Henegouwen MI, Bergman JJ, Sparnagers MA. Quality of life and fear of cancer recurrence after endoscopic treatment for early Barrett's neoplasia: a prospective study. Dis Esophagus. 2017;30(3):1-9.

139. Sethi S, Richter JE. Diet and gastroesophageal reflux disease: role in pathogenesis and management. Curr Opin Gastroenterol. 2017;33(2):107-111.

140. Ness-Jensen E, Hveem K, El-Serag P, et al. Lifestyle intervention in gastroesophageal reflux disease. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2016;14(2):175-182.

141. Garvey WT, Mechanick JI, Brett EM, et al. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists and American College of Endocrinology comprehensive clinical practice guidelines for medical care of patients with obesity. Endocr Pract. 2016;22(7):842-844.

142. Ness-Jensen E, Lindam A, Lagergren J, Hveem K. Tobacco smoking cessation and improved gastroesophageal reflux: a prospective population-based cohort study. The HUNT study. Am J Gastroenterol. 2014;109(2):171-177.

143. El-Serag HB, Satia JA, Rabeneck L. Dietary intake and the risk of gastro-oesophageal reflux disease: a cross sectional study in volunteers. Gut. 2005;54(1):11-17.

144. Eherer A. Management of gastroesophageal reflux disease: lifestyle modification and alternative approaches. Dig Dis. 2014;32(1-2):149-151.

145. Kubo A, Block G, Quesenberry CP Jr, Buffler P, Corley DA. Dietary guideline adherence for gastroesophageal reflux disease.BMC Gastroenterol. 2014;14:144.

146. Kang JH, Kang JY. Lifestyle measures in the management of gastro-oesophageal reflux disease: clinical and pathophysiological considerations. Ther Adv Chronic Dis. 2015;6(2):51-64.

147. Mardhiyah R, Makmun D, Syam AF, Setiati S. The effects of Ramadhan fasting on clinical symptoms in patients with gastroesophageal reflux disease. Acta Med Indones. 2016;48(3):169-174.

148. Fox RK, Muniraj T. Pharmacologic therapies in gastrointestinal diseases. Med Clin N Am. 2016;100(4):827-850.

149. Hillman L, Yadlapati R, Thuluvath AJ, Berendsen MA, Pandolfino JE. A review of medical therapy for proton pump inhibitor nonresponsive gastroesophageal reflux disease. Dis Esophagus. 2017;30(9):1-15.

150. Yadlapati R, Kahrilas PJ. When is proton pump inhibitor use appropriate? BMC Med. 2017;15:36.

151. Vaezi MF, Yang Y-X, Howden CW. Complications of proton pump inhibitor therapy. Gastroenterology. 2017;153(1):35-48.

152. National Institutes of Health. LiverTox Database: Proton Pump Inhibitors. Available at https://livertox.nlm.nih.gov//ProtonPumpInhibitors.htm. Last accessed September 7, 2018.

153. Savarino V, Pace F, Scarpignato C, Esoxx Study Group. Randomised clinical trial: mucosal protection combined with acid suppression in the treatment of non-erosive reflux disease-efficacy of Esoxx, a hyaluronic acid-chondroitin sulphate based bioadhesive formulation. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2017;45(5):631-642.

154. Gyawali CP, Fass R. Management of gastroesophageal reflux disease. Gastroenterology. 2018;154(2):302-318.

155. Sifrim D, Zerbib F. Diagnosis and management of patients with reflux symptoms refractory to proton pump inhibitors. Gut. 2012;61(9):1340-1354.

156. Hillman L, Yadlapati R, Whitsett M, Thuluvath AJ, Berendsen MA, Pandolfino JE. Review of antireflux procedures for proton pump inhibitor nonresponsive gastroesophageal reflux disease. Dis Esophagus. 2017;30(9):1-14.

157. Zhang C, Kwong JSW, Yuan R-X, et al. Effectiveness and tolerability of different recommended doses of PPIs and H2RAs in GERD: network meta-analysis and GRADE system. Sci Rep. 2017;7:41021.

158. Labenz J, Armstrong D, Leodolter A, Baldycheva I. Management of reflux esophagitis: does the choice of proton pump inhibitor matter? Int J Clin Pract. 2015;69(7):796-801.

159. Sigterman KE, van Pinxteren B, Bonis PA, Lau J, Numans ME. Short-term treatment with proton pump inhibitors, H2-receptor antagonists and prokinetics for gastro-oesophageal reflux disease-like symptoms and endoscopy negative reflux disease. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2013;5:CD002095.

160. Weijenborg PW, Cremonini F, Smout AJ, Bredenoord AJ. PPI therapy is equally effective in well-defined non-erosive reflux disease and in reflux esophagitis: a meta-analysis. Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2012;24(8):747-757.

161. Kirchheiner J, Glatt S, Fuhr U, et al. Relative potency of proton-pump inhibitors: comparison of effects on intragastric pH. Eur J Clin Pharmacol. 2009;65(1):19-31.

162. Gerson LB, Kahrilas PJ, Fass R. Insights into gastroesophageal reflux disease-associated dyspeptic symptoms. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2011;9(10):824-833.

163. McCallum RW, Zarling EJ, Goetsch AC, et al. Multicenter, double-blind, placebo-controlled crossover study to assess the acute prokinetic efficacy of nizatidine-controlled release (150 and 300 mg) in patients with gastroesophageal reflux disease. Am J Med Sci. 2010;340(4):259-263.

164. Fock KM, Poh CH. Gastroesophageal reflux disease. J Gastroenterol. 2010;45(8):808-815.

165. Haastrup P, Paulsen MS, Begtrup LM, Hansen JM, Jarbøl DE. Strategies for discontinuation of proton pump inhibitors: a systematic review. Fam Pract. 2014;31(6):625-630.

166. de Bortoli N, Guidi G, Martinucci I, et al. Voluntary and controlled weight loss can reduce symptoms and proton pump inhibitor use and dosage in patients with gastroesophageal reflux disease: a comparative study. Dis Esophagus. 2016;29(2):197-204.

167. Pollock K, Grime J. The cost and cost-effectiveness of PPIs: GP perspectives and responses to a prescribing dilemma and their implications for the development of patient-centered healthcare. Eur J Gen Pract. 2003;9(4):126-133, 140.

168. Reimer C, Søndergaard B, Hilsted L, Bytzer P. Proton-pump inhibitor therapy induces acid-related symptoms in healthy volunteers after withdrawal of therapy. Gastroenterology. 2009;137(1):80-87.

169. Gillen D, Wirz AA, Ardill JE, McColl KE. Rebound hypersecretion after omeprazole and its relation to on-treatment acid suppression and Helicobacter pylori status. Gastroenterology. 1999;116(2):239-247.

170. Fossmark R, Johnsen G, Johanessen E, Waldum HL. Rebound acid hypersecretion after long-term inhibition of gastric secretion. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2005;21(2):149-154.

171. Lee C, Lo A, Ubhi K, Milewski M. Outcome after discontinuation of proton pump inhibitors at a residential care site: quality improvement project. Can J Hosp Pharm. 2017;70(3):215-223.

172. Fitzgerald RC, di Pietro M, Ragunath K, et al. British Society of Gastroenterology guidelines on the diagnosis and management of Barrett's oesophagus. Gut. 2014;63(1):7-42.

173. Singh S, Garg SK, Singh PP, Iyer PG, El-Seraq HB. Acid-suppressive medications and risk of oesophageal adenocarcinoma in patients with Barrett's oesophagus: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Gut. 2014;63(8):1229-1237.

174. Akiyama J, Bertele A, Brock C, et al. Benign and precursor lesions in the esophagus. Ann N Y Acad Sci. 2014;1325:226-241.

175. Kantor ED, Rehm CD, Haas JS, Chan AT, Giovannucci EL. Trends in prescription drug use among adults in the United States from 1999–2012. JAMA. 2015;314(17):1818-1831.

176. Katz MH. Failing the acid test: benefits of proton pump inhibitors may not justify the risks for many users. Arch Intern Med. 2010;170(9):747-748.

177. Xie Y, Bowe B, Li T, Xian H, Yan Y, Al-Aly Z. Risk of death among users of proton pump inhibitors: a longitudinal observational cohort study of United States veterans. BMJ Open. 2017;7(6):e015735.

178. Maes ML, Fixen DR, Linnebur SA. Adverse effects of proton-pump inhibitor use in older adults: a review of the evidence. Ther Adv Drug Saf. 2017;8(9):273-297.

179. American Geriatrics Society 2015 Beers Criteria Update Expert Panel. American Geriatrics Society 2015 updated Beers Criteria for potentially inappropriate medication use in older adults. J Am Geriatr Soc. 2015;63(11):2227-2246.

180. Johnson DA, Katz PO, Armstrong D, et al. The safety of appropriate use of over-the-counter proton pump inhibitors: an evidence-based review and Delphi consensus. Drugs. 2017;77(5):547-561.

181. Storr MA. What is nonacid reflux disease? Can J Gastroenterol. 2011;25(1):35-38.

182. Rackoff A, Agrawal A, Hila A, Mainie I, Tutuian R, Castell DO. Histamine-2 receptor antagonists at night improve gastroesophageal reflux disease symptoms for patients on proton pump inhibitor therapy. Dis Esophagus. 2005;18(6):370-373.

183. Mainie I, Tutuian R, Castell DO. Addition of a H2 receptor antagonist to PPI improves acid control and decreases nocturnal acid breakthrough. J Clin Gastroenterol. 2008;42(6):676-679.

184. Maradey-Romero C, Fass R. New and future drug development for gastroesophageal reflux disease. J Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2014;20(1):6-16.

185. Ren LH, Chen WX, Qian LJ, Li S, Gu M, Shi RH. Addition of prokinetics to PPI therapy in gastroesophageal reflux disease: a meta-analysis. World J Gastroenterol. 2014;20(9):2412-2419.

186. Tack J, Zerbib F, Blondeau K, et al. Randomized clinical trial: effect of the 5-HT4 receptor agonist revexepride on reflux parameters in patients with persistent reflux symptoms despite PPI treatment. Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2015;27(2):258-268.

187. Shaheen NJ, Adler J, Dedrie S, et al. Randomised clinical trial: the 5-HT4 agonist revexepride in patients with gastro-oesophageal reflux disease who have persistent symptoms despite PPI therapy. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2015;41(7):649-661.

188. Lei WY, Hung JS, Liu TT, Yi CH, Chen CL. Influence of prucalopride on esophageal secondary peristalsis in reflux patients with ineffective motility. J Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2018;33(3):650-655.

189. Abbasinazari M, Panahi Y, Mortazavi SA, et al. Effect of a combination of omeprazole plus sustained release baclofen versus omeprazole alone on symptoms of patients with gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD). Iran J Pharm Res. 2014;13(4):1221-1226.

190. Surdea-Blaga T, Băncilă I, Dobru D, et al. Mucosal protective compounds in the treatment of gastroesophageal reflux disease: a position paper based on evidence of the Romanian Society of Neurogastroenterology. J Gastrointestin Liver Dis. 2016;25(4):537-546.

191. Coyle C, Crawford G, Wilkinson J, Thomas SJ, Bytzer P. Randomised clinical trial: addition of alginate-antacid (Gaviscon Double Action) to proton pump inhibitor therapy in patients with breakthrough symptoms. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2017;45(12):1524-1533.

192. Leiman DA, Riff BP, Morgan S, et al. Alginate therapy is effective treatment for GERD symptoms: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Dis Esophagus. 2017;30(5):1-9.

193. Reimer C, Lødrup AB, Smith G, Wilkinson J, Bytzer P. Randomised clinical trial: alginate (Gaviscon Advance) vs. placebo as add-on therapy in reflux patients with inadequate response to a once daily proton pump inhibitor. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2016;43(8):899-909.

194. Candelli M, Carloni E, Armuzzi A, et al. Role of sucralfate in gastrointestinal diseases. Panminerva Med. 2000;42(1):55-59.

195. Palmieri B, Merighi A, Corbascio D, Rottigni V, Fistetto G, Esposito A. Fixed combination of hyaluronic acid and chondroitin-sulphate oral formulation in a randomized double blind, placebo controlled study for the treatment of symptoms in patients with non-erosive gastroesophageal reflux. Eur Rev Med Pharmacol Sci. 2013;17(24):3272-3278.

196. International Association for the Study of Pain. Chronic Chest Pain. Available at http://www.iasp-pain.org/files/Content/ContentFolders/GlobalYearAgainstPain2/VisceralPainFactSheets/8%2DChestPain%2Epdf. Last accessed September 7, 2018.

197. International Association for the Study of Pain. Neurobiology of Visceral Pain. Available at http://www.iasp-pain.org/files/Content/ContentFolders/GlobalYearAgainstPain2/VisceralPainFactSheets/2-Neurobiology.pdf. Last accessed September 7, 2018.

198. Knowles CH, Aziz Q. Visceral hypersensitivity in non-erosive reflux disease. Gut. 2008;57(5):674-683.

199. Viazis N, Keyoglou A, Kanellopoulos AK, et al. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors for the treatment of hypersensitive esophagus: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Am J Gastroenterol. 2012;107(11):1662-1667.

200. Forcelini CM, Tomiozzo JC Jr, Farré R, et al. Effect of nortriptyline on brain responses to painful esophageal acid infusion in patients with non-erosive reflux disease. Neurogastroenterol Motil. 2014;26(2):187-195.

201. Weijenborg PW, de Schepper HS, Smout AJ, Bredenoord AJ. Effects of antidepressants in patients with functional esophageal disorders or gastroesophageal reflux disease: a systematic review. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2015;13(2):251-259.

202. Keefer L, Kahrilas PJ. Low-dose tricyclics for esophageal hypersensitivity: is it all placebo effect? Am J Gastroenterol. 2016;111(2):225-227.

203. Nguyen TM, Eslick GD. Systematic review: the treatment of noncardiac chest pain with antidepressants. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2012;35(5):493-500.

204. Jha LK, Fass R, Gadam R, et al. The effect of ramelteon on heartburn symptoms of patients with gastroesophageal reflux disease and chronic insomnia: a pilot study. J Clin Gastroenterol. 2016;50(2):e19-e24.

205. Gunaratnam NT, Jessup TP, Inadomi J, Lascewski DP. Sub-optimal proton pump inhibitor dosing is prevalent in patients with poorly controlled gastro-oesophageal reflux disease. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2006;23(10):1473-1477.

206. Richter JE. Current diagnosis and management of suspected reflux symptoms refractory to proton pump inhibitor therapy. Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2014;10(9):547-555.

207. Savarino V, Di Mario F, Scarpignato C. Proton pump inhibitors in GERD: an overview of their pharmacology, efficacy and safety. Pharmacol Res. 2009;59(3):135-153.

208. Bytzer P, van Zanten SV, Mattsson H, Wernersson B. Partial symptom-response to proton pump inhibitors in patients with non-erosive reflux disease or reflux oesophagitis: a post hoc analysis of 5796 patients. Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 2012;36(7):635-643.

209. Kethman W, Hawn M. New approaches to gastroesophageal reflux disease. J Gastrointest Surg. 2017;21(19):1544-1552.

210. Asti E, Bonitta G, Lovece A, Lazzari V, Bonavina L. Longitudinal comparison of quality in patients undergoing Toupet fundoplication versus magnetic sphincter augmentation. Medicine (Baltimore). 2016;95(30):1-6.

211. Kim D, Velanovich V. Surgical treatment of GERD: where have we been and where are we going? Gastroenterol Clin North Am. 2014;43(1):135-145.

212. Lundell L, Bell M, Ruth M. Systematic review: laparoscopic fundoplication for gastroesophageal reflux disease in partial responders to proton pump inhibitors. World J Gastroenterol. 2014;20(3):804-813.

213. Broeders JA, Draaisma WA, Bredenoord AJ, Smout AJ, Broeders IA, Gooszen HG. Long-term outcome of Nissen fundoplication in non-erosive and erosive gastro-oesophageal reflux disease. Br J Surg. 2010;97(6):845-852.

214. Broeders JA, Rijnhart-de Jong HG, Draaisma WA, Bredenoord AJ, Smout AJ, Gooszen HG. Ten-year outcome of laparoscopic and conventional Nissen fundoplication: randomized clinical trial. Ann Surg. 2009;250(5):698-706.

215. Kelly JJ, Watson DI, Chin KF, Devitt PG, Game PA, Jamieson GG. Laparoscopic Nissen fundoplication: clinical outcomes at 10 years. J Am Coll Surg. 2007;205(4):570-575.

216. Lødrup A, Pottegard A, Hallas J, Bytzer P. Use of proton pump inhibitors after anti-reflux surgery: a nationwide register-based follow-up study. Gut. 2014;63(10):1544-1549.

217. Rosenthal R, Peterli R, Guenin MO, von Flüe M, Achermann C. Laparoscopic antireflux surgery: long-term outcomes and quality of life. J Laparoendosc Adv Surg Tech A. 2006;16(6):557-561.

218. Campos GM, Peters JH, DeMeester TR, et al. Multivariate analysis of factors predicting outcome after laparoscopic Nissen fundoplication. J Gastrointest Surg. 1999;3(3):292-300.

219. Ganz RA. A review of new surgical and endoscopic therapies for gastroesophageal reflux disease. Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2016;12(7):424-431.

220. Lundell L, Miettinen P, Myrvold HE, et al. Comparison of outcomes twelve years after antireflux surgery or omeprazole maintenance therapy for reflux esophagitis. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2009;7(12):1292-1298.

221. Wang YR, Dempsey DT, Richter JE. Trends and perioperative outcomes of inpatient antireflux surgery in the United States, 1993–2006. Dis Esophagus. 2011;24(4):215-223.

222. Smith CD, Ganz RA, Lipham JC, Bell RC, Rattner DW. Lower esophageal sphincter augmentation for gastroesophageal reflux disease: the safety of a modern implant. J Laparoendosc Adv Surg Tech A. 2017;27(6):586-591.

223. Ganz RA. A modern magnetic implant for gastroesophageal reflux disease. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2017;15(9):1326-1337.

224. Warren HF, Brown LM, Mihura M, Farivar AS, Aye RW, Louie BE. Factors influencing the outcome of magnetic sphincter augmentation for chronic gastroesophageal reflux disease. Surg Endosc. 2018;32(1):405-412.

225. Lipka S, Kumar A, Richter JE. No evidence for efficacy of radiofrequency ablation for treatment of gastroesophageal reflux disease: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2015;13(6):1058-1067.

226. Lundell L. Borderline indications and selection of gastroesophageal reflux disease patients: "Is surgery better than medical therapy?" Dig Dis. 2014;32(1-2):152-155.

227. Varela JE, Hinojosa MW, Nguyen NT. Laparoscopic fundoplication compared with laparoscopic gastric bypass in morbidly obese patients with gastroesophageal reflux disease. Surg Obes Relat Dis. 2009;5(2):139-143.

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

1. University of Michigan. Guidelines for Clinical Care: Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD). Available at https://www.med.umich.edu/1info/FHP/practiceguides/gerd/gerd.12.pdf. Last accessed September 7, 2018.

2. ASGE Standards of Practice Committee, Muthusamy VR, Lightdale JR, et al. The role of endoscopy in the management of GERD. Gastrointest Endosc. 2015;81(6):1305-1310. Available at https://www.asge.org/docs/default-source/education/practice_guidelines/doc-endoscopy_in_the_managment_of_gerd.pdf. Last accessed September 7, 2018.

3. Stefanidis D, Richardson W, Dunkin B. Clinical Spotlight Review: Endoluminal Treatments for Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD). Available at https://www.sages.org/publications/guidelines/endoluminal-treatments-for-gastroesophageal-reflux-disease-gerd. Last accessed September 7, 2018.

38920 • Pathophysiology: The Central Nervous System

Jane C. Norman, RN, MSN, CNE, PhD

www.netce.com

Copyright © 2018 NetCE, All rights reserved.

The nervous system is the body's most organized and complex structural and functional system, and it profoundly affects both psychologic and physiologic function. This course discusses the importance of the central nervous system (CNS) to human function and the major consequences of central neurologic disorders. The onset of neurologic problems may be sudden, as in traumatic spinal cord severance or ruptured aneurysm, or insidious, as in Parkinson disease or multiple sclerosis.

Table of Contents

38920 • Pathophysiology: The Central Nervous System

Course Overview

Audience

Course Objective

Learning Objectives

Faculty

Faculty Disclosure

Division Planner

Division Planner Disclosure

About the Sponsor

Disclosure Statement

1. INTRODUCTION

2. THE NERVOUS SYSTEM IN HEALTH AND ILLNESS: STRUCTURAL AND FUNCTIONAL INTER-RELATIONSHIPS

NEURONS

THE BRAIN

THE SPINAL CORD

THE AUTONOMIC NERVOUS SYSTEM

THE RETICULAR ACTIVATING SYSTEM

MOTOR FUNCTION

3. PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE CNS

THE CEREBROSPINAL FLUID SYSTEM

THE BLOOD-BRAIN BARRIER

4. CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM CIRCULATION

REGULATION OF CEREBRAL BLOOD FLOW

SPINAL CORD CIRCULATION

5. PATHOPHYSIOLOGIC INFLUENCES AND EFFECTS

INFLAMMATION AND INFECTIOUS PROCESSES

TRAUMA, TUMORS, AND COMPRESSION

DEGENERATIVE PROCESSES

HEREDITARY AND CONGENITAL DISEASES

6. RELATED SYSTEM INFLUENCES AND EFFECTS

7. PSYCHOSOCIAL/LIFESTYLE INFLUENCES AND EFFECTS

8. THE NURSING PROCESS FOR PATIENTS WITH CNS DYSFUNCTION

SUBJECTIVE DATA

OBJECTIVE DATA

DIAGNOSTIC STUDIES

9. NURSING DIAGNOSES, PLANNING, AND IMPLEMENTATION

INEFFECTIVE AIRWAY CLEARANCE

ALTERATION IN BOWEL ELIMINATION

INEFFECTIVE BREATHING PATTERN

ALTERATION IN CARDIAC OUTPUT

IMPAIRED COMMUNICATION

IMPAIRED PHYSICAL MOBILITY

ALTERATION IN NUTRITION

SELF-CARE DEFICIT

ALTERATION IN SENSORY PERCEPTION

SEXUAL DYSFUNCTION

ALTERATION IN URINARY ELIMINATION

10. CONGENITAL DISORDERS AFFECTING THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM

CEREBRAL PALSY

MUSCULAR DYSTROPHY

HUNTINGTON CHOREA

NEUROFIBROMATOSIS

ARTERIOVENOUS MALFORMATIONS OF THE BRAIN

11. CNS DISORDERS OF MULTIFACTORIAL ORIGIN

STROKE

SEIZURE DISORDERS

DYSTONIA

HEADACHE

TRIGEMINAL NEURALGIA

12. DEGENERATIVE CNS DISORDERS

ALZHEIMER DISEASE

PARKINSON DISEASE

AMYOTROPHIC LATERAL SCLEROSIS

SPINAL STENOSIS

13. IMMUNOLOGIC CNS DISORDERS

MYASTHENIA GRAVIS

MULTIPLE SCLEROSIS

14. INFECTIOUS AND INFLAMMATORY CNS DISORDERS

MENINGITIS

ENCEPHALITIS

MYELITIS

INTRACRANIAL ABSCESS

HERPES ZOSTER

15. NEOPLASTIC AND OBSTRUCTIVE CNS DISORDERS

16. TRAUMATIC DISORDERS

HEAD TRAUMA

SPINAL CORD INJURY

17. CONCLUSION

18. CASE STUDIES

CEREBROVASCULAR ACCIDENT

ACUTE PYOGENIC MENINGITIS

Works Cited

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

38920 • Pathophysiology: The Central Nervous System

Education Category. Infection Control / Internal Medicine

Release Date. 12/01/2018

Expiration Date. 11/30/2021

Course Overview

The nervous system is the body's most organized and complex structural and functional system, and it profoundly affects both psychologic and physiologic function. This course discusses the importance of the central nervous system (CNS) to human function and the major consequences of central neurologic disorders. The onset of neurologic problems may be sudden, as in traumatic spinal cord severance or ruptured aneurysm, or insidious, as in Parkinson disease or multiple sclerosis.

Audience

This course is designed for nurses working in critical care and general and specialty medical-surgical units in which patients with multiple organ system problems are found.

Course Objective

As health care becomes more complex, it is essential that the theoretical concepts of the basis of illness (pathophysiology) be well understood. The purpose of this course is to reinforce the scientific rationales for the interventions nurses perform and the decisions nurses make as patients move through the ever-changing management of their central nervous system disorder.

Learning Objectives

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

1. Identify the key structures and functional inter-relationships in the central nervous system (CNS).

2. Discuss structures and mechanisms in place to protect the CNS.

3. Describe the components and functions of CNS circulation.

4. Discuss the pathophysiologic and environmental influences and effects on the CNS.

5. Outline the role of subjective data in completing a full nursing assessment of the CNS.

6. Describe objective data compiled during a nursing assessment of the CNS.

7. Identify diagnostic tests used in the identification and classification of CNS diseases.

8. Outline the nursing diagnoses, planning, and management of conditions related to CNS dysfunction.

9. Discuss clinical manifestations of congenital diseases of the CNS.

10. Review signs and symptoms of CNS disorders of multifactorial origin and related nursing actions.

11. Describe the common causes, appearances, and treatment of degenerative CNS disorders.

12. Analyze the presentation and nursing management of immunologic CNS disorders.

13. Evaluate pathologic causes and manifestations of infectious and inflammatory disorders of the CNS.

14. Discuss the pathophysiology and clinical manifestations of neoplastic and obstructive CNS disorders.

15. Outline the concepts and information the nurse should provide for the patient who has sustained a traumatic CNS injury.

Faculty

Jane C. Norman, RN, MSN, CNE, PhD, received her undergraduate education at the University of Tennessee, Knoxville campus. There she completed a double major in Sociology and English. She completed an Associate of Science in Nursing at the University of Tennessee, Nashville campus and began her nursing career at Vanderbilt University Medical Center. Jane received her Masters in Medical-Surgical Nursing from Vanderbilt University. In 1978, she took her first faculty position and served as program director for an associate degree program. In 1982, she received her PhD in Higher Education Administration from Peabody College of Vanderbilt University. In 1988, Dr. Norman took a position at Tennessee State University. There she has achieved tenure and full professor status. She is a member of Sigma Theta Tau National Nursing Honors Society. In 2005, she began her current position as Director of the Masters of Science in Nursing Program.

Faculty Disclosure

Contributing faculty, Jane C. Norman, RN, MSN, CNE, PhD, has disclosed no relevant financial relationship with any product manufacturer or service provider mentioned.

Division Planner

Sharon Cannon, RN, EdD, ANEF

Division Planner Disclosure

The division planner has disclosed no relevant financial relationship with any product manufacturer or service provider mentioned.

About the Sponsor

The purpose of NetCE is to provide challenging curricula to assist healthcare professionals to raise their levels of expertise while fulfilling their continuing education requirements, thereby improving the quality of healthcare.

Our contributing faculty members have taken care to ensure that the information and recommendations are accurate and compatible with the standards generally accepted at the time of publication. The publisher disclaims any liability, loss or damage incurred as a consequence, directly or indirectly, of the use and application of any of the contents. Participants are cautioned about the potential risk of using limited knowledge when integrating new techniques into practice.

Disclosure Statement

It is the policy of NetCE not to accept commercial support. Furthermore, commercial interests are prohibited from distributing or providing access to this activity to learners.

1. INTRODUCTION

The nervous system is the body's most organized and complex structural and functional system, and it profoundly affects both psychologic and physiologic function. This course discusses the importance of the central nervous system (CNS) to human function and the major consequences of central neurologic disorders. The onset of neurologic problems may be sudden, as in traumatic spinal cord severance or ruptured aneurysm, or insidious, as in Parkinson disease or multiple sclerosis. Providing care to patients experiencing neurologic disorders is challenging and requires extensive knowledge of neurologic structures and function and neurologic disease processes.

Neurologic problems can be frightening and even devastating to the patient and family involved, especially if the process is irreversible. Many such problems produce varying degrees of physical and/or psychosocial dependency. Physical disabilities may limit self-care, and memory loss and confusion can occur. Subtle or gross changes in consciousness may develop, and patients may not be responsible for their behavior at times. A person's entire way of life may be altered. This course provides the information necessary to plan appropriate nursing care for individuals experiencing CNS problems in both acute and rehabilitative states. An overview of CNS anatomy, physiology, and pathophysiology is detailed, as are assessment, diagnostic tests, pathologic findings, planning, intervention, and evaluation of nursing care provided for these patients.

2. THE NERVOUS SYSTEM IN HEALTH AND ILLNESS: STRUCTURAL AND FUNCTIONAL INTER-RELATIONSHIPS

Every physical, mental, and emotional aspect of a person's existence is influenced by continually changing internal and external environments. To deal with these changes effectively, the nervous system perceives and interprets the changes and then quickly and continuously initiates, coordinates, and modulates body responses. This job is endless, because the body and the environment are never static. Internal changes include the process of aging, anabolic and catabolic activities, and psychologic states; external changes include ambient temperatures, light, noise levels, and colonies of micro-organisms.

The nervous system not only plays a key role in the management of body functions; it also depends on other body systems. Indeed, the nervous system quickly malfunctions if its sources of nourishment, its waste management systems, or its protective mechanisms are lost or impeded.

The brain is structurally divided into components according to its embryologic development. These components, known as the forebrain (prosencephalon), midbrain (mesencephalon), and hindbrain (rhombencephalon) are further divided according to their location within the adult brain. Knowing these divisions is useful because they are often involved in CNS function or pathology [7,10].

An understanding of structure and function and the interdependence of body systems is an essential part of the nurse's knowledge base. With this knowledge, nurses can effectively assess and plan care of the patient with CNS dysfunction.

NEURONS

Structure of the Neuron

Neurons are the primary components of the nervous system. Working alone or as units, neurons detect environmental changes and initiate body responses needed to maintain homeostasis. Each neuron is composed of a cell body, an axon, and a number of dendrites. Both axons and dendrites vary in size and shape. The axons, ranging in length from miniscule to over a meter, transmit messages throughout the central and peripheral nervous systems. Each cell has only one axon, but axonal branching is common and allows for broader dissemination of neuronal transmissions. Dendrites, the processes of neurons that conduct electrical impulses to the cell body, also have varying branching patterns. These characteristics allow for the efficient transmission and reception of impulses throughout the body [2,3].

Many central axons are wrapped in insulating sheaths of a white, fatty substance called myelin. The myelin is encased in special cells lying end to end along the axons. Junctures, known as nodes of Ranvier, occur where these cells abut, allowing for more rapid transmission of electrical impulses. Axons often branch at these nodes [2,3].

Two distinct types of cells cover axons of the nervous system. Those located in the CNS are known as oligodendrocytes. These cells and the neurons they protect cannot be replaced or repaired if damaged. Schwann cells, which surround peripheral nervous system myelinated and unmyelinated axons, form the neurilemma, the outer membrane that supports and protects peripheral nervous system axons and may facilitate the healing of damaged axons [2,3].

Groups of neurons called nuclei provide routes for the transmission of complex afferent and efferent impulses. Fasciculi are bundles of neurons; groups of fasciculi, encased in a covering called epineurium, are referred to as nerves. Most nerves contain afferent (toward the CNS) and efferent (from the CNS) fibers [2,3].

Structurally distinct neurons are responsible for receiving and sending specific messages to the brain about the body's internal and external environment. There are five major types of sensory receptors [2,3]:

- Mechanoreceptors: Receive impulses related to pressure, touch, and mechanical deformation of the receptor

- Thermoreceptors: Respond to heat and cold

- Nociceptors: Receive messages about pain caused specifically by physical or chemical damage

- Electromagnetic receptors: Respond to light on the retina

- Chemoreceptors: Sense flavors, odors, oxygen levels, osmolality of body fluids, and the concentration of carbon dioxide

Each type of receptor is sensitive to the particular stimuli it is designed to receive and almost nonresponsive to other types of stimuli. For example, a nociceptor can be stimulated by electricity, heat, crushing, or other tissue damage that will be experienced as pain. The nociceptor will not, however, respond to light. Each sensory nerve terminates at specific points in the CNS, where the message is interpreted [2,3].

CNS and peripheral nervous system neurons cannot function independently. Their nutritional and physical support and protection are provided by other cells commonly referred to as glial cells. Glial cells, unlike neurons, are able to undergo mitosis. Astrocytes, star-shaped cells with many projections, are the largest and most numerous glial cells. They provide structural support and nutrition to neurons and maintain a biochemical environment supportive of nerve impulse transmission and synaptic activity. If nervous tissue is destroyed, astrocytes multiply (a process called gliosis) to fill in the area or line a cavity. Microglia, considered the phagocytes of the CNS, are classified as part of the body's reticuloendothelial system. They remove dead tissue and foreign matter. Ependymal cells are involved in cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) system function. They line the choroid plexuses of the ventricular system, the ventricles, and central canal of the spinal cord. Oligodendrocytes and Schwann cells, previously considered for their role in the encasement and protection of axons, are also classified as neuroglia [7,10].

Neuronal Function

Functionally, neurons are recognized as being motor (efferent) neurons, sensory (afferent) neurons, or internuncial (transmitters of messages) neurons. Neuronal messages are transmitted through electrical impulses, with the necessary voltages created by positive and negative forces produced while ions line up inside and outside the cell's plasma membrane. When a nerve is in a resting state (known as a resting membrane potential), the electrical charge outside the wall is positive and the charge inside is negative [43,44,45].

The principal extracellular cation is sodium; the main intercellular cation is potassium. With stimulation of the cell, the charge is reversed, as sodium moves into the cell and potassium moves out. This reversal results in a flow of electric current. With sufficient stimulation, the reversal of polarity travels along the entire axon. This process, known as an action potential, requires only a few milliseconds. Quickly, electrical forces and ion concentration forces re-establish the resting membrane potential. If a stimulus is not sufficient to produce an action potential and another stimulus occurs before the membrane has completely stabilized, depolarization will be facilitated [43,44,45].

Information is transmitted from one neuron to another at synapses following the initiation of an action potential. In humans, chemical synapses initiate almost all action potentials. These synapses, located where axons and dendrites meet, employ various neurotransmitters, which are stored in and released from the axon terminal following an action potential. Action potentials are believed to increase the permeability of the axon terminal to calcium, allowing it to move into the axon terminal to stimulate the release of neurotransmitters into the synaptic cleft. The neurotransmitter diffuses across the cleft and attaches to postsynaptic receptors [43,44,45].

The influence of neurotransmitters on the postsynaptic receptor depends on the combination of impulses received. This combination is derived from the total number and frequency of impulses received over a period of time from one or multiple synapses. Strong stimuli activate a greater number of neurons. Myelinated fibers speed the transmission of impulses. Inhibitory impulses also influence the postsynaptic receptors' response. Through these combinations, the nervous system "fine tunes" synaptic activity needed to manage the body's complex functions. Nerve impulses are binary (either "on" or "off"), so the CNS must discriminate among stimuli by interpreting variations in strength, frequency, and number of stimuli received [43,44,45].

Synapses between neuron effector junctions are similar to chemical synapses between two neurons. A review of the events that produce skeletal muscle contraction serves as a good example of how these synapses work. Following depolarization of the axon terminal and movement of calcium into the terminal, acetylcholine is released. It diffuses across the synaptic cleft at the neuromuscular junction to the plasma membrane of the muscle cell and attaches to the receptor sites, causing an increased permeability of the muscle fiber membrane to sodium and potassium ions. If the impulse, known as an endplate potential, is sufficient to depolarize the muscle-fiber membrane, a propagated action potential leads to contraction of the muscle fiber. At the cleft site, a small portion of acetylcholine diffuses away but most is quickly inactivated by the enzyme cholinesterase, located on the muscle-cell membrane, which prevents continued excitation of the muscle fibers [43,44,45].

There are many other neurotransmitters. About 30 are known or suspected to play a role in nerve-impulse transmission; some have multiple actions. For example, norepinephrine is involved in the maintenance of arousal and dreaming sleep and regulation of moods; dopamine has roles in the regulation of emotional responses and control of complex movements; and endorphins and encephalin are believed to be involved in the perception and integration of pain and emotional experiences [43,44,45].

The Cranial Nerves

The functions of cranial nerves (CNs) vary; they may be motor, sensory, or mixed. Motor nerves are innervated with proprioceptive (sensory) branches. The parasympathetic branch of the autonomic nervous system provides a visceral component for some cranial nerves. The 12 pairs of cranial nerves, identified by roman numerals, are ordered by their position within the skull [47].

Cranial Nerve I (Olfactory Nerves)

CN I nerves, made up of sensory receptor cells within the epithelial lining of the nasal mucosa, are responsible for the perception of odors. Nerve impulses originating here are transmitted to the temporal lobes for interpretation [47].

Cranial Nerve II (Optic Nerves)

The optic nerves, which are actually nerve tracts, originate in the retina of the eye and enter the cranium via the optic foramina. Nerve impulses are transmitted to the occipital lobe, where vision is perceived. Optic nerve projections from the orbits meet at the optic chiasm. Here each tract divides, the inner halves joining with fibers from the opposite orbit. From this point, each tract carries fibers from both eyes. Some fibers important for visual reflexes synapse in the midbrain, but most travel to the thalamus to synapse with neurons that form pathways called optic radiations. These fibers terminate in the visual cortex of the occipital lobe [47].

Cranial Nerve III (Oculomotor Nerves)

The oculomotor nerves emerge from the midbrain and enter the orbits through the superior orbital fissures. They are responsible for movement of four of the six extrinsic eye muscles and for opening the eyelid. Parasympathetic innervation supplies the ciliary muscle and the sphincter muscle of the iris to control visual accommodation and adjustment to light intensity [47].

Cranial Nerve IV (Trochlear Nerves)

The trochlear nerves arise from the dorsal side of the midbrain. CN IV is responsible for voluntary movement of the eyeball through its innervation of the superior oblique muscle [47].

Cranial Nerve V (Trigeminal Nerves)

Trigeminal nerve fiber locations are widespread. Both sensory and motor fibers exit from the pons, and some sensory nuclei are located in the medulla. Deep and superficial sensory fibers innervate the face and anterior portion of the head through the ophthalmic, maxillary, and mandibular branches. Sensory fibers for pain, light, touch, and proprioception (i.e., awareness of one's position in space) can be readily identified. The motor components of this nerve are responsible for mastication [47].

Cranial Nerve VI (Abducens Nerves)

CN VI nerves exit from the medulla just below the pons and enter the orbits with CN III and IV. They function to roll the eyes outward [47].

Cranial Nerve VII (Facial Nerves)

CN VII nerves project from the lower edges of the pons. They supply motor neurons for the facial and scalp muscles. Sensory fibers supply the taste buds to detect sweet, sour, and salt on the anterior two-thirds of the tongue. Parasympathetic fibers supply the lacrimal glands and the submandibular and sublingual salivary glands [47].

Cranial Nerve VIII (Vestibulocochlear Nerves)

There are two sensory divisions to the eighth cranial nerves—an auditory division and a vestibular division. Both originate at inner-ear receptors located in the petrous portion of the temporal bones. The two divisions, enclosed in a single sheath, pass to the brain stem just below the pons. Some of the vestibular fibers travel directly to the cerebellum. Auditory impulses are transmitted to the temporal lobes for interpretation [47].

Cranial Nerve IX (Glossopharyngeal Nerves)

The nuclei for CN IX, located in the medulla oblongata, innervate the tongue and pharynx. The motor component is important in swallowing. Sensory responsibilities include perception of bitter taste on the posterior one-third of the tongue; sensory awareness for the mucous membranes of the pharynx, tonsils, and middle ear cavity; carotid body receptor sensitivity to serum oxygen and carbon dioxide levels; and baroreceptor information regarding blood pressure. Parasympathetic neurons innervate the parotid gland [47].

Cranial Nerve X (Vagus Nerves)

The vagus nerve nuclei, also located in the medulla, carry motor impulses to and sensory impulses from the pharynx and larynx. Extensive parasympathetic nerve fibers innervate the pharynx, larynx, and trachea and extend into the thorax and abdomen. Thoracic and abdominal vagal branches influence the function of the esophagus, lungs, aorta, stomach, gallbladder, spleen, small intestine, kidneys, and upper two-thirds of the large intestine. Sensory fibers from the vagus nerve related to visceral functions generally operate at an unconscious level. An exception is nausea, which is perceived via the vagus nerve [47].

Cranial Nerve XI (Accessory Nerves)

CN XI is formed by two nerves. One projects from the medulla; the other, projecting from the fifth or sixth cervical segment of the spinal cord, is a spinal nerve. Fibers from the cranial portion join with the vagus nerve to supply muscles of the larynx and pharynx. Fibers from the spinal component innervate the trapezius and sternocleidomastoid muscles [47].

Cranial Nerve XII (Hypoglossal Nerves)

The hypoglossal nerves exit from the medulla oblongata and pass through the hypoglossal canals located beneath the tongue. These nerves are responsible for tongue movement [47].

THE BRAIN

The outer area of the cerebral cortex is composed of gray matter in complex folds (gyri) or convolutions separated by deep depressions (fissures) and shallow depressions (sulci). These folds make the surface area much greater. The patterning of gyri and sulci is similar in all individuals. The following well-marked fissures are distinguishable in all brains [7,10]:

- The longitudinal fissure: Separates the right and left hemispheres of the brain

- The central sulcus (fissure of Rolando): Extends outward and downward over the hemisphere

- The lateral fissure (fissure of Silvius): Begins on the underside of the brain and moves out and around the brain along its side

Each hemisphere of the cerebral cortex is divided into lobes. The frontal lobe is located anterior to the central sulcus and above the lateral fissure. The parietal lobe is positioned behind the central sulcus. The temporal lobe is located below the frontal and parietal lobes (below the lateral fissure) and merges posteriorly with the occipital lobe. The occipital lobe extends from the parieto-occipital sulcus inferiorly abound the base the cerebrum. The insula (island of Reil or central lobe) lies within the lateral cerebral fissure. The cerebellum, which lies below the occipital lobe, is separated by the deep transverse fissure into which a dural fold, called the tentorium cerebelli, extends [7,10].

Nerve fiber tracts establish connections between areas within the brain. The corpus callosum consists of fibers extending between the right and left hemispheres. The commissural tracts of the corpus callosum located deep in the longitudinal fissure extend from one convolution to a corresponding one in the opposite hemisphere. The internal capsule also allows networking between areas within the brain. The internal capsule is comprised of two distinct sections referred to as anterior and posterior limbs. Here, afferent and efferent fibers extend from an extensive, fanlike radiation of fibers in the cerebrum to link with the brain stem and spinal cord. Short association fibers extend from one convolution to another in the same hemisphere. Long association tracts interconnect cortical regions in different lobes of each hemisphere [7,10].

The basal ganglia are coated with the white matter of the cerebral hemispheres. This area contains the caudate nucleus, putamen, globus pallidus, thalamus, subthalamus, substantia nigra, and the red nucleus. These structures have many and varied functions, including sensory and motor activities and transmission of afferent and efferent signals to appropriate parts of the nervous system. The hypothalamus, a small but extremely important area of the brain, is situated just below the thalamus. It receives input from all parts of the body, both by neuronal transmission and its blood supply. The hypothalamus, in turn, influences body functions via these same routes [7,10].

The Cerebellum

The cerebellum lies below the tentorium cerebelli in the posterior inferior portion of the cranial vault. It is made up of two hemispheres connected in the center by a structure called the vermis. The superficial area of the cerebellum is composed of gray matter, which lies in even, horizontal folds forming fissures and sulci. White fiber tracts lying below the gray matter provide extensive afferent and efferent connections with the brain stem, cortex, thalamus, and basal ganglia. Cerebellar efferent signals travel to the brain stem, thalamus, and motor cortex [18].

Cerebellum Function

The cerebellum modulates and coordinates skeletal muscle activity and maintains body posture and muscle tone. It controls movement with both excitatory and inhibitor signals, which modulates fine movements in ways the cerebral cortex is incapable of carrying out. Each hemisphere influences the movement of the ipsilateral side of the body and modifies activity initiated elsewhere in the body. There is no conscious input [48].

Activities of the cerebellum derive from the multiple inputs from the CNS and peripheral nervous system. Afferent fibers travel to the cerebellum from the cerebral cortex by way of the corticocerebellar tracts and the pons. Peripheral afferent impulses from muscle spindles, Golgi tendon organs, skin, and joint receptors travel to the cerebellum via the ventral and dorsal spinocerebellar tracts. The reticular substance of the brain stem and vestibular tracts also provide the cerebellum with information [48].

Cerebellar efferent impulses are sent to the motor cortex via the thalamus. Additional efferent signals are transmitted to the basal ganglia, red nucleus, reticular formation of the brain stem, and vestibular nuclei. The connections with vestibular nuclei integrate changes in the direction of body movement and posture. The semicircular canals of the inner ear perceive these changes and transmit this information to the cerebellum via the vestibular nerve and the brain stem. Balance is maintained through modification of muscle tone. The cerebellum has no direct influence on lower motor neurons [48].

The cerebellum is also involved with predictively coordinating visual cues with bodily motion. For example, the cerebellum is the area of the brain responsible for processing how rapidly an object is approaching. The findings of an experiment on monkeys illustrate the value of this function. In this experiment, when the portion of the cerebellum involved in vision was removed, the monkey could not judge distance from a corridor wall and repeatedly charged into the wall [48].

Frontal Lobes

The frontal lobes of the brain are involved in mental, emotional, and physical functions. Anterior portions have a major role in the control of conscious and unconscious behaviors such as personality, social behavior, judgment, and complex intellectual activity. The central and posterior portions of the frontal lobes control motor function. The primary motor areas, located in precentral gyri, control voluntary movement via the pyramidal tracts. The premotor areas control and coordinate complex, learned movements such as typing, writing, scanning eye movements, conjugate deviation of the eyes, and movement of the head. These activities are affected via the extrapyramidal tracts. Pyramidal and extrapyramidal centers control movements of the opposite side of the body. The dominant frontal lobe also contains Broca's motor speech area [7,10].

Parietal Lobes

The parietal lobes interpret sensory input. The postcentral convolutions, organized similarly to the major motor strip, receive conscious sensory input. Sensations perceived on one side of the body are interpreted by the contralateral parietal lobe. Somatic sensations perceived include pain, temperature, touch, pressure, and proprioception. The parietal lobes contain the somatesthetic association areas, which lie in the superior portion of the lobes and extend to the medial surface of the hemisphere. Many other connections within the parietal lobe allow for interpretation of sensory input such as stereognosis (i.e., perceiving and understanding an object by touch and relating the sensations to experience and knowledge). Awareness of body parts and establishment of body image also take place here. The angular gyrus, located in the parietal lobe of the dominate hemisphere, is responsible for interpretation of written language [7,10].

Temporal Lobes

The temporal lobes receive input from three senses—hearing, taste, and smell—and have a role in memory processes. Association fibers, especially in the dominate lobe, allow the comparison of sensory input with past experiences. These fibers, particularly those of the dominant lobe, inter-relate somatesthetic visual and auditory stimuli to give them meaning. Wernicke's area, also located on the dominate side, is involved in the hearing component of speech and in the formulation of language [7,10].

Occipital Lobes

The occipital lobes contain the primary visual and visual association areas. The primary visual areas receive information and perceive color, while the visual association areas give visual input meaning and have a role in visual reflexes for fixing the eyes on a stationary or moving object. Injury to the medial surface on the dominate side can result in loss of the ability to recognize objects and know their function, although recognition of faces still is possible. A consequence of damage to the nondominant side may be the inability to recognize faces and differentiate various animals, such as horses and elephants [7,10].

Insula

The insula, thought by some to be a fifth lobe of the brain, lies deep within the lateral fissure, where it is covered by portions of the frontal, temporal, and parietal lobes. It is believed to be involved in visceral activities related to intra-abdominal sensations and visceral motility. Little information is available regarding function [7,10].

Limbic System

The limbic system consists of a group of structures, including the olfactory bulbs, septum pellucid, fornix, cingulate gyrus, parts of the basal ganglia (including the amygdaloidal nucleus), hippocampus, uncus, mammillary bodies, and various thalamic and hypothalamic nuclei. This system's multiple interconnections with brain structures influence behavior and responses to stimuli. For example, the sensory system, cerebral cortex, and limbic system are involved in the stimulation of visceral and somatic effectors, which results in psychologic expressions of behavior and emotions [7,10].

The limbic system influences memory, drives, motivation, visceral functions, and interactions with the environment. Emotional expressions believed to evolve from this complex group of structures include rage, placidity, fear, and attack reactions. Animal studies have demonstrated that the limbic system contains centers of reward and punishment, with both serving as important imitators of behavior and affecting memory. The hippocampus is thought to be involved in the transfer of short-term memory into long-term memory, especially with events related to elements perceived in the environment [25,26].

Amygdala

The amygdala is thought to have major responsibilities for the control of behavior in social and environmental circumstances. It is also believed to influence visceral responses to emotions and various movements related to posturing and eating [25,26].

Thalamus

The thalamus, a large ovoid gray mass, surrounds the third ventricle. Specific areas within the thalamus receive axons from the cord, brain stem, cerebellum, basal ganglia, and various parts of the cerebellum. These connections allow it to influence motor function and have a role in arousal, alerting mechanisms, and reflex movements [7,10].

The thalamus influences the motor cortex through its connections with the pyramidal tract neurons. It is involved with the initiation of movement, control of muscle tone, and regulation of cortical reflexes through connections with the cerebellum, globus pallidus, and substantia nigra. The thalamus interprets and relays sensory impulses from all parts of the body, except the olfactory nerve. Recognition of crude sensations, such as pain, temperature, and touch, also take place here. Sensory impulses that the thalamus is unable to interpret are relayed to appropriate primary sensory and association nuclei in the cerebral cortex. The thalamus is even involved in emotional responses—interpreting sensations as pleasant or unpleasant [7,10].

Hypothalamus

The hypothalamus, a small but important area of brain tissue situated just below the thalamus, plays a major role in the maintenance of many homeostatic functions. Numerous regulatory activities initiated here are affected through the pituitary gland and the autonomic nervous system. The pituitary gland, also known as the hypophysis, lies below the hypothalamus in the sella turcica. Hypothalamic nuclei influence pituitary gland function through neural and endocrine activity [45].

The hypothalamus receives input from all parts of the body. Autonomic nervous system activity is initiated in response to input received from areas within the thalamus, medulla oblongata, spinal cord, and limbic system. The influence of the hypothalamus in autonomic nervous system activity includes regulation of heart rate, blood pressure, and body temperature [45].

The limbic system, important in emotions and behavior, surrounds the hypothalamus and has connections with it. Hypothalamic connections with the thalamus, which interprets feelings of pleasantness and unpleasantness, and with the reticular activating system, which influences wakefulness, provide additional input to which the hypothalamus responds [45].

Many hypothalamic activities are initiated by changes in the perceived composition of its blood supply. For example, specific areas within the hypothalamus are sensitive to changes in water balance, glucose, and insulin levels. The hypothalamic response to an increase in osmotic pressure illustrates this sensitivity. With a loss of body fluid, the hypothalamus detects an increase in osmotic pressure. In response, it initiates the release of antidiuretic hormone by the posterior pituitary gland to concentrate the urine and stimulate the thirst center to increase the oral intake of fluid [45].

Other centers within the hypothalamus regulate appetite. Specific nuclei credited with the initiation of feeding behavior and satiety have been identified. These centers are reciprocal in their inhibition of one another. The hypothalamus also influences gastrointestinal function and sexual activity [45].

Speech Centers and Cerebral Hemisphere Specialization

About 95% of the population has speech centers in the left hemisphere of the cerebral cortex. In the remaining 5%, these centers are in the right hemisphere or (rarely) in both. There is a relation between the dominant hand and the hemisphere controlling speech; most right-handed persons' speech centers are in the left hemisphere, while left-handed person's speech centers tend to be in the right hemisphere. The term "cerebral dominance" refers to the hemisphere containing the speech centers. Two areas within the brain concerned with speech and language are Broca's motor speech area, located in the frontal lobe, and Wernicke's area, located in the superior posterior aspect of the temporal lobe [25,26].

Research has demonstrated that both hemispheres of the brain have many types of specialization in addition to speech. The dominate hemisphere appears to excel in mathematical calculation and logical analysis of problems, where the other hemisphere appears better able to understand complex visual patterns and spatial relations and to appreciate music. Development and effective use of these special skills require that the fibers connecting the hemisphere be intact [25,26].

Brain Stem

The brain stem, which lies between the diencephalon and the spinal cord, has three sections: the midbrain (superior portion), the pons (center portion), and the medulla oblongata. The medulla oblongata joins the spinal cord at the foramen magnum, located at the base of the skull. The brain stem contains many fiber tracts that transmit messages to and from the brain. It also serves as a relay station between the cerebellum and brain. Ten of the twelve cranial nerves located here function much like peripheral nerves (spinal nerves). With the exception of CN IV (the trochlear nerve), they are unlike peripheral nerves in that they only innervate tissues ipsilaterally (i.e., on the same side of the body) [7,10].

Brain Stem Function

Each of the structures of the brain stem has unique responsibilities, but the three function as a unit to serve as a conduit for impulses passing to and from the cerebral cortex and the spinal column. The midbrain, the uppermost portion of the brain stem, contains afferent and efferent nerve tracts that travel to and from the cerebral hemispheres. It also houses the red nucleus, which serves as a relay station for coordination of impulses traveling between the cerebellum and cerebral hemispheres, and the corpora quadrigemina, which are involved in reflex responses to visual stimuli and the relay of auditory impulses [25,26].

The pons sits between the midbrain and the medulla oblongata and anterior to the cerebellum. It contains nerve fiber tracts that provide communication between upper and lower levels of the CNS and the cerebellum. The lower third of the pons contains respiratory reflex centers influenced by the carbon dioxide levels of the blood and spinal fluid. The pons also influences vasomotor activity [25,26].

The medulla oblongata forms the inferior portion of the brain stem. The pyramids for the motor tracts are located on its ventral surface. Sensory tracts ascend through the medulla to the thalamus. Major reflex centers in the medulla influence respiratory and cardiovascular function [25,26].

THE SPINAL CORD

The spinal cord is continuous with the brain stem. It begins at the foramen magnum and descends through the vertebral canal to the level of the first or second lumbar vertebrae. Nerve roots known collectively as the cauda equina extend off the base of the spinal cord and travel for some distance before exiting at the appropriate intervertebral foramina [18].

The spinal cord contains neuronal cell bodies, ascending sensory tracts, and descending motor tracts. A cross-section of the cord shows a gray center shaped like an H surrounded by white fibers. The gray area is made up of neuronal cell bodies, internuncial neurons, neuroglial cells, and synapses. In the center of the gray matter lies the differential canal, each is continuous with the fourth ventricle. It may contain CSF but is often filled with cellular debris [18].

The white fiber area of the cord contains myelinated and unmyelinated fiber tracts, which transmit the many messages essential for maintenance of the body's complex functions. Both sensory and motor tracts are located on each side of the cord [18].

There are 31 pairs of spinal nerves, each numbered according to the level of the cord section from which it originates. There are 8 pairs of cervical nerves, 12 pairs of thoracic nerves, 5 pairs of lumbar nerves, 5 pairs of sacral nerves, and 1 pair of coccygeal nerves. The first pair of cervical nerves exits between the occipital bone and the first cervical vertebrae. Because there are eight cervical nerves and only seven cervical vertebrae, spinal lesions are identified according to the cord level rather than the vertebral level. Generally, each cord segment is named for the vertebral body below its exit point. Peripheral nerve trunks extend from anterior and posterior roots, which unite in the intervertebral foramina. Upon emerging from the vertebral foramina, they form mixed nerves, which divide into anterior and posterior branches and extend into the periphery. Also present are white rami, which contain autonomic nervous system fibers. The posterior rami divide into smaller nerves connected to the muscles and skin of the exterior surface of the head, neck, and trunk. Anterior rami (except for the thoracic nerves) divide to supply fibers to the skeletal muscle, skin of the extremities, and the anterior and lateral surfaces. Subdivisions of the anterior rami form three complex networks or plexuses: the cervical plexus, graphical plexus, and lumbosacral plexus. Smaller nerves emerge from these plexuses and continue to subdivide to innervate distal regions of the extremities [18].

Spinal Cord Function

The spinal cord is a conduit for messages to and from the higher levels within the CNS and participates in reflex motor activities. Descending pathways within the cord carry motor instructions to the anterior horn (ventral roots) from the cerebral cortex, brain stem, and cerebellum. Impulses synapse in the anterior horn (motor gray area) just before leaving the cord. This synaptic activity involves upper motor neurons, which are located within the cord, and lower motor neurons, which extend beyond the cord. Ascending (dorsal) roots transmit sensory impulses from the skin and viscera to the cord and CNS. Synaptic activity necessary for transmission for signals occurs at various levels within the cord. Dermatome charts provide a "map" of the area of skin supplied by the dorsal root to each spinal nerve [48].

Specific sensory and motor tracts have been identified within the spinal cord. These tracts, located in the white matter, are anterior, lateral, and posterior funiculi. These funiculi, further divided into tracts called fasciculi, carry similar types of nerve impulses to specific destinations [48].

THE AUTONOMIC NERVOUS SYSTEM

The autonomic nervous system comprises two efferent subsystems: the sympathetic and parasympathetic subsystems. Organs influenced by the autonomic nervous system are controlled by one of these two subsystems [18].

Sympathetic Nervous System

Sympathetic nervous system impulses are transmitted to the periphery by tracts of sympathetic fibers containing cell bodies and dendrites that extend with the intermediolateral gray horns of the spinal cord from thoracic spinal nerve 1 to lumbar spinal nerve 2. Because of its location, the sympathetic nervous system has been referred to as the thoracolumbar division. Axons leave the cord with the anterior roots of the thoracic and first four lumbar spinal nerves. After exiting, they quickly join the sympathetic trunk via white rami. The sympathetic trunks located on both sides of the cord extend from the second cervical vertebrae to the coccyx. The axons, upon entering the trunks, extend branches up and down the chain. The sympathetic nervous system preganglionic axons terminate on many postsynaptic ganglia present in organs [18].

Parasympathetic Nervous System

Cell bodies of the preganglionic neurons of the parasympathetic nervous system are located in two areas. The nuclei of CN III, VII, and X are located in the brain stem and the lateral gray columns of the sacral cord. In the sacral region, parasympathetic axons are present in spinal nerves. Because of these anatomic locations, the parasympathetic nervous system has been referred to as the craniosacral division [25,26].

THE RETICULAR ACTIVATING SYSTEM

The reticular activating system is composed of a diffuse system of neurons extending through the medulla, pons, midbrain, diencephalon, and cortex. Afferent and efferent connections also exist between the cerebellum and spinal cord [7,10].

The reticular activating system regulates spinal motor activity as well as voluntary and reflex muscle activity. Projections to the diencephalon and cortex effect and maintain arousal and alerting states. In addition to maintaining wakefulness, this system also participates in the regulation of sensory input from the periphery, regulation of respiration, and vasomotor activity [25,26].

MOTOR FUNCTION

Effective skeletal muscle function involves many components of the CNS and peripheral nervous system. Muscle function requires the perception and interpretation of sensory stimuli and an intact motor system to initiate and carry out muscle contraction. Areas of the CNS involved in motor function include the premotor cortex, the primary motor area, pyramidal and extrapyramidal tracts, basal ganglia, thalamus, brain stem, spinal cord, and cerebellum [48].

The premotor cortex (associative cortex), positioned just anterior to the major motor strip, is involved in muscle activities that produce hand skills, voluntary eye movements, eyelid blinking, and vocalization. To appreciate the complexity of the functions carried out by the premotor cortex, consider the many coordinated activities needed to speak. Speaking requires groups of muscles in the tongue, larynx, pharynx, and chest to contract and relax in carefully programmed sequences. Function of the premotor area requires intact connections with the sensory association areas of the parietal lobe, temporal lobe, frontal lobe, occipital lobe, components of the basal ganglia, primary motor cortex, thalamus, brain stem, and spinal cord [48].

The primary motor area is believed responsible for the initiation of movement by individual groups of muscles, such as those involved in the movement of the fingers, toes, and mouth. The cross section of the precentral gyrus illustrates specific areas of the primary motor area identified as initiating willed movement by various muscles. A large amount of gray matter is allocated to muscle groups involved in complex movements of the hands and mouth [48].

Nerve cells of the major motor strip and their conducting fibers make up the pyramidal (corticospinal) motor system. Nerve fibers descend from the motor strip through the internal capsule, midbrain, and pons to the medulla oblongata, where the pyramidal fibers cross. After crossing, the fibers descend in the spinal cord to appropriate levels. Most pyramidal fibers descend via the lateral corticospinal tracts to ventral horns of gray matter in the cord. Some motor fiber travel via ventral corticospinal tracts [48].

Extrapyramidal motor tracts are most complex in their arrangement and synaptic activity in the cerebrum and brain stem. A functional (rather than anatomic) unit, extrapyramidal tracts are involved in maintaining balance and posture by facilitating some muscle movements and inhibiting others. Movements initiated in one hemisphere influence movements on the opposite side of the body. The basal ganglia are part of the extrapyramidal tract. In addition, the thalamus, subthalamus, substantial nigra, and red nucleus have roles in motor function. Multiple connections exist among all of these areas. A second pathway allows for feedback control of extrapyramidal motor activity [48].

The basal ganglia have three motor functions. A major responsibility of the basal ganglia as a whole is believed to be the inhibition of postural muscle tone. The caudate nucleus and putamen, collectively referred to as the striate body, are thought to initiate and regulate gross intention movements such as body posture and major arm movements. This regulation involves pyramidal and extrapyramidal pathways. The globus pallidus is believed to provide background muscle tone for intended movements initiated by the striate body or the cerebral cortex (e.g., the muscle contractions needed to support the arm and trunk while using a tennis racket) [48].

Final pathways for extrapyramidal signals into the cord are the reticulospinal tracts that lie in other ventral and lateral tracts of the cord. Also involved in transmission to a lesser degree are the rubrospinal, tectospinal, vestibulospinal, and possibly olivospinal tracts [48].

3. PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE CNS

Understanding the complex capabilities of the nervous system allows for an appreciation of the system's means of protection and maintenance. Recognizing the safeguards of the bony cranial vault and vertebral column is easy. Less obvious but also valuable is the protection provided by the hair, skin, scalp, fascia, muscle, meninges, fluid cushioning, and complex vascular supply. The superficial structures help to limit injuries from external trauma, and the ventricular and vascular systems provide a reinforcement for optimal neuronal function [56].

The meninges in the cranial vault and vertebral column protect the CNS from physical harm and support the CSF system and circulation. The dura mater, the outermost layer of meninges, forms a double layer over the brain tissue. Its outer layer is an inner periosteal lining for the skull and vertebral canal. In the cranium, the inner layer of dura, for the most part fused with the outer layer, helps to secure the brain to the cranial vault. To provide extra support and protection, the inner layer of dura separates in areas, dipping down between the longitudinal fissures, between the cerebellar hemispheres, and passing over the pituitary glands nestled in the sella turcica. In other areas, dura layers separate to form venous sinuses that collect and carry venous blood away from the brain. Arachnoid processes (villi) project into the dural sinuses [56].

In the spinal cord, the inner layer of dura is continuous with the spinal dura mater. The spinal dura extends to the second sacral vertebrae, where it joins with the external filum terminal and attaches to the back of the first segment of the coccyx. The middle layer of the meninges, the arachnoid, is a thin, fibrous membrane that adheres closely to the inner surface of the dura, allowing only a narrow space between the two. The inner layer of the meninges, the pia mater, adheres so closely to the brain that it follows the contour of the fissures and sulci. The space between the pia mater and arachnoid is bridged with weblike strands of arachnoid called trabeculae. A rich network of pia blood vessels extends into the brain. The area between the arachnoid and pia mater is called the subarachnoid space. Located here are arteries, veins, arachnoid trabeculae, and CSF. Within the spinal cord, fibrous bridges join the pia mater with the arachnoid and dura mater. These bridges, known as denticulate ligaments, help to stabilize the cord within the spinal canal [56].

THE CEREBROSPINAL FLUID SYSTEM

The CSF protects the brain and spinal cord by supporting the tissues, acting as a shock absorber, and serving as a medium for the transfer of elements from the bloodstream to nervous system tissues. CSF flows through the elaborate ventricular system in the brain and through the subarachnoid space surrounding the brain and spinal cord. Two large ventricles are positioned in each cerebral hemisphere. Their central portions extend in the parietal lobes. The anterior horns extend into the temporal lobes, and the posterior horns project into the occipital lobes. A small third ventricle lies below and communicates with each lateral ventricle via a small channel known as the foramen of Monro. The thalamus forms the lateral walls of the third ventricle. The third ventricle is connected via the cerebral aqueduct to the fourth ventricle, which lies below. The pons and medulla are positioned below the fourth ventricle. The cerebellum lies above [56].

CSF flows from the ventricular system to the arachnoid space of the brain and spinal cord by way of the lateral aperture (foramina of Luschka) and the medial aperture (foramen of Magendie). CSF is constantly being produced by capillary tufts called choroid plexuses, located in the ventricles. Arachnoid villi, projecting into the dural sinuses, provide routes for the reabsorption of CSF into the venous circulation [56].

THE BLOOD-BRAIN BARRIER

The blood-brain barrier theory stems from observations that only water, oxygen, carbon dioxide, and alcohol can readily enter or leave the capillaries of the CNS. Large molecules penetrate slowly through special systems or not at all. This protective barrier is believed to prevent sudden, extreme fluctuations in the composition of CNS tissue fluid while allowing nutrients to pass. The blood-brain barrier is thought to be formed within the capillaries by a continuous layer of endothelial cells connected by tight junctions, with a basement membrane surrounding the endothelium. Astrocytes that lie in close apposition are not considered part of this barrier [25,26].

The blood-brain barrier protects most of the brain and cord tissue. Exceptions include the pineal body and the posterior lobe of the hypophysis, which are believed to be nourished by vessels with fenestrated endothelia that provide specific sites for the transfer of proteins and solutes irrespective of molecular size and lipid solubility. Tight junctions at the intracellular clefts of the choroid epithelium serve as the blood-CSF barrier in the vascular choroid plexuses of the CSF system [25,26].

4. CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM CIRCULATION

The viability and functioning of the CNS depends on a rich and continuous blood supply. The brain utilizes approximately 20% of the body's oxygen supply and requires about 400 kcal of glucose per day. The average cerebral blood flow is about 750 mL per minute [56].

The external carotid arteries supply the scalp and parts of the head and neck. Secondary branches of the external carotids (the middle meningeal arteries) supply blood to the meninges of the brain. The right and left internal carotid arteries, after passing through the carotid canals, branch into the anterior cerebral arteries and middle cerebral arteries at the level of the optic chiasm. The right and left anterior cerebral arteries are connected by the small anterior communicating artery to form the anterior portion of the circle of Willis. Anterior cerebral arteries perfuse the caudate and putamen nuclei of the basal ganglia, the corpus callosum, and portions of the internal capsule and frontal and adrenal lobes. The middle cerebral arteries are the major supplier of blood to the precentral and postcentral gyri and feed portions of the temporal, parietal, and frontal lobes [56].

The vertebral arteries, whose source is the subclavian artery, travel to the brain via the foramina of the cervical vertebrae and the foramen magnum. Posterior communicating arteries extending back from the internal carotid arteries complete the anastomosis with the posterior cerebral arteries to form the circle of Willis. This anastomosis, intended to maintain circulation to the brain tissue if one of the vessels closes, is not always functional. Other vessels providing collateral circulation are vessels at the base of the brain; small pial anastomotic branches on the surface; external carotids to the eyes; and anterior, middle, and posterior cerebral anastomoses on the surface of the brain [56].

Passage of venous blood from surface and deep brain tissue takes place via thick veins lacking valves. The blood flows into the dural sinuses and then drains into the internal jugular veins. The superior sagittal sinus serves as a major route for the removal of the constantly forming CSF. The cavernous sinus drains blood from the eye, orbit, and face, while the transverse sinus lies close to the ear [56].

REGULATION OF CEREBRAL BLOOD FLOW

Control of blood flow in the CNS is essential for viability and optional function. The body has several built-in mechanisms to maintain effective circulation.

Three major factors that have a direct and potent effect on cerebral blood flow are elevations in concentrations of carbon dioxide, hydrogen ions, and oxygen. The increase in hydrogen ion concentration causes vasodilation of the cerebral vessels. Vasomotor reflex response that affects the body's general vascular perfusion also affects the perfusion of blood in the CNS. Vasomotor centers in the pons and medulla maintain vascular tone through impulses transmitted via the spinal cord to all blood vessels in the body. The reticular areas of the brain stem and hypothalamus have both excitatory and inhibitory effects on vasomotor activity. The hypothalamus also influences vasoconstriction activity through excitatory or inhibitory action on the vasomotor centers. It also helps to regulate total body water (and therefore blood pressure) by increasing or decreasing the release of antidiuretic hormone [56].

A severe drop in blood pressure to 50 mm Hg or less will result in ischemia in the vasomotor center. The resulting local increase in concentration of carbon dioxide causes a profound stimulation of the sympathetic nervous system, which initiates the constriction of blood vessels—some to the point of occlusion. This response, meant to shunt blood to the CNS, is known as the ischemic response [56].

Cushing phenomenon occurs when an increase in pressure in the CSF system equals the pressure in the cerebral vascular bed, hampering the flow of blood to the brain. At this point, the CNS ischemic response is initiated to raise the CNS blood pressure above the CSF pressure and facilitate blood flow to the brain [56].

SPINAL CORD CIRCULATION

As noted, multiple arteries feed the spinal cord. The vessels join, forming a complex network that supplies the vertebrae, periosteum, and dura. Branches supply the ventral and dorsal roots and penetrate deeply into the cord. Anterior and posterior spinal arteries extending the length of the cord originate from the carotid and vertebral arteries [56].

There are no valves in this venous network. As a result, blood flow varies depending on pressure. With elevation of intra-abdominal pressure, venous blood from the pelvic plexus passes into the vertebral venous channels. If the jugular vein is occluded, blood from the skull can drain via the vertebral channels. This venous plexus is believed to provide potential routes for metastasis of neoplasms [56].

5. PATHOPHYSIOLOGIC INFLUENCES AND EFFECTS

The CNS's complex structure and diverse functions predispose it to a multitude of pathologies, each capable of causing varying types and degrees of dysfunction. The protective structures and mechanisms are obviously not fail-proof. In fact, these structures often produce or contribute to nervous system trauma. The rigid skull and vertebral column allow little room for neuronal swelling, tumor growth, or circulatory congestion. Trauma may also occur when external forces drive the nervous tissue against the inside of the bony structures. Fractures and bony degenerative processes can perforate or crush neurons or supportive tissues [72].

The elaborate CSF system, designed to support and cushion the CNS, is subject to localized or generalized buildup if reabsorption is impeded. This extensive fluid system also provides routes for the spread of infection. Foramina of the skull and vertebral column, serving as avenues for the passage of blood vessels and nerves traveling to and from the periphery, also provide routes for micro-organisms into the CNS [72].

Meningeal tissues also present hazards as well as protection. With increases in intracranial pressure (ICP), herniation of brain tissue through the tentorial notch formed by the tough dura can seriously injure the brain stem and surrounding tissues. The dura mater, pia mater, and arachnoid fissures also provide extensive, uninterrupted routes for the spread of infection [72].

The CNS's circulatory bed, so important in providing nourishment, provides routes for migrating micro-organisms and metastases from other parts of the body. Additional risks include an increase in ICP from hemorrhage and/or abnormal vascular structures, such as arteriovenous malformations or reflex vasodilation in response to hypoxia [72].

The neurons, nerves, and nerve tracts, with their long communication chains and multiple connections required for effective afferent and efferent activity, form the most complex part of the nervous system. Because they are present throughout the body, these structures are vulnerable to many pathologic elements, including alterations in the biochemical environmental, structural damage from disease, degeneration of the myelin sheath, trauma, and neurotransmitter abnormality [72].

Various pathologic changes can damage any or many of the components of the nervous system. Diagnosis of the cause or area affected is often difficult because of the inter-relationships of structures and their dependence on nerve fibers and neurotransmitters to carry signals to organs outside the CNS. Each component of a system and its innervated organs may be the cause of a particular symptom or deficit [72].

Nervous system damage often produces complex physical and mental disabilities. A stroke, for example, may produce spasticity rather than flaccid limbs. This spasticity can result in severe positioning problems and contractures. Personality changes can occur from physical deficits produced by the stroke or from psychologic stressors stemming from the disability [72].

INFLAMMATION AND INFECTIOUS PROCESSES

Inflammatory processes affecting nervous tissue alter the metabolism and thus the tissue's nutritional immune processes. Causes of CNS inflammation include trauma, lumbar punctures, and infectious processes, such as meningitis.

Inflammatory processes are known to attack the spinal cord's gray matter. Inflammation can occur in response to acute infections or can be part of a primary infectious process, such as poliomyelitis. These inflammatory processes can cause necrosis, emboli, or thrombotic complications. Sensory and motor deficits may result [72]. In herpes zoster (shingles), an acute unilateral and segmental inflammation of the dorsal root ganglia produces localized vesicular lesions, confined to one dermatome. Severe pain is experienced in the peripheral areas innervated by the inflamed ganglia [72].

TRAUMA, TUMORS, AND COMPRESSION

Trauma to the nervous system may result from external forces or elements in the nervous system. The skull and vertebral bodies can make it difficult to discover, locate, and assess trauma or physical changes. Symptoms indicating progressing damage may be subtle or lacking until the condition is too advanced to treat effectively [72].

At times, the system's response to the trauma causes more damage than the insult itself. This secondary damage occurs when edema, bleeding, and/or increased ICP destroy nervous tissue by compression or restriction of circulation. Edema results from trauma associated with contusions and lacerations, injury to capillary walls, or hematomas or tumors that obstruct venous blood outflow. Obstruction causes the blood to back up and fluid to move out of the capillaries. Expanding tumors cause an increase in ICP and edema, but they may also cause bleeding by damaging vessels. All of these elements carry the hazard of herniation through the tentorial notch or foramen magnum [72].

Spinal injuries may cause many of the same problems as cranial injuries, but the complexity of the vertebral column's structure and the concentration of neural tracts at all levels of the cord present special concerns. Injuries to the spinal cord are more common in areas of greater mobility, such as at the lower cervical spine (C4 through C7 and T1) and at the lumbar juncture (T12, L1, and L2). Vertebral injuries can cause compression of nerve roots by bone, ligaments, extruded disk material, hematomas, or disruption or overstretching of the neural tissue. Edema caused by trauma can compromise cord function [72].

DEGENERATIVE PROCESSES

Many nervous system diseases can be categorized as degenerative. Their causes vary, as do their severity and influence on lifestyle. For example, progressive muscular atrophy follows degeneration of lower motor neurons in the spinal cord that inhibits impulses that trigger muscle contraction. The upper motor neuron degeneration associated with amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS) leads to impaired speech, chewing, swallowing, and breathing [72].

HEREDITARY AND CONGENITAL DISEASES

Hereditary diseases result from conferred genetic errors that affect development, maturation, and/or aging. These illnesses present varying degrees of risk to offspring both in the threat of developing the disease and carrying it on to another generation. For example, Huntington chorea is transmitted as an autosomal dominate trait, with each child born of a parent with this trait having a 50% chance of developing the disease [72].

Congenital defects causing CNS abnormalities or malfunctions may occur alone or in combination. Causes include a hereditary tendency, intrinsic factors (e.g., inadequate circulation for the embryo), and in-utero exposures to infectious diseases (e.g., rubella) [72].

6. RELATED SYSTEM INFLUENCES AND EFFECTS

As discussed, the CNS orchestrates activities to maintain body functions and homeostasis. Each major system has a role in maintaining homeostatic activity through the regulation of the body's biochemical environment. Alteration in system functions by disease or trauma can result in abnormal neuronal activity or tissue destruction within the CNS. For example, effective pumping by the heart is essential to nourish the CNS and remove waste. Along with the respiratory system, the cardiovascular system provides the oxygen necessary for function. Failure of these systems quickly results in neuronal death [2,3].

The kidneys serve several functions to support the nervous system. They participate in the maintenance of blood pressure and in fluid, electrolyte, and acid-base balance. They also contribute to ensuring an adequate oxygen supply through the manufacture of erythropoietin, the hormone that stimulates the production of oxygen-carrying red blood cells [2,3].

Gastrointestinal absorption maintains an adequate nutritional level of food elements, vitamins, and minerals. The liver also helps by ensuring an effective level of blood glucose and other nutrients and provides detoxification of drugs and other foreign substances [2,3].

The endocrine system, which has multiple roles in the regulation of body function, influences metabolism, heart rate, water balance, and mental function. Pathology in this system can cause a variety of neurologic abnormalities or deficits [2,3].

7. PSYCHOSOCIAL/LIFESTYLE INFLUENCES AND EFFECTS

Bodily changes with aging are the result of alterations in effector tissues, receptor systems, and impairment of the body's homeostatic regulatory system. There is also a gradual decline in activities requiring rapid sensory and motor coordination. Isometric muscle strength usually peaks at about 18 years of age and is maintained through the fifth decade, after which there is a gradual decline related to a decrease in number of muscle fibers and muscle atrophy [4,27].

Although some changes in muscle mass occur in all aging persons, epidemiologic studies indicate that physical exercise contributes to longevity by decreasing the incidence of heart disease. Exercise may reverse or delay age-related changes in synaptic function and nerve-conduction velocity. Physical training in the elderly has been found to improve heart rate, cardiac output, blood pressure, and joint mobility and to decrease stiffness, although it does not improve pulmonary function [4,27].

Intellectual performance, as measured by vocabulary and information comprehension, peaks between 20 and 30 years of age and is maintained through life or until the mid-70s, in the absence of disease. As with physical activity, individuals who continue to be active mentally can perform better than those who do not. However, the speed of central processing for mental functioning is impaired with age [4,27].

The loss of vibratory perception in the lower extremities usually begins at about 50 years of age. Touch becomes significantly diminished due to skin changes and a decrease in the number of sensory receptors. This fact may be particularly significant to nurses during neurologic assessment. Corneal sensitivity, an accurate measurement of sensory perception, shows a decrease with age. Visual, auditory, gustatory, and olfactory senses are also diminished [4,27].

Cortical size and blood flow decrease over time. Brain weight peaks in the early 20s and then slowly declines. Along with the weight loss, the cortical area is reduced, with a broadening of sulci and a flattening of gyri. Cerebral blood flow in healthy adults is about 50–60 mL per minute per 100 g of tissue. (The base requirement for normal cortical function is about 40 mL per minute per 100 g tissue.) Between 30 and 70 years of age, the rate of cerebral blood flow decreases by approximately 20%. Alterations in blood flow from atherosclerosis, structural changes, and heart disease can easily decrease the oxygen supply, compromising neuronal function [4,27].

Changes in autonomic nervous system function in the elderly can be seen in the deterioration of pupillary, cardiovascular, thermal, and secretory functions. It is not clear whether these changes are the result of peripheral or CNS changes [4,27].

The elderly face the threat of altered homeostasis due to health problems unrelated to neurologic pathology. If an imbalance occurs in any other system, the nervous system can be affected. Even psychologic reactions to stress can alter neurologic function [4,27].

8. THE NURSING PROCESS FOR PATIENTS WITH CNS DYSFUNCTION

The pervasive influence of the CNS on mental and physical functions often complicates the analysis of neurologic symptoms. Identification of nervous system pathology can be difficult, because symptoms are often far removed from the source. For example, a cerebrovascular accident (CVA) can result in weakness in a lower extremity. Furthermore, similar symptoms and signs among some diseases of the CNS can confound diagnosis; for example, increased ICP can be a symptom of subarachnoid hemorrhage, stroke, or hydrocephalus [30,40].

SUBJECTIVE DATA

Collection of subjective data from patients with CNS diseases can be difficult, because the disease often compromises the patient's ability to provide reliable information. In some instances, the patient will be unresponsive, unconscious, or unreliable as a historian. In these cases, family members, friends, or persons who were present when the problem arose should be consulted [30,40].

The fear or apprehension that often accompanies diagnosis of neurologic disease can also limit patient disclosure. A review of the patient's long-term and recent health history is essential, because, as discussed, neurologic problems can result from diseases affecting other systems (e.g., peripheral neuropathy resulting from diabetes). Neurologic problems may also be misdiagnosed as psychiatric diseases. A variety of psychiatric and other health problems should be part of differential diagnosis, and comorbidities should be considered in planning treatment or care. For example, diet, pharmacotherapy, and intravenous therapy are more complex if a patient with neurologic dysfunction also has diabetes, cirrhosis, or renal disease [30,40].

Head and Neck

Patient symptoms related to the head and neck should be carefully reviewed during the history of the present illness. Headaches are common in a variety of health problems, including stress, tumors, meningitis, or one of the many diseases causing increased ICP. Ear infections can spread into the brain via adjacent blood vessels and the mastoid bone of the skull. Infections of the scalp, paranasal sinuses, and the nasopharynx also present the risk of meningitis or encephalitis because of their proximity to venous sinuses, blood vessels, and foramina [30,40].

Reported hearing loss may be the result of a conduction problem or of damage to CN VIII or cortical tissue. The patient should be asked about tinnitus (i.e., ringing or buzzing in the ears). Dizziness and vertigo are significant symptoms of tumors or degenerative changes in the vestibular branch of CN VIII, the brain stem, or the cerebellum [30,40].

Uncontrolled head movements may be indicative of Parkinson disease, other extrapyramidal disease processes, or multiple sclerosis. A partial loss of motor function of the face can be the result of Bell palsy, CVA, or pathology affecting the nuclei of the brain stem. Loss of smell from insult to the olfactory bulbs or tracts can be related to shearing trauma, orbital fractures, or tumors; it may also be an early sign of Parkinson disease. Diseases causing visual changes include multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, stroke, tumors, and trauma [30,40].

Bowel and Bladder

Bowel and bladder function is controlled by various components of the autonomic nervous system. For patients with known or suspected CNS deficits, it is important to thoroughly review symptoms such as constipation, urinary retention, and fecal and urinary incontinence. Symptoms of ataxia (i.e., lack of muscle coordination) should raise concern about degeneration of the posterior tracts of the spinal cord or cerebellar dysfunction. Spasticity of muscles occurs with CVA and multiple sclerosis. In contrast, flaccidity (i.e., decreased or absent muscle tone) can result from isolation of muscles from neuronal impulses. Fasciculations—fine, rapid, twitching movements originating in small groups of muscle fibers—are often present in patients with ALS [30,40].

Motor Function

Changes in motor function are often unique to a disease process. Inquiry into changes in motor function should include thorough questioning about localized or generalized weakness. Asking specifically about difficulty arising from or turning in bed; flopping of ankles during walking; difficulty in lifting legs to go up and down steps or lifting objects; or problems keeping eyes open will help patients explain their symptoms better [30,40].

As noted, ataxia may signal degeneration of the posterior tracts of the spinal cord or cerebellar dysfunction. Plasticity of muscles may occur with CVA or multiple sclerosis, which releases muscles from upper motor neuron control. In contrast, flaccidity can result from isolation of muscles from neuronal impulses [30,40]. Twitching of the trapezius muscle may occur with lesions in the nucleus of CN XI [30,40].

Reports of other abnormal movements include spasm of a muscle or muscle groups (myoclonus), as in Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, dyskinesias, athetosis (i.e., slow, twisting, snakelike movements in the upper extremities), and dystonia (i.e., intense, irregular torsion and muscle spasms). Movement disorders can result from antipsychotic medications, such as chlorpromazine and haloperidol, or from Huntington chorea [30,40].

Sensory Function

Diseases of the spinal cord's sensory tracts can alter or even prevent transmission of stimuli to the brain for interpretation. Symptoms of this pathology include numbness, tingling, pain, increased or decreased sensitivity to touch, and alteration in perception of cold and heat. Sharp, lightning-like root pain occurs with lesions of the dorsal roots of the spinal nerves. This pain may result from ruptured disks, cord tumors, fractures, inflammatory diseases of the vertebrae, or meningitis [30,40].

OBJECTIVE DATA

A thorough neurologic assessment of patients with probable CNS disease is important initially and often throughout the nurse-patient interaction. Comprehensive baseline data assist in effective evaluation of the patient's changing status. In addition to the formal assessment, frequent contact with the patient during treatment and activities of daily living allows for closer observation [30,40].

Physical Assessment

The patient's mental status is an important component of the neurologic assessment, providing valuable insights into the cause of disease and its effect on the body. Determination of level of consciousness is often used to evaluate improvement or decline of health status in patients with traumatic brain injury or tumors [30,40,41].

Assessment of level of consciousness begins with noting the degree of alertness. Is the patient awake and alert? If sleeping, is the patient aroused by verbal stimuli or tactile stimulation, such as touch or gentle shaking, or does the patient respond only to noxious stimuli? After arousal, is alertness maintained after the stimulus is removed? Does the patient appear drowsy, restless, irritable, or combative? The patient should be questioned regarding time, place, person, and self. If the patient is becoming disoriented, awareness of time will usually be lost first, then place, then person, and last self. Inappropriate responses to such questioning may not necessarily indicate mental dysfunction. The patient may fail to respond appropriately because of a language barrier, impaired hearing or vision, or some degree of expressive or receptive dysphasia. Patients who have undergone trauma may be confused about time or place because of a period of unconsciousness or the rapidity of events. The patient transferred from another hospital or even from another unit may have trouble keeping up with the changes. This is especially true of the elderly [11,41].

The patient should also be asked to follow simple commands, such as "squeeze my hand," "hold up your arm," or "wiggle your toes." The response permits assessment of motor and mental function. If the patient does not respond to verbal or tactile stimulation, noxious or painful stimulus may be required. As a general rule, the least invasive/painful but effective stimulus should be used. Even in unconscious patients, noxious stimuli may cause a precipitous rise in blood pressure [11,41].

Charting should include the stimulus used as well as a description of the patient's response to it. Responses are casually classified as appropriate, inappropriate, or absent. In an appropriate response, the patient localizes the unpleasant stimulus and attempts to withdraw from it or push it away. An inappropriate response involves random or purposeless movements and decerebrate or decorticate posturing. In extreme situations, no response can be elicited and the patient remains flaccid. Because subtle changes in level of consciousness can be significant, precise documentation and clear communication are essential. Avoid words like "confused," "stuporous," and "comatose." Instead, describe the patient's behavior, what is said, and what can or cannot be done. At change of shift, it may be especially beneficial for the nurse coming on duty and the nurse reporting off duty to do an assessment together. In this way, the nurse about to assume responsibility for the patient has a clearer picture of the patient's condition and subtle/minor but significant changes are less likely to be missed or misinterpreted [11,41].

The Glasgow Coma Scale is an objective measure of level of consciousness that can also be somewhat predictive of recovery. Eye, motor, and verbal responses are measured. Coma is defined as a score of 7 or less. With a score of 3 or 4, there is an 85% chance of dying or remaining vegetative. A score greater than 11 is associated with an 85% chance of moderate disability or good recovery. Response to pain is also significant in determining the prognosis [11,41].

Station and Gait

Observation of the patient's station (i.e., manner of standing) and gait can provide useful insight. A decortication response is indicative of cortical damage, and unusual gait, stance, or settling posture can result from motor or sensory deficits. With decorticate posturing, the patient demonstrators hyperflexion of the upper extremities and hyperextension of the lower extremities. With decerebrate posturing, both the upper and lower extremities are hyperextended. This response indicates brain-stem injury [11,41]. Postures can also be influenced by mental and physical problems.

Meningeal Irritation

Assessment for nuchal rigidity, Kernig sign, and Brudzinski sign aid in diagnosing meningeal irritation associated with meningitis or subarachnoid hemorrhage. In nuchal rigidity, neck flexion is limited by involuntary muscle spasm and the patient is unable to place the chin on the chest [41].

To test for Kernig and Brudzinski signs, the patient is in the supine position. For Kernig sign, one hip is flexed to 90o with the knee also flexed to 90o. If meningeal irritation is present, the patient in this position will be unable to extend the knee past 90o without pain. To test for Brudzinski sign, the patient is supine with the legs extended. When the examiner flexes the patient's neck, the hips and knees will spontaneously flex to avoid the accompanying pain if meningeal irritability is present [41].

DIAGNOSTIC STUDIES

As discussed, diagnosis is often complicated because the CNS is contained within the skull and vertebral canal. For this reason, most diagnostic studies for neurologic disease are invasive. Careful patient preparation is necessary for all diagnostic studies. The invasiveness of neurologic tests and the consequences of misdiagnosis increase the importance of patient teaching and nursing care before and after studies are conducted [5,6,8].

Most laboratory studies specific for assessment of neurologic function are based on the contents of the CSF or its pressure within the CNS. Other laboratory studies, such as analysis of blood samples, are used to determine whether malfunction of other body systems is compromising CNS function. For example, serum iron and hemoglobin tests can help determine if anemia is reducing the brain's oxygen supply and altering CNS function [5,6,8].

X-Rays

X-rays of the skull are used as a basic, noninvasive screening for patients with suspected trauma or neoplasm. They can also reveal pathologic changes, such as pituitary gland tumors, and detect calcified abnormalities or abnormal position of the calcified pineal gland [5,6,8].

Spinal radiography may reveal changes in spinal bones resulting from fractures, tumors, or infections. It may also show the bony ridges and spur formations characteristic of osteoarthritis and help to identify congenital defects [5,6,8]

Nursing Implications

Before x-rays are taken, the purpose of the procedure and the systems involved should be explained to the patient. Tangled or braided hair is combed, and pins and wigs are removed. Ocular prostheses can produce confusing shadows in a radiograph, so their presence should be noted [17].

Electroencephalography

Electroencephalography (EEG) is essentially a noninvasive test that records a portion of the brain's electrical activity. The EEG is valued for its ability to reveal abnormal brain-wave patterns that help in diagnosing seizure disorders, brain tumors, abscesses, and psychiatric disorders. Diagnosis is made by evaluating patterns and characteristics of brain waves recorded, along with the patient's clinical state. An absence of brain waves generally establishes brain death; however, acute drug intoxication or severe hypothermia can also cause a flat EEG [5,6,8]

To conduct an EEG, the patient is placed in a bed or on a lounge chair in a quiet, secluded area. Surface electrodes, or occasionally needle electrodes, are positioned on or in the scalp. The patient is instructed to close his or her eyes, relax, and rest quietly. Various stimuli are introduced to determine whether seizure activity can be produced. The patient may be asked to hyperventilate for three minutes, to watch a flashing light, to endure a sensory stimulus (e.g., a minor electrical shock), to observe a back-and-white checkerboard image, and/or to listen to sounds through earphones. The patient is observed carefully and protected if seizure activity occurs. If a sleep EEG is requested, the patient will be instructed to stay awake the night before the test. Medication may be administered to promote sleep [5,6,8].

Nursing Implications

Patients scheduled for EEG should be instructed to eat meals as usual, with the exception of coffee, tea, cocoa, and cola, which may be withheld because of their stimulant effects. Medications that may influence the test are often withheld, including anticonvulsants, tranquilizers, barbiturates, or sedatives. Hair should be clean and free from oils, sprays, or pins [17]

An explanation of the procedure and its purpose, the function of the electrodes, and the length of the test will help the patient relax. The test usually takes 40 to 60 minutes, with pretest and post-test care taking another hour. Following test completion, patients may require assistance removing electrode paste from their hair. During this time, it is important to observe for seizures and recovery from sedation, if given during the test. Vital signs and neurologic signs are also assessed, as appropriate [17]. The physician's order for resumption of medications should be reviewed with the patient.

Computed Tomography

Computed tomography (CT) is used to diagnose intracranial locations of hemorrhage and spinal cord lesions. Scans are also used to monitor the effects of surgery, radiotherapy, or chemotherapy and to reveal vascular displacement, hematomas, cerebral atrophy, infarction, edema, and hydrocephalus. An iodinated contrast dye may be administered to make large blood vessels visible or to define lesions. Administered intravenously, the dye increases the blood density and delineates intracranial masses [5,6,8].

Nursing Implications

Before a CT is done, the purpose of the procedure should be explained to the patient. If no contrast medium is used, restriction of food and drink is not necessary. If dye is used, the patient should fast for four to six hours to prevent emesis if nausea occurs. Before administering a contrast dye, any allergies to shellfish, iodine, or contrast media should be identified, as dye may be contraindicated in these patients. Skin testing to determine allergy may be indicated [17].

Patients benefit from a knowledge of the details of the procedure, including special positioning, noise emitted by the machine, and length of test. Some machines require the patient to be strapped to the table, which moves into a gantry during the test. The test takes 15 to 30 minutes if no dye is used; with dye, the time is doubled. Patients receiving the dye should know that it is normal to feel flushed and warm and that sometimes a headache, salty taste, or nausea occurs [17].

Positron Emission Tomography

Positron emission tomography (PET) is a noninvasive nuclear-imaging technique available in large medical centers. It is used to study oxygen uptake, blood flow, and glucose utilization in patients with cerebrovascular disease, seizure disorders, cardiovascular disease, and some degenerative disorders. With PET, viable tissue can be discriminated from nonviable tissue and the amount of nutritional blood flow to an area can be identified. PET is often combined with CT [5,6,8].

Magnetic Resonance Imaging

Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) is possible because hydrogen nuclei in abnormal tissues behave differently in a magnetic field. A computer can manipulate these differences into a detailed picture of the organ under study. This noninvasive study does not require contrast media or exposure to radiation. The patient lies supine in a large magnet. Loud clacking or knocking noises are normally emitted during this time. Bone tissue is not visualized with MRI, but soft tissue close to bone is easily viewed, making MRI useful for assessing problems of the skull and spine [5,6,8]. Patients should be instructed to remove all jewelry and to avoid make-up or nail polish.

Radionuclide Scan of the Brain

A radionuclide scan detects intracranial masses, vascular lesions, and areas of ischemia, infarction, and hemorrhage. A radionuclide, usually administered intravenously, accumulates in affected areas if the blood-brain barrier has been compromised. Oral or intra-arterial administration can also be used. Some scans also include oscilloscope scanning of the carotid and cerebral blood flow. After the radioactive isotope has circulated for at least one hour, a scanner records the accumulation of isotopes. Another scan can be done three to four hours after injection [5,6,8].

Nursing Implications

Allergies to the isotope should be assessed prior to a radionuclide scan. No dietary or fluid restrictions are required. Potassium perchlorate may be given to block uptake of the isotope by the thyroid, choroid plexus, and salivary glands. Patient education should include the steps of the procedure, the time requirement, and the fact that the injection will be the only discomfort. All jewelry and metal objects should be removed. To prevent patient apprehension, explain that the radioisotope is harmless to self and others and is quickly excreted from the body. This test is often combined with CT and angiography to help confirm the diagnosis [17].

Cerebral Angiography

Cerebral angiography (also referred to as intra-arterial digital subtraction angiography) is used to diagnose intracranial lesions. With this approach, a radiopaque contrast medium is injected into blood vessels of the head and neck to allow visualization of intracranial and extracranial vessels on x-ray. Cerebral angiography can reveal aneurysms, arteriovenous malformations, and displacement of vessels by masses, edema, or herniation. The test is also used during surgery to check the position and integrity of aneurysm clips [5,6,8].

Contrast material used with cerebral angiography can be injected into a variety of sites. The most common are the carotid, brachial, and femoral arteries. Catheters are often used to facilitate access. Injection is done under local or general anesthesia in the operating room or in a special procedures area where resuscitation equipment is available. This test is contraindicated in patients with renal, hepatic, thyroid, or clotting disorders as well as in those who are hypersensitive to iodine or contrast materials [5,6,8].

Nursing Implications

Patient education includes a review of the procedure's purpose. The risks of the test should be explained, including CVA, thrombus, allergic reactions, seizures, pulmonary emboli, and visual disturbances. Informed consent forms should be signed. To reduce apprehension, patients should be walked through the procedure and informed that a supine position, with the head secured to prevent movement, will be required throughout the test, which lasts approximately two hours. Periodic assessment of heart function and blood pressure is routine [17].

Careful explanation of sensations expected when the dye is injected is essential to reduce fear; injections of contrast medium into the blood vessels of the head can be painful. Sensations vary from warmth to severe burning behind the eyes and in the jaw, teeth, tongue, and lips. Even fillings in the teeth can feel warm. The sensation of heat lasts four to six seconds after the dye is injected. More than one injection may be necessary [17].

Nursing care also includes collection of baseline data and preparation of the patient. Vital signs and neurologic status should be recorded and pulses distal to the puncture site marked to facilitate assessment after the procedure. If the carotid site is used, documenting neck measurements allows for comparison after the test. Hairpins, nets, and dentures should be removed. The patient should also void before the test begins [17].

Preprocedure medications may include anti-anxiety agents (to help the patient relax) and atropine sulfate to protect against a reflex response (hypotension, syncope, and bradycardia) by the carotid artery. Patients should be well-hydrated to promote clearance of the dye by the kidneys but otherwise should fast for six to eight hours before the test. The injection site(s) should be shaved and prepared with an antiseptic solution. Local anesthetic is usually given before insertion of the catheter or needle [17].

Immediately following the removal of the needle or catheter from the artery, pressure should be applied to the puncture site for 15 minutes to prevent hemorrhage and development of a hematoma. Vital signs and neurologic checks are conducted and recorded every hour for 4 hours, then every 4 hours for 24 hours. Intake and output should also be noted [17].

The puncture site, surrounding areas, and distal extremities should be carefully monitored. The puncture site should be assessed for redness, swelling, and superficial-to-deep hematoma. A pressure dressing and ice bag may decrease the risk of bleeding and discomfort. When the carotid artery is used, the patient should be monitored for respiratory distress and swallowing difficulty, which may indicate excessive edema or an expanding hematoma. For puncture of the femoral or brachial site, pulses in the distal limb are monitored for 12 hours and the limb is maintained in an extended position and observed for normal temperature, color, and sensation. Blood pressure is not monitored in the involved arm. A physician should be alerted immediately of any untoward effects. The patient should rest quietly in bed for two to four hours after the procedure, with food and medications given as tolerated [17].

Pneumoencephalography

Pneumoencephalography (PEG) is a radiographic study used to detect small tumors of the cerebral ventricles, cisterns, and intraspinal and intracranial subarachnoid spaces and to visualize the pituitary gland, which is positioned below the ventricles. PEG is seldomly used now, because less painful and less dangerous tests are available. Its use is generally limited to research settings. PEG is contraindicated if there is risk of herniation or if a lumber puncture has been done within the past nine days [5,6,8].

PEG is carried out in a special procedures room. The patient is strapped into a motorized chair that can be moved in various directions. A contrast gas (oxygen, room air, or other gas) is injected into the subarachnoid space via a lumbar puncture or via a cisternal or ventricular tap. Patients are normally sedated during the procedure; those who cannot remain still because of anxiety or motor dysfunction are anesthetized [5,6,8].

Initially, a small amount of gas is injected and an x-ray taken to make the brain stem visible. Then, small amounts of CSF are removed and gas injected until 25–30 mL of CSF has been replaced. With each injection of gas, the patient's chair is somersaulted to help move gas into the ventricles. (Some institutions do not use a chair but have the patients assume various positions on an examination table.) The needle is removed, and a series of x-rays is taken. The study takes one to two hours [5,6,8].

Electromyography and Nerve Conduction Studies

Electromyography (EMG) records electrical activity in muscle at rest and during contraction. Findings allow differentiation of muscle disease from lower motor neuron dysfunction. Recorded electrical patterns can be diagnostic of various diseases, including myositis, dystrophy, and myasthenia gravis. EMG can be used to assess function in the spinal cord, nerve root, nerve plexus, peripheral nerves, and/or myoneural junction, and the test can detect and measure regeneration of nerve and muscle before clinical signs appear. This information can be used to predict recovery [5,6,8].

A nerve conduction test is often administered along with an EMG. This test measures the strength and speed of conduction in the sensory and motor fibers of peripheral nerves. Motor conduction studies are valued for assessing nerve damage when minor symptoms of motor weakness or atrophy exist. Sensory fiber conduction rates are especially useful for diagnosing neuropathies in patients with diabetes, alcoholism, metabolic or nutritional disorders, and trauma. Sensory nerve fiber conduction is assessed with a single electrical stimulus. The action potential is recorded by an electrode placed on the skin where the nerve is close to the surface. The recorded conduction time is compared with established norms for healthy nerves [5,6,8].

Nursing Implications

Fluid or food intake is not restricted prior to EMG or nerve conduction study. However, in some cases cigarettes, coffee, tea, cola, or medications may be restricted before the test. A written consent is obtained [17].

Patients should be educated about the time EMG takes (one hour or more), steps of the procedure, the need to insert a needle into the muscle, and the changing of needle position, which may cause discomfort. Patients will need to cooperate in flexing and releasing muscles during the test [17].

Residual pain after the test is treated with warm compresses and prescribed analgesics. If medications were withheld for the test, the physician will indicate when they should be resumed [17].

Lumbar Puncture

Lumbar puncture, also referred to as a spinal tap, is an invasive procedure used to obtain samples of CSF, to measure CSF pressure, and therapeutically to reduce pressure in conditions such as subarachnoid hemorrhage. Lumbar puncture is also done to instill antibiotics, steroids, and/or dye or oxygen for diagnostic studies and to evaluate CSF flow [5,6,8].

Lumbar puncture can be done at the bedside or in the diagnostic lab. The procedure is done with the patient positioned to one side (typically the left) with head and knees flexed toward the abdomen. The patient is assisted in maintaining this position, which separates the vertebrae, allowing the needle to enter the subarachnoid space at the level L3-to-L4 or L4-to-L5. Aseptic technique is required [5,6,8]. In some patients, particularly those who are overweight, sitting and leaning forward may provide better access.

Contraindications for lumbar puncture include skin lesions in the lumbar area, epidural infection or abscess, and lumbar deformity near the puncture site. Lumbar puncture is also contraindicated with increased ICP because of the heightened risk of brain compression or herniation through the tentorial hiatus when the spinal fluid pressure is lowered. In some circumstances, such as when meningitis is suspected, the need to establish a diagnosis outweighs the dangers of the procedure [5,6,8].

Possible complications of lumbar puncture include headache, transitory low back pain and root irritation, and meningitis or abscess. Post-lumbar puncture headache is believed to result from the loss of CSF at the puncture site, which lowers the spinal fluid pressure and places tension on the intracranial structures [5,6,8].

Nursing Implications

The purpose of the test and steps of the procedure should be thoroughly explained to the patient, emphasizing the importance of lying still in the flexed position during the lumbar puncture. Patients should be advised of the brief episodes of pain when the anesthetic and spinal needle are inserted. A discussion of postprocedure activity is also helpful [17].

After a lumbar puncture, most physicians require the patient to remain recumbent, but turning should be encouraged. Forcing fluids will help to promote replacement of withdrawn spinal fluid. Headaches, experienced by many, can be treated with hydration, caffeine, and/or prescribed analgesics. Patients should be carefully monitored for signs of meningitis and drainage or discharge at the puncture site. Abnormal findings, such as the presence or absence of glucose and abnormal spinal fluid color, should be reported immediately [17].

Suboccipital Puncture

Suboccipital (cisternal) puncture is an alternative procedure for obtaining CSF when lumbar puncture is contraindicated. For this test, the patient's head should be flexed forward so the chin touches the chest. A short, beveled needle is inserted into the subarachnoid space of the cisternal magna. Suboccipital punctures are hazardous because of the proximity to the brain stem and the risk for subarachnoid hemorrhage [5,6,8]. Fluoroscopic guidance can help avoid these complications.

Nursing Implications

Preprocedure care for suboccipital puncture is the same as for lumbar puncture. Bed rest is usually maintained for several hours after the procedure. Respiratory and cardiac function is observed frequently because of the puncture's proximity to medullary centers controlling these functions. Headaches are uncommon [17].

Myelography

In a myelography, fluoroscopy and radiography are combined to study the subarachnoid space, spinal cord, and vertebral bodies. The test reveals spinal cord tumors, herniated or ruptured intervertebral disks, and nerve root injury. In this study, a lumbar puncture is used to replace a small amount of CSF with a radiopaque dye or gas. The patient is positioned on a movable table that tilts to various positions to allow the flow of dye through the subarachnoid space. Abnormalities in flow provide the diagnostic information [5,6,8].

Nursing Implications

Prior to myelography, it is important to assess the patient for allergies to iodine, shellfish, or radiographic dye, and to obtain a written consent for the patient. Preprocedure fasting for four to eight hours is necessary, and baseline vital signs and neurologic status should be recorded. An enema may be ordered to reduce x-ray shadows. A sedative (to relax the patient) and atropine (to reduce secretions) may be ordered [17].

Patient education should cover information about the procedure, including the length; the purpose of the lumbar puncture (or suboccipital puncture, if lumbar deformity or skin infection is present); the usual response to the dye, which may include flushing, a warm sensation, a salty taste, headache, nausea, and vomiting; the positioning and strapping to the table; and the need to tilt the table during the study and to remove the dye [17].

After the procedure, the patient's head should be positioned to keep the dye from entering the cranium. Vital signs and neurologic status, including nuchal rigidity, nausea, vomiting, and reports of back pain and spasms, should be monitored for at least 24 hours or as indicated by policy. Headache may be treated by positioning and analgesics. Patients should be encouraged to consume plenty of fluids while their intake, output, and ability to void are monitored [17].

CSF Analysis

Because CSF is in contact with the components of the CNS, it can be valuable in the diagnosis and evaluation of CNS disease progression or healing process. CSF is colorless and consists of water and traces of protein, glucose, sodium, chloride, and potassium. The average volume in adults ranges from 100–150 mL. CSF pressure in the supine patient ranges from 7–20 cm/H_2O. Fluid that is dark in color or even pink-tinged indicates hemorrhage or a cerebral bleed [5,6,8].

The collection and handling of CSF should be carefully controlled to ensure proper analysis. The fluid is collected in sterile tubes and delivered to the laboratory immediately. Some diagnostic evaluations require processing within one hour [5,6,8].

Certain analyses of CSF require special considerations. For example, the evaluation of the glucose level requires that a blood glucose level be obtained not more than three hours before the puncture. Because serum glucose levels are reflected in the CSF, an abnormal CSF level may be a reflection of the serum level, rather than a neurologic disease process. Similarly, CSF chloride levels can be affected by serum levels. Because of this influence, CSF chloride levels will not be valid if the patient has received IV therapy with electrolyte solutions prior to or during the lumbar puncture [5,6,8].

9. NURSING DIAGNOSES, PLANNING, AND IMPLEMENTATION

Careful gathering and analysis of patient information, physical findings, and diagnostic data are needed for all patients with suspected CNS dysfunction. Patients who have CNS conditions often require long periods of treatment and time to adapt to the changes in their lives brought on by the disease. These adaptations may involve physical and mental changes, including the reorganization of self-image and the adjustment of expectations of life. Specific nursing interventions depend on when care is sought for the disease process and how the individual responds physically and mentally to the illness [41].

INEFFECTIVE AIRWAY CLEARANCE

Patency of the respiratory tract depends on a person's ability to maintain proper positioning, effective functioning of the muscles of respiration, and healthy respiratory tract mucosa. Neurologic diseases often cause dulled consciousness, confusion, and decreased motor function, all of which can affect respiration. Patients may not be able to assume positions independently that keep the tongue from obstructing the airway. Disease processes that affect cranial nerve function (e.g., myasthenia gravis, ALS) or level of consciousness can make it difficult to swallow or cough to clear the airway of sputum, foreign objects, or vomitus [30,40].

Ingestion of adequate fluids can be a problem for patients with neurologic problems as well. Those with cognitive impairment may forget to drink, and patients with communication problems may be unable to request fluids. Physical impairments may make drinking difficult or impossible. These situations can result in dehydration and drying and crusting of the mucosal tissue in the oropharyngeal area and respiratory tree, with related damage to mucous cells and cilia. This damage compromises an individual's normal phagocytic action and ability to expel organisms, increasing the risk of respiratory tract infections [30,40].

Promoting Airway Clearance

For the physically impaired or obtunded patient, careful positioning with pillows and special devices promotes drainage of secretions, maintains a patent airway, and reduces the risk of aspiration. This includes careful positioning during meals, supplemental oral intake, nasogastric feedings, and oral care. A suction machine should be at hand if choking is a risk or secretions are unmanageable. Active or passive range-of-motion exercises and frequent position changes help to promote mobilization of secretions [41].

Steps to ensure adequate hydration support healthy respiratory function both by promoting the elimination of secretions and the destruction of organisms. Careful, ongoing assessment of the oral pharyngeal mucosa, breath sounds, and activity to manage secretions is necessary because the patient's condition may change quickly and the change may not be obvious [41].

ALTERATION IN BOWEL ELIMINATION

Constipation

Many CNS diseases can cause constipation. Neurologic alterations can result in decreased fluid intake, decreased physical activity, impaired communication, inability to monitor bowel patterns, inability to initiate changes in diet to correct constipation, limitations in using toilet facilities, and increased dependence resulting in a lack of privacy [30,40].

Diseases such as stroke, myasthenia gravis, and ALS may result in paralysis of the lips, tongue, mouth, pharynx, or larynx (bulbar paralysis). The resultant difficulty in swallowing frequently reduces fluid intake, making stools hard and difficult to pass [30,40].

Immobility from motor neuron damage or decreased level of consciousness limits abdominal muscle contraction and bowel activity slows. Positioning constraints, as with spasticity or contractures, can prevent a patient from assuming positions that facilitate defecation. For example, being confined to bed for treatment of a lumbar disk problem often causes constipation brought about by both immobility and positioning constraints [30,40].

Loss of toilet privacy frequently accompanies the physical disabilities of weakness, paralysis, and immobility. Embarrassment over exposure during toilet activities and related helplessness can hamper normal defecation [30,40].

Special nursing techniques for the patient with limited motor function who needs to increase fluid intake to keep stools soft include special positioning and the use of special cups, straws, and other adaptive devices. Recognizing the patient's physical and mental deficits allows for effective planning and assistance. If the patient's communication is limited, family or friends may be able to suggest favored fluids and foods that will increase fluid intake and bulk to relieve or prevent constipation [41].

Incontinence

Bowel incontinence may accompany a wide variety of disease processes. Sphincter control can be lost because of cortical, spinal cord, or peripheral nerve damage; recovery of control may or may not be possible. Following brain trauma, patients may have temporary or chronic loss of bowel continence. Aphasia predisposes some patients to incontinence because they cannot express their need to defecate. Tube feedings and medications may cause diarrhea, which is more difficult to control [30,40].

INEFFECTIVE BREATHING PATTERN

CNS diseases can interfere with the brain stem's regulation of respiratory function. Related changes in body function—decreased level of consciousness, immobility, obstruction of airway, and aspiration—can result in decreased ventilation, decreased gas exchange, and hypoxia. Hypoxia presents two threats: anoxia in vital neurons and dilation of cerebral vessels leading to an increase in ICP. Signs and symptoms include increased lethargy, rising blood pressure, and depressed respirations [30,40]

Pathologic conditions producing an increase in ICP can lead to herniation, damaging respiratory centers in the brain stem. This trauma and other pathologies involving the brain stem, such as stroke or tumor, alter the rate, depth, and rhythm of respirations. Diseases, injuries, or infections affecting phrenic innervation of the diaphragm can result in loss of stimulus for breathing [30,40].

Hyperventilation can result from problems such as encephalitis, drug overdose, and hypoxia. It can also be initiated by psychologic stress or pain, both common in patients with CNS diseases [30,40].

ALTERATION IN CARDIAC OUTPUT

Impairment of cardiac output can follow injury to the brain stem's vasomotor center, which influences cardiac function via the autonomic nervous system. The brain stem's vasomotor center also controls blood pressure. With sharp elevation in blood pressure initiated to perfuse a severely edematous brain, the vasomotor center initiates a reflex slowing of the heart, reduces contractility, and produces vasodilation. Cardiac output can also be compromised by anoxia stemming from alterations in respiratory function [30,40].

Decreases in vasomotor tone with various neurologic problems can affect cardiac function due to the decrease in blood returning to the heart. In addition, spinal cord injuries producing spinal shock severely decrease vasomotor tone. Orthostatic hypotension after long periods of bed rest is also the result of a loss of vasomotor tone [30,40].

IMPAIRED COMMUNICATION

A variety of conditions affecting the CNS, including stroke, gunshot wounds, and carbon monoxide poisoning, can damage speech centers located in the dominant hemisphere. If Broca's area or the nerve fibers connecting Wernicke's area and Broca's area are damaged, speech may be severely limited, but understanding of one's own and others' speech will be intact. If Wernicke's area is damaged, speech may be fluent but nonsensical [30,40].

Speech can also be impaired if cranial nerves responsible for movement of the lips, tongue, oral pharynx, and larynx are injured. Damage to spinal nerves that control respirations can also affect verbal communication [30,40].

Destruction or swelling of neuronal tissue in the parietal, occipital, and/or temporal lobes impairs perception and interpretation of stimuli including touch, sight, and hearing. As such, aspects of awareness needed for communication can be altered [30,40].

Limitations in motor function will impair nonverbal forms of communication, including writing, gesturing, facial expressions, and various postures that add expression to oral communication. Impaired nonverbal communication can influence how information is received, because gestures, facial expressions, and posturing enhance oral communication [30,40].

IMPAIRED PHYSICAL MOBILITY

Hemiplegia from stroke, tumor, or spinal cord injury, or motor deficits from peripheral nerve injury may be obvious or subtle. Subtle limitations, such as decreases in range of motion, lesser involvement in activities of daily living, or unsteady gait, are often first identified by the nurse, especially in patients with progressive diseases. In extrapyramidal tract diseases, the impairment in mobility may be difficult to detect. Nevertheless, careful analysis may reveal clumsiness and limitations in movement resulting from tremors and rigidity [30,40].

Mobility may also be compromised by cerebellar dysfunction, alterations in sensory perception, changes in mentation, and changes in mood and energy level. Cerebellar dysfunction can produce ataxia, uncoordinated movements, and limitations in depth perception. Damage to the parietal, temporal, or occipital lobes or to the sensory tract impairs an individual's ability to perceive and interact with the environment to varying degrees. Limitations from sensory deficits can often be difficult to determine and measure; careful observation and diagnostic testing are necessary [30,40].

Activity levels frequently increase or decrease with alterations in mental function. Both states are potentially dangerous. Patients who are restless and confused may also have immobility if restraints are used to ensure safety. Body image changes that accompany neurologic diseases frequently lead to depression, fatigue, decreased participation in daily activities, and fewer interactions with the environment [30,40].

ALTERATION IN NUTRITION

The physical, psychologic, and social factors accompanying neurologic diseases can have a profound effect on an individual's nutritional status. Common physical problems that may limit intake include lack of exercise, inability or awkwardness in self-feeding, social isolation, difficulty chewing and swallowing, fear of choking, and limited energy for eating [29,30].

For the individual at home, physical and mental deficits can make buying food and preparing meals challenging. A limited income (because of illness-related unemployment and healthcare costs) can also influence the amount and type of food available. As a result, the quality and quantity of food consumed may be reduced [29,30].

Sight, smell, taste, and touch—all important to an interest in eating—are altered by many CNS diseases. In addition, mental changes from injury to the cerebral cortex or the psychologic response to disease can diminish interest in eating [29,30].

SELF-CARE DEFICIT

CNS diseases predispose patients to many types and degrees of self-care deficits. Planning effective care depends on determining how the following factors influence the treatments and activities planned for or by the patient [30,40]:

- Cause of the illness

- Degree of influence on self-care

- Prognosis and expected outcomes

- The patient's personality and response to deficits

- The family's interest and ability to support the patient mentally and physically

ALTERATION IN SENSORY PERCEPTION

CNS dysfunction can change one's perception of the environment and spatial relations. The parietal, occipital, and temporal lobes all have major roles in the interpretation of messages received from peripheral nerves. The interdependence of these areas within the cerebral cortex and in the cerebellum, subcortical areas, brain stem, and peripheral nerves influences the patient's physical and mental interaction with the environment. Perceptual changes and deficits predispose the patient to injury, depression, confusion, fear, and isolation [30,40].

SEXUAL DYSFUNCTION

Sexual dysfunction is relatively common in patients with CNS conditions and can result from spinal cord trauma, peripheral nerve trauma, or damage to the nerves necessary for sexual activities. Pharmacotherapy may also produce sexual dysfunction. Mental changes stemming from brain damage may result in inappropriate sexual behaviors [30,40].

ALTERATION IN URINARY ELIMINATION

Urinary retention or incontinence can result from diseases affecting the cerebral cortex, spinal cord, and/or peripheral nervous system. Patients with CNS dysfunction often experience both a diminished awareness of bladder fullness and a decreased ability to empty the bladder. Alterations in consciousness from trauma, electrolyte imbalance, anoxia, and disease processes can produce temporary or permanent urinary incontinence [30,40].

10. CONGENITAL DISORDERS AFFECTING THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM

A congenital disorder of the CNS can be defined as a developmental defect. Although the causes of maldevelopments are often unknown, the majority are considered to result from the hereditary transmission of a chromosomal abnormality or are secondary to embryonic damage. The developing CNS in the fetus is particularly vulnerable to radiation effects, anoxia, metabolic diseases, and infections in the mother [14,15].

CEREBRAL PALSY

Cerebral palsy is not a disease entity per se but a variety of neuromotor disorders resulting from cerebral hypoxia or damage to the nervous system in utero, at birth, or in early life; most cases are the result of damage that occurs before or during birth. Cerebral palsy occurs most often in infants born prematurely or after a difficult labor, at the rate of about 2 cases per 1,000 live births [42,46]. Causal factors can be divided into four groups:

- Genetic defects associated with chromosomal abnormalities

- Prenatal factors, including:

- Maternal infections (e.g., rubella, cytomegalovirus, toxoplasmosis)

- Irradiation

- Harmful drug intake

- Malnutrition

- Toxemia

- Gestational diabetes

- Rhesus (Rh) and ABO blood incompatibilities

- Prenatal factors causing anoxia of the brain, such as:

- Difficult breech and midforceps deliveries

- Improper anesthesia during labor and delivery

- Premature birth

- Low birth weight

- Postnatal factors causing injury to the neonate's brain, including:

- Cerebral vascular lesions

- Infections

- Trauma

- Malnutrition

- Prolonged convulsive seizures

Developmental disorders are more frequent in infants of mothers younger than 20 or older than 35 years of age. Data from CT scanning confirm that perinatal and/or postnatal cerebral vascular bleeding is the major cause [42,46].

Clinical Manifestations

The symptoms and signs of cerebral palsy are variable, ranging from mild muscle incoordination to severe spasticity. Intellectual performance is often hampered by seizures and speech, visual, hearing, and motor impairment. As a result, individuals with cerebral palsy often develop serious emotional and social problems. In addition, at least half have intellectual disability as a primary aspect of the disorder. Patients with cerebral palsy often live into adulthood and develop other health problems [42,46].

Therapeutic and Nursing Measures

The treatment of cerebral palsy is dependent on the extent of damage and the patient's needs. Although the initial damage in the brain cannot be reversed, earlier and aggressive treatments may help to improve function and adjustments for the young nervous system and musculoskeletal system [1]. Common treatment approaches include physical therapy and rehabilitation, braces and other orthotic devices, assistive technology, pharmacotherapy, and surgery.

MUSCULAR DYSTROPHY

Muscular dystrophy is a hereditary, degenerative neuromuscular disorder characterized by chronic, progressive wasting and weakness of voluntary muscles. Far more common in men than women, the disease affects both children and young adults. The nine different types of muscular dystrophy (i.e., myotonic, Duchenne, Becker, limb-girdle, facioscapulohumeral, congenital, oculopharyngeal, and distal) vary in the age of onset, rate of symptom progression, and clinical manifestations. All types exhibit degenerative changes in the muscle fibers [42,46].

Clinical Manifestations

Muscular dystrophy is characterized by a progressive weakness and atrophy of all voluntary muscles, with eventual contracture and confinement to a wheelchair. Failure of cardiac or respiratory musculature usually leads to death in the second or third decades of life [42,46].

Therapeutic Measures

There is no cure for the muscular dystrophies. Accurate diagnosis is essential, however, to rule out similar muscle diseases for which effective treatments are available. Patients with muscular dystrophy are managed with supportive interventions and assistive devices. Physical therapy may enable patients to gain optimal use of affected muscles, and muscle stretching helps prevent contractures. Tendon-lengthening surgeries have varying degrees of success [42,46].

Specific Nursing Measures

Patients with muscular dystrophy should remain physically active as long as possible. Physical therapy regimens are essential. Stretching and resistive exercises preserve joint range of motion, prevent or minimize contractures, decrease atrophy, and promote mobility. Exercises should be done at least twice every day for the outpatient or four times per day for inpatients. Each joint should be put through its normal arc of motion, as tolerated, while avoiding moving joints beyond the point of resistance. Exercises should be halted whenever the patient has pain [42].

Patients with muscle spasticity experience an increased tonus in a weak muscle. The objective is to promote muscle relaxation and prevent complications, such as contractures, muscle atrophy, pressure injuries, and urinary tract infections. Patients and their families should be taught to avoid stimuli that can increase spasticity, including fatigue, maintaining one position for too long, and cold temperature [42].

Braces may be used to stabilize the lower limbs and trunk, but they should be light enough for weakened muscles to support. Other potentially helpful assistive devices include bed trapezes, handrails, raised toilet seats, and wheelchairs [42].

Management of alteration in nutritional intake is another priority. The physical inactivity of patients with muscular dystrophy may contribute to unnecessary weight gain. Patients can plan meal schedules that permit smaller, more frequent meals. Evaluation of weight patterns and energy requirements can help [46]. The goal is to promote independence as long as possible.

HUNTINGTON CHOREA

Huntington chorea, also known as Huntington disease, is a rare hereditary disease of the CNS. The disorder is progressive, degenerative, and fatal. It is characterized by severe choreiform movements and mental deterioration. Although the disease was first recognized as a medical entity more than 100 years ago, public awareness has lagged. As noted, Huntington chorea is inherited through the autosomal dominant gene with full penetrance. Therefore, 50% of the children of individuals with the disease eventually inherit it [42,46].

Clinical Manifestations

Huntington chorea usually develops insidiously and runs its course over 15 to 20 years. Onset is typically in middle life (35 to 40 years of age). The earlier the age of onset, the more rapid the deterioration [42].

The choreiform movements are the most striking characteristic of Huntington chorea. They begin slowly, usually first in the face and upper extremities. Facial grimacing and jerking limb movements occur. Over time, movements become frequent, erratic, and violent [42].

As the disease progresses, communication becomes poor, with increasing dysarthria and unintelligible speech. Early behavioral changes include periods of irritability, labile mood swings, and impulsiveness. Periods of apathy, elation, depression, and aggression can be expected. Progressive memory impairment, inattention to personal hygiene, and cognitive impairment accompany the personality changes [46].

Seizures also occur in the end stages of classic Huntington chorea. Death is usually from cardiac or respiratory failure, extreme systemic exhaustion, or suicide [46].

Therapeutic Measures

Treatment of Huntington chorea is difficult. There are no known methods of arresting the disease, and drug regimens have been generally unsuccessful. Exercise, physical therapy, nutritional support, and speech and language therapy can be helpful.

Specific Nursing Measures

The chronic, disabling nature of Huntington chorea requires interventions that are preventive, protective, and supportive. These patients are at high risk for injury, and as the disease progresses, a safe physical environment should be maintained, with precautions similar to those for seizures. As mental and cognitive capacity deteriorate, patients will rely more on caregivers to carry out activities of daily living—daily hygiene, nutrition, and elimination. Genetic counseling is crucial to screen families whose children may later develop the disease, to counsel these families regarding the risks, and to support other family members carrying the gene [42,46].

NEUROFIBROMATOSIS

Neurofibromatosis is a hereditary disorder characterized by a variety of congenital abnormalities. The skin, CNS, bones, and endocrine glands are most commonly affected. Usually, some form of benign tumor is the typical finding [14,15].

Neurofibromatosis is one of the most common hereditary disorders. The incidence is approximately one case per 3,000 live births [14,15]. In the United States, there are an estimated 100,000 cases. The disease is slightly more common in males. Each child of an affected parent has a 50% chance of inheriting the gene and developing neurofibromatosis [14,15].

Clinical Manifestations

In the peripheral form of neurofibromatosis, multiple cutaneous and subcutaneous nodules occur. Cutaneous tumors are palpated in the dermis as discrete soft or firm papules varying in size from millimeters to centimeters. If pressed, these soft nodules feel like a seedless grape, which aids in distinguishing lesions of neurofibromatosis from other tumors. Subcutaneous tumors are usually multiple, assuming two forms: discrete or plexiform neuromas. Discrete tumors are firm nodules that attach to the peripheral portion of a nerve. These nodules may cause neurologic or paresthetic pain to pressure and rarely cause weakness, atrophy, or sensory loss in the distribution of the affected nerve. The number of nodules varies from a few to thousands, and the size varies from pea-sized to orange-sized. Plexiform neuromas are an overgrowth of subcutaneous tissue and can reach enormous sizes. The face, scalp, chest, and neck are typically affected with growths that feel like a "bag of worms" when palpated. The hypertrophy is highly disfiguring and often accompanied by underlying bone abnormalities. These tumors, if large enough, can cause increased ICP and brain stem compression [19].

Therapeutic Measures

Neurofibromatosis has no cure. The most promising approach is surgery for removal of symptomatic lesions. In cases of multiple CNS lesions, the decision to have surgery depends on the severity of symptoms, risk for survival, and the quality of life. Some have advocated aggressive plastic surgical treatment for cosmetic reasons or for removing lesions that might degenerate into sarcomas. Radiotherapy is not justified because of unsatisfactory results and the risks associated with radiation exposure [20].

Specific Nursing Measures

Patients with neurofibromatosis should be helped to recognize that there are many variants of the disease and that no two individuals have the same course and prognosis. Patient education should include the current extent of the illness and possible treatment strategies, with emphasis on the patient's right to make decisions regarding treatment choices.

One challenge is helping the patient recognize and cope with the uncertainty of the disease course and prognosis. Lesions can change from asymptomatic to symptomatic at any time, and new lesions can develop spontaneously without warning. Some patients may experience symptom-free periods [42].

ARTERIOVENOUS MALFORMATIONS OF THE BRAIN

An arteriovenous malformation is characterized by the direct shunting of arterial blood into veins. Two-thirds of all patients with intracranial arteriovenous malformations experience symptoms before 30 years of age; most cases are congenital. About 1 in 20 patients with arteriovenous malformation have aneurysms, but only 1 in 75 patients with intracranial aneurysm has an associated arteriovenous malformation [9,13].

Clinical Manifestations

Clinical manifestations of arteriovenous malformations include seizures, hemorrhage, headaches, motor and sensory deficits, organic mental impairments, visual dysfunction, and syncopal episodes. The most common are seizure activity and hemorrhage [9,13].

Severe intracerebral bleeds can occur from these malformations. In these cases, presenting symptoms and signs include vomiting, intractable headache, and loss of consciousness. Less severe arteriovenous malformations can cause aphasias and hemiparesis. An estimated 10% to 15% of patients experience sudden, severe paralysis after seizure. An equal percentage develops a progressive rather than sudden hemiparesis. Sizable bleeds in the brain stem can lead to coma and death [9,13].

Therapeutic Measures

Complete excision of the arteriovenous malformation is the treatment of choice for most patients and eliminates the possibility of rebleeding. Few patients are in the high-risk or inoperable category. Microneurosurgical techniques permit the removal of most lesions, regardless of size and depth. Those with subarachnoid hemorrhage require a recovery period before surgery to permit careful evaluation of neurodiagnostic studies. Angiography is essential to visualize the circulation of the malformation [13].

Specific Nursing Measures

Assessment of initial symptoms and signs (usually related to either seizures or hemorrhage) is one of the most important aspects of care for the patient with intracranial arteriovenous malformation. Although a subarachnoid hemorrhage with an arteriovenous malformation is generally less severe than a ruptured intracranial aneurysm, many of the symptoms will be the same. Intracerebral hemorrhage can occur [39].

Transient episodes of syncope and dizziness increase the patient's risk for injuries from falls. Patients should be instructed to assume a safe position and call for assistance at the initial onset of any of these symptoms. Any episodes should be carefully documented [39].

11. CNS DISORDERS OF MULTIFACTORIAL ORIGIN

CNS disorders of multifactorial origin can be associated with a combination of lifestyle factors, trauma, environmental toxins, and inherited defects.

STROKE

The two primary types of stroke are ischemic and hemorrhagic. In the United States, approximately 87% of all strokes are ischemic; 10% are hemorrhagic [76]. An ischemic stroke occurs when any artery that supplies the brain with oxygen becomes stenosed or occluded, resulting in infarction. In the case of hemorrhagic stroke, bleeding occurs below the arachnoid, the location of the brain's blood supply, allowing blood to directly contact and damage brain tissue. In addition, TIAs are often a precursor to ischemic stroke.

Hemorrhagic Stroke

Hemorrhagic strokes are categorized by the location of the hemorrhage, either intracerebral or subarachnoid, with the former being more common [76,77]. Approximately 87% of hemorrhagic strokes are due to intracerebral hemorrhage (ICH), and because of this, the term hemorrhagic stroke often refers to ICH [78]. ICHs are characterized by bleeding directly into the brain parenchyma [78,79]. Intraventricular hemorrhage describes bleeding that extends into the ventricles [79,80]. Nontraumatic ICH is categorized as primary (unrelated to congenital or acquired lesions), secondary (caused by a congenital or acquired condition), or spontaneous (unrelated to trauma or surgery) [79].

The signs and symptoms of ICH include headache, vomiting, seizures, depressed consciousness, meningeal irritation, and blood-tainted CSF. The onset of symptoms may occur within seconds to minutes after the start of an ICH. Individuals with this type of stroke often feel more ill than those with an ischemic stroke.

ICH is the least treatable type of stroke [81]. Functional independence is regained within six months in approximately 20% of survivors [82]. The morbidity and mortality depend on the volume and location of the hematoma. The one-year mortality rate varies according to anatomic location, with the highest mortality rate (65%) associated with ICH in the brain stem; the rate is 57% for lobar hemorrhage, 51% for deep hemorrhage, and 42% for cerebellar hemorrhage [83]. Overall, 46% of patients with ICH survive one year and 29% survive five years [84].

As many as 80% of primary ICHs occur after small vessels are compromised by chronic hypertension [85]. Hypertension is associated with ICH originating in the periventricular deep white matter, deep subcortical structures, pons, and cerebellum [86]. In individuals older than 70 years of age, cerebral amyloid angiopathy, a condition that leads to amyloid protein infiltration into the cortical arterioles, is responsible for approximately 20% of ICHs [87]. Other causes of ICH include anticoagulant and antiplatelet use, drug use (e.g., cocaine, phenylpropanolamine), and other bleeding diathesis [81,88]. Fewer than 15% of all cases of ICH are secondary to congenital vascular abnormalities and malignant brain lesions [79].

Subarachnoid hemorrhages occur less frequently than ICHs. The hallmark of subarachnoid hemorrhage is the immediate onset of a severe headache with signs of meningeal irritation [89]. Individuals may describe this headache as their "worst ever." Nausea, vomiting, neck pain, and photophobia are also classic symptoms, although they are not always present [89]. Neurologic deficits may be acute or may manifest hours to days after the onset of bleeding.

Nontraumatic subarachnoid hemorrhages are subcategorized as aneurysmal or non-aneurysmal [90]. Aneurysmal subarachnoid hemorrhage is associated with higher rates of morbidity and mortality than non-aneurysmal hemorrhage. Among patients who live 3 months after the event, the risk of death is 8.7% within 5 years and 17.9% within 10 years [91]. In contrast, non-aneurysmal subarachnoid hemorrhages are associated with better outcomes and are less likely to cause death [92].

Most nontraumatic subarachnoid hemorrhages involve rupture of an intracranial aneurysm or cerebral arteriovenous malformation. Congenital arteriovenous anomalies are more likely to cause stroke in adolescents and young adults [93]. The incidence of perimesencephalic subarachnoid hemorrhage, a non-aneurysmal type, is increasing. Although the cause remains unknown, increased use of antithrombotic medications may be a factor [94,95].

Therapeutic Measures

The primary focus of medical care after initial aneurysm rupture is to prevent rebleeding. Aminocaproic acid (Amicar) prevents destruction of the clot that has sealed the dome of the aneurysm following initial rupture; it also enables endothelial repair and fibrous tissue development to take pace. Extended use (three weeks or more) has been associated with thrombophlebitis and pulmonary embolism [19,20].

Communicating hydrocephalus, the third most common complication of subarachnoid hemorrhage, can occur with the bleed or weeks later as a result of a malabsorption or blockage of CSF. Hydrocephalus should be suspected if any of these signs appear:

- Mental status changes

- A decrease in level of consciousness

- Dementias

- Flat affect

- Urinary incontinence

- Disturbances in gait

Hydrocephalus is confirmed by a CT scan that shows an enlargement of the ventricles due to blocked absorption of fluid from the arachnoid space [19].

Surgical repair that includes clipping of the aneurysm neck is the best treatment of a ruptured intracranial aneurysm for patients who are neurologically stable. Early repair (24 to 28 hours after rupture) is sometimes advocated, particularly for those who are asymptomatic. Those who demonstrate more extensive signs of meningeal initiation or neurologic deficit may be at greater risk if repair is attempted during the first week following rupture. One complication of clipping the aneurysm is the potential for the client to develop the syndrome of inappropriate secretion of antidiuretic hormone. Clinical signs include confusion and increased specific gravity of urine [20].

Specific Nursing Measures

Unfortunately, about 40% to 50% of clients with subarachnoid hemorrhage due to ruptured intracranial aneurysms die from catastrophic bleeds before receiving medical attention [39]. For those who do have medical care, mortality and morbidity rates can be greatly reduced with careful nursing and medical management. Nursing care is aimed at preventing rebleeding, the most life-threatening complication, and other possible complications, including cerebral edema and hydrocephalus [39].

A patient's cardiovascular status may change because of hypothalamic dysfunction; a common cardiac change in a patient with a subarachnoid hemorrhage is sinus bradycardia with ST-segment or T-wave changes. These alterations should be differentiated from those of a myocardial infarction. Electrocardiogram pattern and vital signs should be monitored with the neurologic assessment [39].

Ischemic Stroke

Within minutes of the onset of ischemic stroke, the core of an infarct can begin to form at the least-perfused site. This site is encircled by an area partially altered metabolically and ionically by cytotoxic edema [96]. This area, the ischemic penumbra, is structurally intact and generally salvageable if reperfusion is achieved promptly. Because cerebral function deficits develop rapidly (within minutes to hours) as an ischemic stroke progresses, these brain attacks are a medical emergency. Although irreversible damage occurs, most individuals with stroke have recoverable penumbral tissue for at least three hours following the onset of symptoms [97].

The physical signs, symptoms, and sequelae of ischemic stroke are usually unilateral because of the circulatory anatomy of the brain. In general, ischemic strokes are categorized according to etiology: thrombotic and embolic [98].

Therapeutic Measures

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

With a goal to improve functional outcomes, the American College of Emergency Physicians recommends that intravenous rt-PA should be offered and may be given to selected patients with acute ischemic stroke within three hours after symptom onset at institutions where systems are in place to safely administer the medication. The increased risk of symptomatic intracerebral hemorrhage should be considered when deciding whether to administer rt-PA.

https://www.annemergmed.com/article/S0196-0644(15)00576-4/fulltext

Last Accessed: November 9, 2018

Strength of Recommendation: B (Recommendation based on moderate clinical certainty)

Thrombolytic therapy with recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (rt-PA) is the only treatment approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for ischemic stroke [97]. Anticoagulant and antiplatelet agents are also used, but their appropriateness is a source of debate and ongoing research. Intra-arterial rt-PA may be beneficial for select patients; however, the drug is not FDA approved for this use [99]. Mechanical thrombectomy is a consideration as both a primary reperfusion strategy and in conjunction with pharmacologic fibrinolysis [97].

Although emergent angioplasty and stenting are high-risk procedures, progressing strokes, which occur when patients' moderate neurologic deficits deteriorate significantly within 72 hours after onset, are associated with very poor outcomes and high mortality rates [100]. Therefore, some case studies suggest that emergency angioplasty followed by immediate or delayed stenting is appropriate for patients with a progressing stroke caused by carotid artery occlusion or stenosis, respectively [101,102].

In the setting of acute ischemic stroke, justification for emergent (within the first 24 hours) or early revascularization with carotid endarterectomy is based on reports of increased risk of recurrent stroke in patients undergoing medical therapy while awaiting revascularization. However, the risk associated with emergency carotid endarterectomy is believed to be high, for several reasons, particularly in patients with an unstable neurologic status [103]. For some patients, however, the benefit of carotid endarterectomy may outweigh the risk.

Specific Nursing Measures

For individuals who have had a stroke and are medically stable, rehabilitation assessment, prevention of medical complications, and secondary prevention become the focal points [97,104,105]. To begin, the rehabilitation team's systematic evaluation of the patient addresses various issues, including the need for rehabilitation services; the risk of complications; physical functioning, cognition, and communication; and psychosocial conditions [105]. Next, the team works with the patient and family to implement a rehabilitation plan that includes a detailed exercise program and general as well as tailored strategies for secondary prevention [104]. Throughout, the team should strive to foster a climate of familial support [105].

Medical complications related to illness, being bedridden, or lack of proper care/attention can prolong hospitalization, impede rehabilitation, increase disability, or result in death. Living in an inappropriate post-stroke environment also substantially increases a patient's risk for complications. Complications may develop in as many as 85% of hospitalized patients who have had a stroke [106]. Thus, medical examinations before and during a patient's rehabilitation program should assess the most common risks of complications: skin breakdown, deep vein thrombosis, swallowing dysfunction, bowel and bladder incontinence, falls, and pain [105].

Transient Ischemic Attacks

Transient ischemic attacks (TIAs) are sometimes referred to as "ministrokes" because, like ischemic strokes, they are caused by inadequate cerebral blood flow. TIAs are also called warning strokes, as they often precede an ischemic stroke [107]. The proposed definition states that a TIA is "a brief episode of neurologic dysfunction caused by focal brain or retinal ischemia, with clinical symptoms typically lasting less than one hour, and without evidence of acute infarction" [108]. This definition was designed to reflect the ischemic pathogenesis of TIA, promote its early management, and support the use of diagnostic imaging techniques to ensure that the patient does not have infarction [108]. The American Heart Association/American Stroke Association guideline defines TIA as, "a transient episode of neurologic dysfunction caused by focal brain, spinal-cord, or retinal ischemia, without acute infarction" [104,109].

The risk of ischemic stroke is dangerously high in the period following a TIA. Research indicates that one-half of subsequent strokes occur within the first 48 hours, and a meta-analysis showed that approximately 5% of patients who have a TIA will have an ischemic stroke within seven days of that event [107,110].

Although the most common focal neurologic signs of TIA are sudden-onset unilateral weakness and numbness or tingling in a limb, a TIA can cause any of the following symptoms [111,112]:

- Numbness of the face, hand, or leg, with or without weakness

- Paralysis

- Slurred speech

- Dizziness

- Double vision

- Hemianopia

- Transient monocular blindness

- Imbalance

- Aphasia

- Confusion

- Head pain

By the time of evaluation, however, most patients appear asymptomatic because TIAs usually resolve within five minutes [113]. A clinician should highly suspect a TIA if the patient says, "I don't know why I'm here. Whatever it was, it is all better now" [114].

TIAs are caused by conditions similar to those leading to ischemic stroke [104]. Among the common causes are atherosclerosis of large vessels, cardioembolism, and atrial fibrillation. Uncommon causes include hypercoagulable states, arterial dissection, sympathomimetic drugs (e.g., cocaine), and arteritis (caused by noninfectious necrotizing vasculitis, drugs, irradiation, or local trauma) [115].

Therapeutic Measures

The use of certain antiplatelet therapies rather than oral anticoagulation for noncardioembolic ischemic strokes and TIAs has been shown to reduce the overall risk of recurrent stroke and decrease the incidence of fatal recurrent strokes [104]. Clopidogrel is appropriate for patients who are allergic to aspirin or for patients in whom dipyridamole-associated headaches occur.

Aspirin (50–325 mg per day) monotherapy, the combination of aspirin 25 mg and extended-release dipyridamole 200 mg twice daily, or clopidogrel 75 mg monotherapy are all acceptable options for initial therapy [104]. The selection of an antiplatelet agent should be individualized on the basis of patient risk factor profiles, cost, tolerance, and other clinical characteristics.

Because TIA is associated with a significantly increased risk for stroke, secondary prevention strategies mirror those for ischemic stroke.

SEIZURE DISORDERS

Seizures are common neurologic disorders that occur across the entire spectrum of age, gender, race, and socioeconomic background. Rather than a diagnosis focused on location (e.g., "symptomatic temporal lobe epilepsy"), diagnosis should reflect important diagnostic features, such as seizure type, lesion type, localization (e.g., "epilepsy with focal seizures secondary to cortical dysplasia in the temporal lobe"), and possibly other factors, including age at onset, EEG patterns, or other features.

There are many possible etiologies that may lead to the development of seizures or the specific diagnosis of epilepsy. Epileptic seizures have three basic underlying causes: genetic, structural/metabolic, and unknown [65]. Some cases of epilepsy are of a genetic origin, but other forms of epilepsy are caused by structural or metabolic defects, which themselves may or may not have a genetic origin [65,66]. Other cases of epilepsy do not have any identifiable cause. Similar to structural/metabolic defects, the unidentified causes may have a heritable component.

Some patients with epilepsy experience one type of seizure; others experience several different seizure events. Different syndromes account for the varying patient histories, etiology of seizures, seizure type, clinical presentation, EEG readings, and neuroimaging findings. Common epileptic syndromes include febrile epilepsy, childhood absence epilepsy, juvenile myoclonic epilepsy, primary idiopathic generalized epilepsy, and localization-related epilepsy with complex partial seizures [67]. In total, more than 50 epileptic syndromes have been identified, each with specific associated diagnostic criteria.

Clinical Manifestations

The four generally recognized phases of a seizure are the prodrome (or preictal), ictal, interictal, and postictal stages. Not all patients experience, nor do all seizures include, every phase. The prodromal phase can last several days preceding a seizure. The prodrome is generally characterized as malaise or emotional changes [68]. An aura occurs immediately prior to a seizure, usually lasting a few seconds. Patients often describe an aura as a warning. An aura may be autonomic or it may involve the auditory, olfactory, sensory, or visual senses. The description of an aura can vary and may include weakness, an epigastric sensation, a sense of fear, visual hallucinations, aphasia, headache, feelings of being hot or cold, or sensing unpleasant odors [68,116]. If a patient experiences auras, the auras are usually fairly consistent in that individual. However, auras may vary in the same patient, and the use of antiepileptic drugs may alter or obscure the aura.

The ictal phase is the duration of the actual seizure activity. The patient experiences a paroxysmal, uncontrolled, abnormal, and excessive discharge of electrical activity in the brain. There are also corresponding EEG changes [116]. The clinical manifestations will coincide with the type of seizure activity that the patient is experiencing.

The interictal phase is the period between seizures. Many people with epilepsy suffer from emotional changes during this phase, including fear, anxiety, and depression [117]. These disturbances can be more troublesome to patients than the seizures themselves.

The postictal period is the interval after the seizure episode. The patient may experience some change in consciousness or behavior. Some patients experience Todd paralysis, a numbness or weakness of an affected extremity or the side of the face. After a tonic-clonic seizure, the postictal phenomena may be more severe. The patient may experience amnesia, confusion, fatigue, and/or coma [116]. Often, neuronal discharges remain abnormal and the EEG may indicate some slowing.

Seizure types are divided broadly into three groups: generalized seizures, focal seizures, and unknown (including epileptic spasms) [65]. Seizures that do not fit any category remain unclassified until further assessment reveals the seizure type; however, this is not a separate classification.

Generalized Seizures

Generalized seizures begin and spread rapidly in bilaterally distributed networks and are followed by a period of postictal phase of continued altered consciousness [65,118]. They are thought to originate from structures deep within the brain, radiating outward to the cortical surface. The networks may include cortical and subcortical structures, but the entire cortex is not necessarily affected. When a generalized seizure begins, there is synchronous involvement of the entire brain with diffuse EEG abnormalities. Approximately 20% to 25% of seizures are classified as generalized at onset [116]. Generalized seizures may result in a loss of consciousness, convulsions, falls, or muscle spasms. Some generalized seizures may encompass all of these events, while others may involve only one symptom.

Focal Seizures

Focal seizures (sometimes referred to as "partial seizures") are the more common classification and originate in a circumscribed area or areas of the brain (i.e., a localized brain disturbance). This type of seizure occurs in 75% to 80% of patients with epilepsy [117].

A focal ("partial") motor seizure occurs from a focus in the region of the brain's motor cortex. Motor activity occurs in the corresponding part of the body innervated by the motor neurons that are affected. The hands and fingers have a large cortical representation; consequently, seizures are frequently noticed in these areas. The duration of these seizures is usually one to two minutes, although the patient may require additional time to completely recover after the event [119]. The patient will present with twitching/jerking movements in an extremity, the face, the eyes, or another area of the body. The patient remains fully conscious and aware of the seizure but has no control of the event [120]. These seizures usually remain localized, but the involuntary movement may spread centrally and involve an entire limb, one side of the body, or the entire body [117,121].

Therapeutic Measures

Although prevention of epilepsy is the ultimate goal, this is not always possible. However, there is a variety of treatment options. Comprehensive treatment is an important aspect of care for all patients with epilepsy. Managing the disorder improves the quality of life, and the consequences of not treating may be great. Seizures that go untreated or are poorly controlled have an increased risk of becoming more severe or more difficult to manage. Treatment recommendations tend toward more aggressive management and earlier surgical evaluation for patients with epilepsy.

The utilization of antiepileptic drugs is the mainstay of therapeutic options. The effectiveness of antiepileptic drugs relies on the ability to classify the seizure type by its clinical presentation, history, and diagnostic test findings. It is important to know the correct seizure type, as some antiepileptic drugs will be more effective or will exacerbate certain seizures or seizure syndromes.

Although surgical techniques have improved markedly over the past few years, epilepsy surgery is rarely considered a first-line treatment and is usually considered only after years of medication treatment. A surgical approach may be deliberated sooner if the patient's ability to function is hampered by frequent or severe seizures and a specific epileptogenic focus, such as mesial temporal sclerosis, is identified.

The vagus nerve stimulator, first approved by the FDA in 1997, was the first successful medical device for patients with uncontrolled focal seizures [68]. The stimulator is an implanted device, similar to a cardiac pacemaker, that is connected to the vagus nerve in the neck and stimulates the nerve with electrical impulses. The device is programmed to send electrical discharges at specific intervals automatically and periodically throughout the day [68]. The device is adjusted according to each patient's individual requirements and tolerance.

Specific Nursing Measures

Epilepsy is a chronic disorder and often requires long-term management. The patient and family should be encouraged to obtain information about epilepsy through self-education. Local epilepsy organizations often provide written materials and information via other media. Frequently, the patient's family or other significant persons require as much education as the patient, because they will be observing the patient during the actual events. These significant persons should be educated to care for the patient during and after a seizure.

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

According to the American Academy of Neurology and the American Epilepsy Society, patients should be advised that their risk for antiepileptic drug adverse events ranges from 7% to 31% and that these adverse events are predominantly mild and reversible.

https://www.aan.com/Guidelines/home/GetGuidelineContent/688

Last Accessed: November 9, 2018

Strength of Recommendation/Level of Evidence: B (Probably useful based on at least randomized controlled study or two consistent cohort studies.)

Patient education is crucial to obtain medication adherence and provide optimum care. The patient should receive instruction on the type, dose, and potential side effects of each medication [122]. The patient should also understand that the medication is to be taken every day, on time, and as prescribed. Although brand and generic drugs are comprised of the same active compounds, their absorption may vary and patients should be cautioned not to interchange the medications. To avoid undesirable drug interactions, all professionals writing prescriptions should be aware of all medications a patient is taking. The patient should be informed that many medications interact with other CNS depressants, including alcohol. Patients should bring medication bottles with them at each visit.

Patients with seizure disorders should wear identification wristbands or necklaces. Injuries are the primary complication of seizures. Patients with epilepsy often cause harm to themselves by biting their tongues or falling down and hitting a piece of furniture. The patient should be safeguarded from injuries and falls, and injury prevention is a key aspect of patient education and the maintenance of quality of life. The patient and family should be instructed on constructive methods of safety planning without being overburdened with unnecessary restraints and concern. If possible, the environment should be altered during a seizure rather than restraining the patient.

DYSTONIA

Dystonia is an abnormality of involuntary movement (dyskinesia). The abnormality can involve a single, focal muscle group or can be a diffuse neurologic syndrome in which multiple muscle groups are involved [28].

Clinical Manifestations

Onset of dystonia usually occurs before 15 years of age and is commonly associated with more severe clinical signs. Later onset is rare and more benign. The disease is observed as a slow, sustained, involuntary twisting of affected muscle of the trunk, limbs, neck, and face. Dystonia is not usually present during sleep. During waking periods, dystonic movements can be continuous. Dystonic movements tend to intensify with stress or fatigue and can be alleviated by relaxation or sleep [28].

Therapeutic and Nursing Measures

A primary treatment choice for patients with intractable dystonia has been surgery. More commonly, patients with less severe disease are managed by pharmacotherapy. Anticholinergic drugs have been beneficial in reversing acute symptoms of dystonia induced by antipsychotic drugs [28]. The effect of dystonia on the muscles may be reduced by stretching exercises [38].

HEADACHE

The pathophysiology of headaches is multifactorial and complex. When lesions of the brain cause headache (e.g., mass, fluid, hemorrhage), they do so by involving pain-sensitive structures inside the skull, such as arteries at the base of the brain, the dura area blood vessels, and certain cranial nerves that carry pain fibers. In addition, the external structures of the head are all pain-sensitive and give rise to a variety of headaches.

Headaches may be categorized as either primary or secondary. Primary headaches are pure headache syndromes, meaning they are self-originating and not triggered or produced by other disorders. Primary headaches include migraine, cluster, and tension-type headaches [123]. Secondary headaches, as the name indicates, occur secondary to another cause (i.e., they are a symptom of other diseases). These may include vascular, traumatic, neoplastic, infectious, pressure, and metabolic disorders [123]. Secondary headaches account for only 10% of headaches.

Clinical Manifestations

The various types of headache present with differing symptoms and/or signs. A migraine is a type of neurovascular headache that is initiated by a neurologic event that causes vasodilation, which in turn is interpreted by the brain as pain. Adults with migraine headache describe episodic attacks with pain of moderate-to-severe intensity that are often throbbing in quality, unilateral in position, and aggravated by physical exertion. Migraines are usually associated with nausea, vomiting, and sensitivity to light and sound. Nausea is the most common characteristic. The duration of these attacks, when not treated, may last anywhere from 4 to 72 hours [124].

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

According to the American College of Radiology, the imaging mode of choice for patients who present with sudden onset of severe headache ("worst headache of one's life" or "thunderclap headache") is CT without contrast.

https://acsearch.acr.org/docs/69482/Narrative

Last Accessed: November 9, 2018

Level of Evidence: Expert Opinion/Consensus Statement

Cluster headaches are one of several types of trigeminal autonomic cephalalgias, primary headaches characterized by unilateral pain in the trigeminal nerve region. As defined by the International Headache Society, cluster headaches are attacks of severe unilateral pain in the orbit and/or the surrounding region of the eye that last 15 to 180 minutes [125]. The term "cluster" refers to the headache attacks occurring in daily episodes. The patient is headache-free in between the clusters.

Tension headaches are among the most common headache type seen in practice today. Episodic tension headaches are usually associated with a stressful event. They are of moderate intensity, typically are self-limited, and usually respond well to over-the-counter headache treatments. They are usually described as soreness, tightness, or a band-like pressure around the entire head. They are often accompanied by stiffness in the neck and shoulders [126]. Chronic tension headaches generally have the same pain characteristics as episodic tension headaches, including phonophobia or photophobia. They occur more frequently, with an incidence of at least 15 headaches per month on average for greater than three months, or greater than 180 days in a given year. The headache may last hours, or it may be continuous [125].

Other primary headaches include primary exercise headache, hypnic headache, and headache associated with sexual activity. A secondary headache may be diagnosed when another disorder known to cause headache has been demonstrated; headache occurs in close temporal relation to the other disorder and/or there is other evidence of a causal relationship; and headache is greatly reduced or resolves within three months (this may be shorter for some disorders) after successful treatment or spontaneous remission of the causative disorder. It is helpful to think of secondary headaches in terms of etiologic categories, such as vascular, traumatic, neoplastic, infectious, pressure, metabolic/toxic ingestions, and medication overuse.

Therapeutic Measures

Treatment of headache focuses on pain relief and prevention of recurrence, in the case of primary headaches, or on amelioration of the underlying cause, in the case of secondary headaches. Nonpharmacologic measures tend to be more effective for tension headaches than for migraines or clusters. These measures include the use of hot or cold packs, ultrasound, electrical stimulation, improvement of posture, trigger point injections, regular exercise, and consistent sleep schedules.

Pharmacotherapy with analgesics (e.g., acetaminophen) and migraine-specific agents (e.g., triptans) is often effective. In general, narcotics should be avoided.

TRIGEMINAL NEURALGIA

Trigeminal neuralgia is the most common neurologic disorder to affect the CN V and is also the most frequent of the neuralgias. Paroxysms of recurrent, excruciating, sharp, stabbing pain of short duration along one or more branches of the trigeminal nerve characterize this disorder [69].

Clinical Manifestations

An episode of trigeminal neuralgia is often described as paroxysms of excruciating pain, with a lightening-like stab that burns. The onset is usually abrupt and related to a precipitating event that irritates a "trigger" point. Movements such as speaking, brushing the teeth, washing the face, shaving, laughing, and movements in the maxillary and mandibular divisions of CN V can precipitate an attack [69].

Therapeutic Measures

Standard analgesics are ineffective to address trigeminal neuralgia pain. Morphine provides some relief but is generally contraindicated because of its addictive properties and overdose risk. Phenytoin (Dilantin) may be given intravenously to prevent an acute attack, although long-term use of oral phenytoin is not effective in treating paroxysms of trigeminal neuralgia [64]. Carbamazepine is the usual drug of choice.

Specific Nursing Measures

Preventing attacks of trigeminal neuralgia is the priority of nursing care. Patients should be kept in an environment that avoids exposure to drafts or excessive heat or cold. Patients often lose weight because they fear that chewing movements will precipitate an attack; food choices that avoid excessive chewing can be encouraged. Fearing an episode may also result in patients avoiding washing their faces, performing oral care, or shaving. For patients with loss of corneal sensation, special eye care is necessary to avoid complications [39].

12. DEGENERATIVE CNS DISORDERS

Degenerative CNS disorders are those with an unknown etiology that have an insidious onset and involve atrophy of neurons and nerve fibers. It is not uncommon for degenerative diseases to occur after a long period of normal nervous system functioning [69].

ALZHEIMER DISEASE

Alzheimer disease was first identified and named in 1906 by Dr. Alois Alzheimer, a German neuropathologist [127]. Symptoms seen in individuals with Alzheimer disease are partially the result of damage to the hippocampus and the cerebral cortex, reflected in memory loss, impaired cognition, and atypical behaviors.

Alzheimer disease is characterized by insidious, severe, and progressive cognitive impairment that is irreversible and eventually fatal. Alzheimer disease accounts for roughly 60% to 80% of all dementias in the United States [128]. It proceeds relentlessly, gradually destroying all cognitive functions.

There are two types of Alzheimer disease: familial and sporadic. Familial Alzheimer disease follows an autosomal dominant inheritance pattern, while sporadic Alzheimer disease has no known inheritance factor. Familial Alzheimer disease can be further classified as early-onset, when it occurs in individuals younger than 60 years of age, or late-onset, when it affects individuals older than 60 years of age [129].

Clinical Manifestations

The onset of Alzheimer disease is slow and insidious; impaired memory is usually the initial symptom, followed later by deficits in other cognitive domains. Symptoms may be present for several months before the family realizes the severity of the problem. In some situations, a spouse may shelter and cover for the patient so even children and friends are unaware. In other cases, it is the death of the healthy spouse that causes other family members to recognize the changes that have occurred in the living partner. After the diagnosis of Alzheimer disease, most patients will survive for 4 to 6 years; however, this number can vary from 3 to 20 years [130].

The early stages are especially challenging for patients with Alzheimer disease, as they realize that they are slipping away and are unable to do anything about it; each stage brings with it additional mental, emotional, or physical losses. Inevitably, nearly all patients develop amnesia (memory impairment), aphasia (language impairment), agnosia (inability to identify common objects), apraxia (inability to use objects, despite knowing their function), and visuospatial deficit and may exhibit apathy, depression, or psychosis. Afflicted individuals will become dependent on caregivers for meeting even the most basic physical needs. The model of the progressive cognitive and functional decline in Alzheimer disease as "childhood development in reverse" (i.e., from the functional capacity of a child to that of an infant) is one that is easy for nonmedical family members and caregivers to understand [131].

The disease progresses continuously, and it is useful to remember that staging of Alzheimer disease is an artificial construct meant to assist in diagnosis and management. Presentation of the disease is widely varied in patients, with symptoms and deficits affecting every individual differently or not at all.

Therapeutic Measures

There are no treatments that can cure or reverse the effects of Alzheimer disease. However, Alzheimer disease is not a condition for which nothing can be done. Patients and families can be helped with interventions designed to diminish the manifestations of the disease. The disease and its progression are evaluated by the behaviors exhibited by the individual. Care planning is directed toward the management of the identified behaviors. Although there are many common features, each person is unique and requires distinctive approaches based on an assessment that identifies the specific problems of each individual.

In the preclinical stage, the goal of management for susceptible patients is to prevent and/or delay the onset of the disease. Maintaining a healthy diet and lifestyle, with goals including reduction of oxidative stress and blood pressure and improving circulation, may help in preventing dementia or slowing the rate of disease progression [132]. Dietary, exercise, and pharmacologic treatment guidelines for lowering the risk of obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular disease, and particularly hypertension should be followed, as comorbidities complicate Alzheimer disease treatment and exacerbate the disease process. As noted, there is some evidence that certain nutrients, especially omega-3 fatty acids, can reduce the risk of dementia [133]. Engagement in cognitive activities is also highly recommended.

Management of diagnosed Alzheimer disease consists of pharmacologic and nonpharmacologic therapies. Some pharmacologic agents have shown modest benefits in alleviating problems with cognition and behavior in research settings, though these benefits are often not realized in clinical use [133,134]. These agents include several cholinesterase inhibitors (ChEIs) and memantine, an N-methyl-d-aspartate receptor antagonist [135,136]. The most common adverse effects of ChEIs are nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea, with the most serious being cardiac arrhythmia and other cardiovascular and neurologic effects [133]. Memantine produces fewer adverse effects, and the dropout rate is similar to placebo. Other medications, such as antipsychotic agents and antidepressants, are occasionally necessary, but these agents can cause many unacceptable side effects [135].

Medications for Alzheimer disease may provide temporary improvement in cognition for a subset of patients; however, at present there is no pharmacologic agent or other treatment modality capable of substantially altering the progression of disease. Thus, nonpharmacologic interventions, including social, environmental, and behavioral measures, are the most important elements of a management strategy for patients with Alzheimer disease [137].

Specific Nursing Measures

Patients and family members should be encouraged to make long-term plans after a diagnosis of Alzheimer disease. When the diagnosis is made early in the course of the disease, the patient can and should fully participate. Decisions can be given some thought if they are made before a crisis occurs. The patient and family must be aware of the need for advance planning as a mechanism for protecting the individual's self-determination.

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

The Hartford Institute for Geriatric Nursing asserts that healthcare professionals should maximize the functional capacity of patients with dementia by maintaining mobility and encouraging independence as long as possible; providing graded assistance as needed with activities of daily living; providing scheduled toileting and prompted voiding to reduce urinary incontinence; encouraging an exercise routine that expends energy and promotes fatigue at bedtime; and establishing bedtime routine and rituals.

https://consultgeri.org/geriatric-topics/dementia

Last Accessed: November 9, 2018

Level of Evidence: Expert Opinion/Consensus Statement

Unmet needs can cause the patient with Alzheimer disease to become agitated and anxious. Patients may be unaware of the source of discomfort or be unable to respond to the cues resulting from unmet needs. A routine should be established that will avoid problems resulting from thirst, hunger, lack of sleep and rest, inadequate exercise, and irregular elimination patterns.

For the patient with Alzheimer disease, palliative care is centered on the alleviation of agitation and anxiety, the prevention of catastrophic reactions, and the management of delusions and hallucinations. Comfort may be extended in a number of ways. Members of the interdisciplinary team work together to develop interventions that will facilitate the individual patient's physical and emotional comfort.

PARKINSON DISEASE

Parkinson disease is a neurodegenerative disorder that affects approximately 1% of those older than 60 years of age [138,139]. This disorder is prominently characterized by the motor symptoms of resting tremor, rigidity, and bradykinesia. The non-motor features are increasingly identified and include sensory, autonomic, and neuropsychiatric symptoms that appear before motor dysfunction is evident. The onset is insidious and often asymmetrical. Numerous, potentially disabling non-motor symptoms are often present, and diagnosis is made clinically.

Clinical Manifestations

Parkinson disease is typically diagnosed following the onset of motor features that prompts the patient to seek medical attention. Pre-motor prodromal disease can manifest in non-motor features, such as depression, fatigue, rapid eye movement sleep behavior disorder, anosmia, and constipation, that reflect disease involvement in autonomic, enteric, or somatomotor systems. Visuospatial and cognitive dysfunction, especially mild cognitive impairment with dominant executive dysfunction manifested in diminished multitasking, planning, retrieval, concentration, and attention performance, are increasingly recognized as prevalent in earlier stages [140]. As mentioned, appearance, severity, and progression of pre-motor and motor features corresponds to the nervous system and brain areas afflicted by pathologic infiltration [141,142,143,144].

Motor symptoms can also appear long before diagnosis. In Parkinson disease, the cardinal motor features of bradykinesia, resting tremor, rigidity, and postural/gait impairment reflect parkinsonism [145]. A mnemonic for the core motor features is TRAP [146]:

- Tremor at rest

- Rigidity

- Akinesia (i.e., bradykinesia and hypokinesia)

- Postural instability

It is important to note that postural instability, while a cardinal motor feature, is seldom present at diagnosis, as it usually appears later in the disease course [147].

Therapeutic Measures

Since curative or disease-modifying agents are not yet available, Parkinson disease is treated symptomatically. Treatment strategies for Parkinson disease are influenced by disease stage, most problematic symptoms, and patient age, and clinical decision-making should balance possible efficacy with potential side-effect risk for each treatment option.

Initial treatment of early Parkinson disease generally involves monotherapy, and motor control problems can be improved in many patients. Treatment of later Parkinson disease becomes more complicated, with disease progression and prolonged dopaminergic drug administration. Requirements for dopamine replacement therapy become increasingly demanding as motor signs worsen. Patients initially well controlled using dopamine agonists require initiation of levodopa and, over time, increasing amounts given in higher doses with more frequent intervals. Patients initiated on levodopa will require the addition of dopamine agonists and/or other adjuncts that improve response to levodopa [148].

Surgical treatment is considered in patients with advanced Parkinson disease when optimized medical treatment has failed to control motor symptoms. Deep brain stimulation can reduce symptoms of motor fluctuations, dyskinesia, and tremor, but symptoms unresponsive to levodopa in advanced Parkinson disease (e.g., cognitive impairment, gait instability, mood disorders, speech impairment, autonomic dysfunction) are unlikely to improve and may worsen with deep brain stimulation. Guidelines recommend that deep brain stimulation should only be performed in experienced centers [139].

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

The American Occupational Therapy Association recommends engagement of patients with Parkinson disease in exercise and physical activity, specifically multisession, repetitive physical exercise (diachronic) to improve motor and sensory-perceptual performance skills.

https://www.guidelinecentral.com/summaries/occupational-therapy-practice-guidelines-for-adults-with-neurodegenerative-diseases

Last Accessed: November 9, 2018

Level of Evidence: A or B (There is strong or moderate evidence that occupational therapy practitioners should routinely provide the intervention to eligible clients.)

A variety of nonpharmacologic, adjunctive interventions have been evaluated for management of Parkinson disease. These include exercise programs and occupational, physical, and speech therapies. While clinical study design and control group issues have confounded the quality of evidence, clinical experience suggests that these approaches have value. The American Academy of Family Physicians recommends physical therapy, speech therapy, and occupational therapy be offered to patients with Parkinson disease as part of an overall strategy for improving or maintaining function [139].

AMYOTROPHIC LATERAL SCLEROSIS

ALS is a progressive degenerative CNS disease with a relentless, fatal course. The three major aspects of the disease are progressive muscle atrophy, progressive bulbar palsy, and upper motor neuron deficit [23,24,57].

The course of ALS varies from one to four years. Men are more frequently affected than women at a ratio of about 2:1. Disease onset typically occurs between 40 and 70 years of age, most frequently in the fifth and sixth decades. The cause of ALS is unknown, but researchers are investigating viral, metabolic, infectious, toxic, immunologic, and specific life events as possible causes [23,24,57].

Clinical Manifestations

An EMG of patients with ALS demonstrates muscle wasting, atrophy, fasciculations, and fibrillation. Nerve biopsy is normal; muscle biopsy may demonstrate degenerative fibers interspersed with normal ones. Laboratory tests find normal CSF [23,24,57].

Initial symptoms of ALS include skeletal muscle weakness and atrophy that progresses from distal to proximal and unilateral to bilateral involvement in the upper extremities. Damage to CN IX and CN X leads to dysphagia and aphonia. Swallowing problems affect eating, drinking, and swallowing of saliva. Vagus nerve involvement can also cause dyspnea and bradycardia. Damage to CN XII causes difficulty with tongue movements during swallowing and speech [23,24,57].

Primary lateral sclerosis results in upper motor neuron signs, including spastic paresis of extremities, positive Babinski's reflex, and hyperactive deep tendon reflexes. Progressive muscle spasm may cause pain because of intact afferent nerve fibers. Most patients remain mentally clear. With total paralysis and lower cranial nerve involvement, a "locked-in" syndrome occurs. Patients are fully conscious of the environment and themselves, but experience a paralyzed body—all movement and ability to verbalize are absent. Some patients may only be able to communicate by eyelid movement and blinking. The immediate cause of death is often respiratory muscle weakness and bulbar palsy causing respiratory failure [23,24,57].

Therapeutic Measures

There is no specific or effective treatments for ALS, and it will progress regardless of therapy. Supportive symptomatic therapy is recommended to improve and, in some cases, extend life. Diazepam, baclofen (Lioresal), and dantrolene (Dantrium) may be used to control spasticity. Neostigmine (Prostigmin) is used temporarily to manage bulbar weakness. Analgesics are indicated to control pain.

Efforts should be made to prevent infections, especially of the respiratory tract. In many cases, tracheostomy and mechanical ventilation become mandatory to maintain respiratory function. Regardless of treatment, the prognosis is poor and survival is brief for most patients [23,24,57].

Specific Nursing Measures

A common problem for patients with ALS is ineffective communication patterns related to muscular weakness. As such, patients should be supported with alternative methods of communication. Alteration in nutritional status is possible due to swallowing and chewing impairments. This can be addressed with small, frequent feedings to prevent fatigue and choking; a soft diet high in calories, protein, and carbohydrates; and an adequate daily fluid intake. When feeding patients with ALS, the head of the bed should be elevated, with oropharyngeal suction equipment nearby and adequate time allowed for meals. Tube feedings may be necessary for some patients [39].

Alterations in mobility accompany increased motor paresis. To keep patients independent as long as possible, active and passive range-of-motion exercises and physical and occupational therapy are helpful. Assistive devices may be necessary for daily activities. Patients should remain out of bed and up in a chair as long as their condition permits [39].

Management of ineffective breathing patterns related to muscle weakness or aspiration often becomes a nursing priority. Aspiration may occur from dysphagia and excessive salivation. Preventive measures include monitoring the patient during eating, suctioning if necessary, assessing respiratory patterns around meal times, and administering anticholinergic drugs as ordered. Good oral hygiene should be provided [39].

When respiratory involvement progresses, the maintenance of a patent airway and adequate ventilation also become nursing priorities. Respiratory function should be assessed every one to two hours, including observation of rate, depth, and rhythm of respirations and auscultation of breath sounds. Frequent coughing and deep breathing is encouraged. Monitoring of tidal volume, vital capacity, and arterial blood gasses becomes crucial.

Chest physical therapy, including postural drainage, may be required in addition to nasotracheal and oropharyngeal suctioning every hour and as necessary. Intubation and ventilator equipment should be kept on standby. The most difficult nursing task often becomes helping the patient and family members to accept the seriousness of the condition [39].

SPINAL STENOSIS

Spinal stenosis can occur in older persons with a history of osteoarthritis of the spine or chronic disk degeneration, or it can be a congenital problem. The cervical and lumbar spine are most affected [70].

Cervical Stenosis

Patients with cervical stenosis experience spinal cord compression and gradually progress to spastic quadraparesis or paraparesis, often accompanied by fasciculations and atrophy in the upper extremities. Myelography often demonstrates a complete block of the spinal canal when the patient's head is in extension. When the total bony canal is stenotic, posterior decompression laminectomy is indicated [70].

Lumbar Stenosis

Unlike cervical stenosis, lumbar stenosis is manifested mainly by pain. There is no cord damage or spasticity, although there may be considerable numbness and weakness of the lower extremities. More often, the syndrome is manifested by spinal claudication. The patient has rapidly developing severe pain on walking any distance. Unlike vascular claudication, the patient with spinal claudication obtains relief by bending forward, which widens the anterior-posterior diameter of the spinal canal. Diagnosis of lumbar stenosis is confirmed by spinal x-ray, CT scan, and myelography [70].

Patients with lumbar stenosis usually do well following laminectomy. Despite considerable incisional pain, they tend to ambulate on the first post-operative day and are back to their normal activities by the end of one month [70].

13. IMMUNOLOGIC CNS DISORDERS

MYASTHENIA GRAVIS

Myasthenia gravis is a chronic neuromuscular disorder that affects voluntary (striated) muscles and is characterized by fluctuating muscle weakness that becomes worse with use and shows some improvements with rest. Respiratory infection and emotional stress may briefly exacerbate symptoms. The highest mortality rate is seen in the first year of the disease [23,24].

Myasthenia gravis is relatively common, with incidence estimated at 1 in 10,000 [23,24]. Peak incidence is between the second and third decades; onset is rare in the first decade of life or after 70 years of age. Before 40 years of age, women are affected approximately two to three times as often as men. In later life, the incidence is about equal [23,24].

This disorder usually persists for life, although there may be periods of spontaneous improvement for weeks or months followed by worsening. This disease is not hereditary, but 15% of infants born to mothers with myasthenia gravis have a transient case of the disease. With treatment, infants recover fully in two to three months [23,24].

Despite numerous theories and a great deal of research, the cause of myasthenia gravis remains unknown. There is general agreement that the defect occurs at the neuromuscular junction, and myasthenia gravis is now considered an autoimmune disease. In the healthy individual, there are approximately 38 million acetylcholine receptors at each neuromuscular junction. In the patient with myasthenia gravis, acetylcholine receptors are reduced by about 20% [23,24].

The thymus gland is also considered to be involved in myasthenia gravis. Active from birth until puberty, the gland is thought to initiate the body's immune response and to cease functioning after puberty. In about 85% of patients with myasthenia gravis, however, the thymus gland is abnormal and remains active. An autoimmune reaction is probably triggered by the thymus gland [23,24].

Clinical Manifestations

The most characteristic finding in myasthenia gravis is an increasing weakness of certain voluntary muscles with activity and some improvement with rest. The muscles of the eyes are often most affected. Unilateral or bilateral ptosis and diplopia are common [24].

Other muscles affected are those of facial expression, chewing, swallowing, and speech. When chewing, patients with myasthenia gravis often become fatigued and must rest. Patients may experience problems with management of saliva, choking, and nasal regurgitation. Speech defects include a weak voice that fades during conversation and diminishes to a whisper. Speech becomes nasal, monotonous, and dysarthric [24].

The shoulder and neck muscles are also often affected. The head tends to fall forward, and patients may have difficulty holding their arms above the head; reaching for an object and fixing the hair are difficult. The muscles for fine hand movement can be affected, resulting in difficulty writing, serving, and moving the hands to the mouth. The most life-threatening situation occurs when the intercostal and/or diaphragm muscle are affected. An early sign of respiratory involvement is breathlessness. Respiratory weakness can develop rapidly [24].

Patients with myasthenia gravis may develop a "cholinergic crisis" as a result of taking too high a dose of their cholinesterase inhibitor medication. Signs of cholinergic crisis are dilated pupils, nausea, and tachycardia. A myasthenic crisis is life-threatening due to the increasing weakness of the respiratory muscles caused by a sudden withdrawal of cholinergic medications. In myasthenia gravis, EMG shows that the amplitude of the evoked muscle's action potential decreases rapidly. This reaction can be diminished or prevented with a single 2-mg IV dose of edrophonium [24,31].

Therapeutic Measures

Drug therapy is the first line of treatment of myasthenia gravis. The drugs indicated—pyridostigmine bromide (Mestinon), neostigmine bromide (Prostigmin), and occasionally ambenonium chloride (Mytelase)—act by inhibiting anticholinesterase, preventing the rapid destruction of the neurotransmitter acetylcholine. Although this effect does not change the basic abnormality, it increases the amount of acetylcholine available, partially compensating for symptoms of a defective neuromuscular transmission. Drug dosage should be individualized to provide the greatest symptom relief and the fewest side effects [24].

Corticosteroids may be prescribed for patients who do not respond well to anticholinesterase drugs. The recommended approach is prednisone 100 mg every other day for 10 days. Patients may be hospitalized for close observation during the initial treatment period on full-dose therapy. Symptoms intensify after 7 to 10 days of treatment but improve after treatment ends. This treatment is given with anticholinesterase therapy [24].

The surgical removal of the thymus gland (thymectomy) is indicated for patients with hyperplastic thymuses. This procedure is most effective for young women in the first two years of diagnosis and least effective for older men. Even the removal of the thymus gland without an associated tumor produces a high rate of improvement or remission of symptoms in patients with early onset [24].

Specific Nursing Measures

Myasthenia gravis has largely become a treatable condition. Nursing priorities will depend on whether the patient is stable or in crisis. For patients in crisis, ineffective breathing patterns can develop and the patient experiences an abrupt exacerbation of motor weakness, usually from undermedication resulting from an unresponsive neuromuscular junction [39]. In these cases, the nurse's responsibility is to restore and maintain adequate respiration [39].

Breathing patterns are assessed by taking serial vital capacity measurements. Testing can be done at the patient's bedside with a respirometer attached to a mouthpiece, face mask, or tracheostomy or endotracheal tube. The patient should be in an upright position to promote maximum chest expansion, and emergency respiratory equipment should be available [39].

Another important function to evaluate is the patient's ability to swallow. This may be done by gently placing a hand over the anterior neck and instructing the patient to attempt "dry" swallowing. This maneuver is preferable to giving the patient liquids that might induce choking or aspiration. If the swallowing reflex is intact, the gag reflex should also be evaluated [39].

For patients who develop respiratory failure, endotracheal intubation may be necessary, including a planned tracheostomy. A volume-cycled ventilator should be used during periods of acute respiratory insufficiency. During the acute phase, all anticholinesterase medication should be discontinued to allow a "rest period" for the neuromuscular junction. After the patient's condition stabilizes, small doses may be restarted.

During this period, the patient is generally fed by nasogastric tube. To prevent aspiration, check for proper tube placement before each feeding, verify the amount and type of stomach aspiration, and ensure the patient is in the upright position with an inflated tracheal or endotracheal cuff. Aspiration can lead to major complications for patients with bulbar paralysis [39].

Intensive chest physiotherapy should be carried out during crises to prevent respiratory complications. In addition, a bedside physical therapy program should be instituted to prevent muscle atrophy or contractures. Adequate hydration and anti-embolism support stockings should be used to prevent thrombophlebitis [39].

Patients with myasthenia gravis often experience long-term muscle weakness that worsens with activity and fatigue. Anticholinesterase drugs should be taken at the same time every day, usually 30 to 45 minutes before meals. Patients' strength and motor ability with drug administration and side effects should be monitored. Care planning should include rest periods to prevent excessive fatigue [39].

Incomplete eyelid closure can develop, with corneal abrasion or ulceration a potential problem. Routine eye care is necessary, with normal saline every four to six hours and as needed. Protective eye shields may be used [39].

Patients on long-term anticholinesterase drug therapy may have periods of nausea, diarrhea, abdominal cramping, and constipation. These symptoms may indicate anticholinesterase toxicity. Antiemetics and antidiarrheal agents may be necessary. For patients with constipation, enemas should be avoided; mild cathartics or suppositories may be used. Alterations in diet and fluid regimen may be helpful. Patient education should include information about actions of drugs and specific factors that might precipitate an increase in muscle weakness [39].

MULTIPLE SCLEROSIS

Multiple sclerosis is the most common immune-mediated (inflammatory) demyelinating disorder of the CNS. Most cases are diagnosed in persons between 15 and 45 years of age, and it is a common cause of permanent disability in this segment of the population.

The disease is triggered by events that permit autoactivated T-cells to breach the blood-brain barrier and cross-react with myelin components within the white matter of the brain and spinal cord. This precipitates a cascade of immune-mediated inflammatory tissue injury. As seen on radiographic imaging and pathologic examination, the hallmark of the disease is this well-defined, focal zone of injury ("plaque") containing elements of inflammation, demyelination, and axon degeneration [149,150]. Such lesions may be single or multiple, and over time, they may be partially reparative, relapsing, or recurrent in new locations.

Clinical Manifestations

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

The European Federation of Neurological Societies recommends that conventional MRI should be obtained as soon as possible in all patients presenting with an isolated demyelinating syndrome involving the central nervous system, not only to collect additional evidence for disease dissemination in space, but also to exclude other possible neurologic conditions.

https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/pdf/10.1002/9781444328394.ch3

Last Accessed: November 9, 2018

Strength of Recommendation: A (Established as useful/predictive based on at least one convincing broad, blinded prospective study or at least two narrow prospective studies)

The early signs and symptoms of multiple sclerosis are typically mild and difficult to detect. They differ in duration and severity from one individual to another and at different times in the same individual. However, at first clinical presentation, most patients report multiple symptoms. Patients generally experience either acute attacks of neurologic compromise or are afflicted by a steadily progressive deterioration in functional capabilities, as will be discussed in detail later in this course [151].

Primary symptoms of multiple sclerosis are caused by the inflammation and demyelination that arises within focal areas of the CNS. The clinical presentation is varied but, in general, consists of some disturbance in vision, sensation, and/or motor function. The most common primary symptoms in patients with multiple sclerosis are:

- Fatigue

- Heat sensitivity

- Muscle spasms

- Dizziness

- Pain

- Paresthesias

- Ataxia

- Cognitive changes

- Visual complaints

- Bowel or bladder dysfunction

- Sexual dysfunction

- Gait problems

- Nausea/vomiting

- Speech problems

- Tremor

- Weakness

Secondary symptoms arise as a result of the presence of certain primary symptoms. For example, pressure ulcers may form as a complication of paralysis, a primary symptom. Bladder problems or urinary incontinence can cause frequent, recurring urinary tract infections. These symptoms are treatable, but ideally they should be avoided by treating the primary symptoms.

Tertiary symptoms may be described as the "trickle down" effects of multiple sclerosis and include the social, psychologic, and vocational complications associated with the primary and secondary symptoms [152]. Depression is a frequent tertiary symptom present among people with multiple sclerosis. Social isolation, job loss, marital or interpersonal conflict, and anxiety may all develop as a result of various primary and secondary symptoms of multiple sclerosis.

Therapeutic Measures

There is no cure for multiple sclerosis. However, effective treatment strategies are available to modify the disease course, treat or reduce exacerbations, prevent relapses, manage signs and symptoms, improve overall function and safety, and provide psychologic support. The treatment strategy depends on the patient's clinical condition and disease course. In cases of mild multiple sclerosis without relapses, usually no treatment is necessary. If a patient experiences relapses or if symptoms become more severe, treatment should be initiated as soon as possible.

Treatment of the acute exacerbations seen with relapsing types of multiple sclerosis relies primarily on corticosteroids and adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH). These agents have been found to promote speedier resolution of the neurologic deficits, lessen the severity of an attack, and effectively reduce the risk of permanent residual deficits. Both corticosteroids and ACTH are capable of restoring the breakdown of the blood-brain barrier, reducing inflammation, and immunomodulating mononuclear trafficking mechanisms. Corticosteroids also promote quick recovery from disability [153,154].

It is now known that B-cell immunity also plays a key role in the pathogenesis of multiple sclerosis. Plasma exchange may be beneficial for relapsing forms of multiple sclerosis in which severe neurologic exacerbations prove refractory to parenteral corticosteroid therapy. It may also be beneficial for some patients with severe, rapidly progressive multiple sclerosis and similar disorders.

The use of disease-modifying drugs has been shown to decrease the relapse rate, reduce progression of disability, and slow the accumulation of lesions for patients with relapsing-remitting multiple sclerosis [63,71,155]. The exact mechanism of action of these drugs is still not clear, but it is believed to be the result of immunomodulation regulating the activation of impaired immune cells. Additionally, the blood-brain barrier becomes less permeable with immunomodulation, allowing fewer immune cells to enter the brain and reducing the autoimmune reaction between the immune cells and neuronal tissue.

Specific Nursing Measures

The primary goal of symptomatic multiple sclerosis therapy is to improve quality of life by eliminating or reducing symptoms affecting patients' functional abilities. The approaches to symptomatic treatment focus on controlling the symptom rather than the underlying disease process. Neurorehabilitation together with occupational therapy is the best approach.

14. INFECTIOUS AND INFLAMMATORY CNS DISORDERS

There are four major routes by which pathogens gain access to the CNS. The most common route is via the bloodstream (hematogenous) from septicemia or a septic embolus from endocarditis, lung infection, or pelvic abscess. Pathogens may also enter after trauma, including skull fracture, penetrating wounds, and operative procedures. Non-traumatic infections can occur from otitis media, mastoiditis, sinusitis, and osteomyelitis. Finally, pathogens may enter in a retrograde manner via nerve trunks (e.g., rabies) or thorough the cerebrospinal route from lumbar or ventricular puncture [13].

MENINGITIS

Meningitis is an inflammation of the meninges caused by a viral, bacterial, or fungal organism. There are three major types of meningitis: aseptic, septic, and tuberculous. Aseptic meningitis is thought to occur from viral inflammation or meningeal irritation. Septic meningitis is caused by infection from pus-forming bacteria (e.g., Neisseria meningitidis). Tuberculosis meningitis occurs when the chance location, progression, and rupture of a tubercle (developed following active infection with Mycobacterium tuberculosis) enters the subarachnoid space [23,24].

After a pathogen enters the subarachnoid space, the infection spreads because of the open communication over the brain's convexity along the blood vessels of the pia and then penetrates the sulci. It is not uncommon for affected blood vessels to become engorged, leading to thrombosis or rupture. The accumulation of exudate over the convexities, in the cisterns or the ventricles, can cause obstruction of CSF flow. The exudate may ascend to involve the spinal cord. If the brain surface adjacent to the meninges becomes involved, secondary encephalitis and neuron degeneration can occur [23,24].

Clinical Manifestations

The clinical course of meningitis can be acute, subacute, chronic, or recurrent. Headache, fever, meningeal irritation, and mental status changes are the most common symptoms. Patients often complain of severe headaches, the worst they have ever experienced. Meningeal signs include nuchal rigidity; photophobia; pain down the back and limbs; alterations in mental status and level of consciousness; restlessness; confusion; hallucinations; and delirium. There may be generalized seizures and increased ICP due to cerebral edema and communicating hydrocephalus. Opisthotonos, a sign of meningeal irritation, is manifested by arching of the neck and back. There also may be medullary signs, such as vomiting, respiratory difficulties, and a weak, rapid pulse. Cranial nerve involvement causes visual disturbances, ptosis, pupil abnormalities, strabismus, deafness, nystagmus, and vertigo. In cases of meningococcal meningitis, a skin rash may be present [23,24].

Diagnosis is based on history of prior infection or exposure, symptoms and signs of an existing infection, clinical neurologic signs, and diagnostic tests. Skull x-rays are ordered to evaluate for possible fracture and/or infected sinuses or mastoids. Chest x-rays are ordered to assess for pneumonia and lung abscesses. CSF pressure is often increased to 700 mm/H2O. The appearance of the CSF, as evaluated by lumbar puncture, varies according to the infecting organism. In bacterial infection, the CSF is turbid to purulent. In tubercular infection, the CSF is clear, xanthochromic, or like ground glass. In viral infection, the CSF is usually clear. Glucose levels are low in bacterial and tubercular infections, but normal in viral infections [23,24].

Therapeutic Measures

In bacterial meningitis, culture confirms the type of bacteria and results of sensitivity tests indicate appropriate drug therapy [24]. Prognosis is good with antibiotic therapy.

In the acute phase of meningococcal meningitis, it is possible to infect others by exposure to nasopharyngeal and droplet secretions from the respiratory tract. Isolation procedures to protect others should be maintained until cultures are negative [24].

Specific Nursing Measures

The major burden of care of patients with meningitis occurs in the acute phase of infection. During this period, level of consciousness and neurologic signs should be frequently assessed. As noted, appropriate infection control precautions are important. Patients with meningococcal meningitis or meningitis of unknown etiology are kept in isolation [33].

Patients will have a febrile period during which temperature is monitored every one to two hours if higher than 101oF (38oC). Tepid sponge baths, frequent skin care, axillary and groin compresses, and antipyretic drugs may be ordered. If shivering develops, chlorpromazine (Thorazine) may be administered [33].

Fluid volume deficits can occur due to fever and inadequate intake. As such, serum electrolytes should be monitored daily during febrile periods. Oral fluids, intravenous fluids, and/or tube feedings are given as needed. Intermittent or in-dwelling bladder catheterization may be necessary for patients with impaired levels of consciousness [33].

Sensory perceptual deficits can occur because of photophobia, hyperalgesia, and hyperirritability. A quiet, dark, non-stimulating environment and limited visiting hours can help reduce photophobia. The potential impact of hypoxia or bladder distention on irritability should be ruled out before considering it a neurologic problem. For headache management, keep the head of the bed elevated, unless contraindicated, with good body alignment and repositioning every two hours [33,64]. Pneumococcal and influenza immunizations are the best preventive measures [33].

ENCEPHALITIS

Encephalitis is an infection of brain tissue caused by a virus (most common), pyogenic bacteria, fungi, or parasite. Epidemic encephalitis begins in a reservoir and is transmitted to humans. For example, equine encephalitis begins in squirrels, horses, wild birds, chickens, frogs, or garter snakes; a mosquito or tick bites the reservoir animal and transmits the virus when it bites a human host. Incubation periods vary according to the host's susceptibility to, reaction to, and strength of the pathogen [23,24].

Encephalitis begins with the pathogen gaining access to the CNS. This is followed by degeneration and destruction of cortical neurons with demyelination. Patches of hemorrhage, necrosis, and cavitation can occur, depending on the type of pathogen involved. Diffuse cerebral edema results [23,24].

Viruses are the most common pathogens. Herpes simplex virus has the potential to cause acute encephalitis in the adult and neonatal encephalitis from exposure during vaginal delivery or in the first days of life. Other latent viruses that can cause encephalitis include herpes zoster virus, cytomegalovirus, Epstein-Barr virus, mumps, rabies, and measles [23,24].

Clinical Manifestations

A prodromal illness often precedes the neurologic signs associated with encephalitis. Usual initial symptoms are headache, fever, malaise, sore throat, and myalgia. This is often followed by marked alteration in level of consciousness ranging from lethargy to coma. Confusion and disorientation with abrupt behavioral disturbances may occur. Objective signs include motor and sensory deficits, tremor, and ataxia. Hyperirritability, meningeal signs, and seizures are possible [23,24].

Therapeutic Measures

Clinical management of encephalitis is mainly symptomatic and supportive. There is no curative drug therapy, but steroids such as dexamethasone (Decadron) may be used to combat cerebral edema. Not all patients recover completely. Those surviving an acute episode can have residual neurologic deficits, including seizures, dysphasia, memory loss, and/or personality changes [24].

Specific Nursing Measures

Nursing priorities for patients with encephalitis are similar to those for patients with meningitis, with several major differences. Patients with acute encephalitis have more marked alterations in level of consciousness and behavioral manifestations; restlessness, agitation, and dementia are more severe [33].

Neurologic deficits may increase rapidly due to cerebral edema and necrosis. Neurologic signs are monitored frequently during the acute stage, with any changes reported promptly. There is potential for fluid volume overload related to intravenous antiviral administration. To combat this, drugs are administered on a strict schedule and intake and output are maintained. Patients should be observed for other possible drug side effects, including nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, weight loss, and transient alterations in blood cell and liver function tests. Other nursing measures include elevating the head of the bed and monitoring electrolyte levels and respiratory and cardiac status [33].

MYELITIS

Myelitis is an inflammation of the spinal cord. The most common viral diseases causing myelitis are poliomyelitis and herpes zoster [70].

Clinical Manifestations

The viruses that cause myelitis usually have an affinity for motor and sensory neurons rather than spinal tracts. Clinical findings in patients experiencing spinal cord involvement include paresis, numbness of the feet and legs (more than upper extremities), dysuria, and sometimes headache and stiff neck. Neurologic involvement can extend to the brain stem, cerebellum, cerebrum, and optic nerves in some patients [70].

Therapeutic and Nursing Measures

Treatment is supportive. Nursing care is aimed at preventing hazards of immobility and alterations in comfort. Bed rest is usually indicated during the acute phase of the illness. It is important that rehabilitation measures be instituted early [33].

INTRACRANIAL ABSCESS

An abscess may form around or within the brain as a result of a local or systemic foci of infection. Intracranial abscesses are purulent, usually encapsulated collections. Although abscesses can form anywhere in the brain, the most common sites are the temporal lobes, the frontal lobe, and the cerebellum [13].

Most brain abscesses develop secondary to a primary source of infection. Of these, at least 40% are caused by mastoiditis, otitis media, or sinusitis. A smaller percentage result from direct invasion by traumatic injury, such as gunshot wound, basilar skull fractures, or compound skull fractures with dural tears [13].

Clinical Manifestations

During the initial stage of organism invasion of the brain, the patient experiences chills, fever, malaise, and appetite loss. The almost common presenting symptom of an intracranial abscess is headache, which may be associated with vomiting and papilledema. Other common presenting symptoms are alterations in level of consciousness (especially drowsiness and confusion) and partial or generalized seizures. Focal neurologic deficits vary according to the anatomic location of the abscess. These include various motor, sensory, and speech disturbances [13].

In contrast, a subdural abscess tends to produce even more profound symptoms than brain abscesses. A subdural abscess affects the cortical blood vessels, causing thrombosis, arteritis, and eventually ischemia. The abscess usually arises from sinusitis. Headache occurs, with rapid deterioration in neuralgic status including seizures, hemiplegia, and dysphasia. Without treatment, brain compression or abscess rupture into the ventricle or subarachnoid space can be fatal [13].

Diagnosis is usually made by history of a previous infection, neurologic exam, and CT scan. A lumbar puncture is not recommended, because a brain abscess acts as a mass lesion and the negative pressure created by the procedure can lead to a brain shift and herniation. The most important diagnostic test is CT scan, which can demonstrate displacement of the lateral ventricles and locate the abscess, which is observed as an area of decreased density [13].

Therapeutic Measures

Interventions are aimed at diagnosing and managing the primary infection source, providing for abscess drainage, and administering an effective antibiotic regimen. Most intracranial abscesses can be drained via bur hole aspiration. Some may require more than one aspiration. If the abscess has ruptured into the ventricles, ventricular drainage is used. Antibiotic therapy is given for at least six weeks to reduce virulence of the organism, eliminate the pathogen, and penetrate the cavity. Prognosis is usually good after an effective regimen of antibiotics and/or surgery [13].

Specific Nursing Measures

Management of the acute infection is a priority of nursing care for patients with intracranial abscess. Intravenous drug administration sites should be inspected and rotated every 48 to 72 hours to prevent thrombosis phlebitis. During antibiotic therapy, patients are at risk and should be assessed for the development of opportunistic infections, especially in the mouth and gastrointestinal tract [39].

Sudden increases in ICP can result from cerebral edema that may surround an acute abscess. Frequent assessment of neurologic and vital signs, head of bed elevation to 30o, restricted fluid intake, and avoiding any stimulants that can raise ICP are necessary components of care [39].

Seizures are also a concern. Anticonvulsants may be ordered, with periodic checking of serum blood levels. During actual seizures, the patient should be protected from self-injury and helped to maintain a patent airway. Interventions for headache include providing a quiet environment, changing position to promote comfort, and administering mild analgesics, as ordered. Patient education should focus on preparing patients psychologically and physically for surgery (to aspirate the abscess and to provide intrathecal medication). Discharge teaching should include methods of preventing future abscesses if caused by an infected tooth, otitis media, or sinus problem [39].

HERPES ZOSTER

Herpes zoster (also known as shingles) is a viral disorder that affects the posterior root ganglia. It is characterized by cutaneous eruptions of vesicles along the distribution of involved spinal or cranial nerve roots. The highest percentage of cases involve spinal ganglia. Outbreaks occur mainly in adults and are more common in women than men and during the spring and fall [8,32,34].

Herpes zoster develops from reactivation of varicella virus, which is responsible for chickenpox. Children without immunization can develop chickenpox if exposed to an adult with shingles [8,32,34].

Clinical Manifestations

Mild-to-severe neuralgic pain in the affected nerve root distribution is the most common presenting symptom of shingles. The pain may be burning, tingling, sharp, or dull. Pain may be concurrent with or followed by skin reddening and an eruption of vesicles. Over the next one to two weeks, these lesions become pustules and then develop a crust. After healing, a pigmented scar may appear. If an infection or ulceration accompanies the vesicles, the scarring may be permanent [8,32,34].

Diagnosis is usually based on the sudden onset of root pain followed by the characteristic distribution of shingles. The lesions are unilateral and do not cross the midline of the body [8,32,34].

There are potential complications from a herpes zoster outbreak, most commonly scarring of the skin, facial palsies, and postherpetic neuralgia. In elderly or immunocompromised patients, the neuralgia can persist for months or years. The skin may also be hypersensitive to touch. Unfortunately, this variant does not respond well to treatment. Less commonly, some individuals develop Guillain-Barré syndrome following a herpes zoster outbreak [8,32,34].

Therapeutic Measures

Most treatment of herpes zoster outbreaks is aimed at giving local care to the vesicles. Topical corticosteroids can alleviate local pain and itching and may shorten the stage of vesicle eruption. Antibiotics may be administered to prevent or treat secondary infections. During the acute phase, bed rest and analgesics can be supportive [8,14].

Antiviral medications (e.g., acyclovir) may be used to limit duration of outbreaks and help prevent postherpetic neuralgia [21]. Early treatment (within 72 hours of symptom onset) is most effective. Antiviral therapy should continue for 7 to 21 days.

Postherpetic neuralgia is a difficult condition to treat. Intractable cases may require neurosurgical sectioning of affected nerve roots or occasionally irradiation to the site. Treatment results are variable [8,14].

Specific Nursing Measures

The primary objective of nursing management of patients with shingles is symptom management (to minimize discomfort) and care of interruptions in skin integrity. Patients should be instructed to avoid scratching vesicles to prevent spreading the virus and promoting infection. Open vesicles should be dressed with moist occlusive dressings. If systemic steroid therapy is used, it is important to monitor for side effects. Comfort measures to address localized pain and itching include positioning techniques (especially during bed rest), skin treatment, and analgesics as ordered [33].

15. NEOPLASTIC AND OBSTRUCTIVE CNS DISORDERS

Tumors within the cranium can be either primary or metastatic. Metastatic tumors are found predominantly within the substance of the brain, which they reach through the systemic circulation.

Tumors produce symptoms by invasion or compression of surrounding neural structures. The neurologic symptoms and signs of any tumor affecting the brain depend on the location of the tumor and its rate of growth. Disruption of neural structures can cause an insidious deterioration of neurologic function or an acute neurologic disturbance. Spinal cord tumors can cause spinal cord compression and related pain and other symptoms [27].

16. TRAUMATIC DISORDERS

Craniocerebral trauma is a major cause of death in persons between 1 and 44 years of age and contributes to more deaths than stroke in persons 45 to 64 years of age [60,62]. Nearly 6.5 million head injuries occur yearly in the United States. The highest incidence occurs in young, previously healthy men. Serious injury leads to permanent disability and emotional devastation for the patient, and the cost of long-term rehabilitation and maintenance programs have a tremendous impact on the healthcare system [60,62].

HEAD TRAUMA

Serious cerebral injury can result from a number of factors, including motor vehicle, sports, and industrial accidents a well as assaults and falls. The skull is a rigid sphere filled to capacity with contents that are basically noncompressible. These components include CSF, the vascular system, and brain tissue. All maintain a fairly constant volume; an increase in the volume of one intracranial component occurs at the expense of the others or results in an increase in ICP. Early signs of increasing ICP include restlessness, irritability, and a gradual decrease in the level of consciousness. Lumbar punctures are contraindicated during periods of increasing ICP because herniation of brain structures into the foramen magnum may cause depression of vital centers in the brain [60,62].

Among the methods for classifying head injuries are mechanism and severity of injury. Mechanisms include direct (acceleration or deceleration) and indirect causes. A direct acceleration injury occurs when the stationary head is struck by a moving object, such as a baseball. A direct deceleration injury occurs when the head in motion strikes an immovable object, such as when a person falls from a bicycle onto the pavement. In an indirect injury, the traumatic force is not directly applied to the head but is usually the result of shaking or slamming the body to the extent that the brain hits the skull [60,62].

Another major classification is closed or open head injury, referring to whether the skull and the dura mater are intact. A closed head injury is a non-penetrating, blunt injury with no break in the integrity of the skull and dura mater. Brain concussions, contusions, and lacerations may occur with either type of injury. Brain stem compression from increasing ICP occurs late and can cause herniation and death [60,62]

An important phenomenon in closed head injury is coup-contrecoup. A coup injury is bruising of the brain directly below the point of injury resulting from impact to the skull; there are visible signs of injury. Contrecoup refers to the rebound effect of injury—the mass movement of the brain opposite to the site of impact. For example, a blow to the frontal region (coup) causes damage to the occipital region (countercoup) of the brain [60,62].

In open head trauma, a penetrating injury breaks the integrity of the skull or dura. Cerebral contusions or lacerations occur. The most frequent fractures are linear, at the base of the skull. Depressed and comminuted fractures are less frequent, but more serious, because of dural tears and lacerations of brain tissue. Infection is a high risk in open head injuries. Cerebral edema develops with any head injury and should be treated as early as possible [60,62].

Clinical Manifestations

The location of a skull fracture is most crucial for determining damage to the underlying structure: the meninges, blood vessels, and the brain itself. Fractures are classified as linear, diastatic, depressed, compound, growing, or basilar [60,62].

Linear skull fractures are usually simple breaks in bone continuity anywhere in the skull. These fractures are typically less complicated. Depressed skull fractures are caused by trauma from sharper, penetrating injuries that commonly result in brain lacerations and infection. A compound skull fracture is a scalp laceration along with a depressed skull fracture. Debris (e.g., hair, dirt, foreign material) penetrates into the wound. The dura may or may not be torn. A basilar skull fracture involves injury to the base of the skull. Basilar skull fractures can indicate severe trauma and should be suspected in any significant head injury [60,62]. Diastatic and growing fractures occur more often in children whose cranial sutures are not yet fused.

Traumatic brain injury is classified as a concussion, contusion, or laceration that may or may not be associated with vascular rupture and cardinal nerve damage. A concussion is considered the most benign form of brain injury. It is characterized by a loss of consciousness for five minutes or less and memory loss of events preceding and following trauma. Other symptoms may include dizziness, spots before the eyes, and a dazed state [60,62].

A cerebral contusion is a bruising of the brain. There may be petechial hemorrhage of cortical tissue and white matter, with tearing of the pia mater. Contusions cause unconsciousness that persists for longer than five minutes. An initial period of shock is followed by signs of cerebral irritability [60,62].

A cerebral laceration is a tearing of the brain tissue followed by intracerebral bleeding. Prolonged unconsciousness, immediate neurologic deficits, and a deterioration in condition can be expected [60,62].

The major vascular hemorrhages from trauma include epidural, subdural, and intracerebral hematomas. Most epidural hematomas are from arterial bleeds. Classically, the trauma causes an initial loss of consciousness, followed by a lucid interval. Rapid and often unexpected unconsciousness follows. Epidural hematomas require prompt surgical intervention [60,62].

Subdural hematomas are collections of blood from clots in the subdural space between the arachnoid and dura that usually involve venous bleeding. Acute hematoma occurs within 48 hours; subacute occurs within two weeks; and chronic types have an onset more than two weeks after injury. Subdural hematomas can develop over an entire hemisphere. Chronic subdural hematomas can increase in size over time, probably due to rebleeding [60,62].

Acute subdural hematomas are often associated with massive cerebral or brain-stem injury. Although bleeding is mostly venous, it develops quickly, with a rapid onset of symptoms. Common clinical symptoms and signs include worsening headache, drowsiness, confusion, slow responses, and restlessness. A critical sign of deterioration is an ipsilateral dilation of the pupil that becomes unreactive [60,62].

An intracerebral hematoma, a collection of blood in brain tissue, is a complication in a small percentage of all head traumas. The hematoma may accompany the contrecoup phenomenon [60,62].

Therapeutic Measures

The treatment of head trauma often involves both medical and surgical approaches. The initial management of patients with head trauma includes diagnosis of injury and assessment for potential respiratory problems or injury to other systems. The primary focus is on maintenance of a patent airway and appropriate blood pressure, monitoring of ICP, and appropriate antibiotic therapy, as necessary. Hyperventilation therapy is employed in patients with severe head trauma to decrease PCO_2, reducing cerebral vasodilation and ICP [60,62]. Treatment of cerebral edema includes use of dehydrating agents, such as mannitol, that withdraw water from intracranial tissue. The presence of mental clarity and appropriate behavior indicates a positive response to therapy [60,62].

Specific Nursing Measures

As noted, the initial nursing priority for the care of the patient with acute head injury is maintenance of effective airway clearance and breathing pattern. Compromised respiration leads to increased ICP, which causes ischemia. Patients with alterations in level of consciousness are at greatest risk for hypoventilation, and these patients should be monitored for airway patency and adequate pulmonary toilet. When transferring patients from one area to another, a bag-valve mask should be available if needed [39].

Patients who have sustained a traumatic head injury should be immobilized and not manipulated until cervical injury is ruled out by x-ray or CT scan. Neck hyperextension, flexion, and rotation should be avoided; manipulation can cause airway obstruction or can seriously complicate a cervical injury. If respiratory resuscitation is required, the jaw-thrust maneuver can be used. The mouth and oropharynx should be cleared of foreign bodies, and gentle oropharyngeal suctioning can be done to maintain an effective airway. Nasal suctioning is contraindicated. If the airway is not patent, endotracheal intubation or a tracheostomy will be indicted [39].

Patients with potential for respiratory complications may be repositioned after the cervical spine is stabilized and/or injury is ruled out. The semiprone lateral position facilitates drainage of secretions. Position should be changed at least every two hours. Chest excursions, breath sounds, and respiratory rate, rhythm, and pattern are assessed every one to two hours (or as necessary). Arterial blood gases are monitored initially, after four hours, and subsequently as necessary. Neurologic dysfunction can cause specific changes in respiratory patterns, such as Cheyne-Stokes respirations, and ataxic breathing patterns can indicate an impending respiratory arrest [39].

The neurologic status of the patient with acute head trauma should be assessed immediately after respiratory airway patency is established. Level of consciousness is the single most important aspect of the clinical nursing observation. Consciousness is assessed on a continuum from full reaction to no reaction to various kinds of stimuli. The bilateral corneal reflex should also be assessed on schedule [39].

Care of patients with basal skull fractures includes assessment for bilateral periorbital ecchymosis hemorrhages, Battle sign (an ecchymosis of the mastoid region), and hemotympanum (blood behind the eardrum). CSF leaks may present as rhinorrhea or otorrhea. The nose or ear should not be probed or irrigated if a CSF leak is suspected. If drainage occurs, collect the fluid to test for the presence of glucose. A glucose-positive result can confirm a CSF leak, as glucose is present in CSF but not in mucus. If drainage cannot be collected for testing, carefully inspect the patient's gown and linen. The "halo" sign, a combination of bloody or darker drainage encircled by a lighter yellowish stain, signifies a bloody leakage of CSF from the nose or ears. Basal skull fractures are considered serious head injurers due to the proximity of the fracture site to vital brain stem areas, damage to which can result in severe respiratory and cardiac dysfunction. Patients should be assessed frequently for alterations in urologic, respiratory, or cardiac status [39].

SPINAL CORD INJURY

The vast majority of spinal pathology results from traumatic injury. The highest incidence is in young men in the second and third decades of life, and the leading causes are motor vehicle accidents, sports accidents (e.g., football, diving), and penetrating injuries (e.g., gunshot or stab wounds) [70].

Fracture-dislocations can occur anywhere along the spine. Cervical injuries, the most common, are usually related to flexion-extension maneuvers during traumatic injury. Fracture-dislocations in the thoracic and lumbar areas usually arise from compression injuries, as in falls from high places. Spinal column fracture-dislocations may also result from pathologic bone processes [70].

Dislocation fractures of the high cervical vertebrae (C-1 to C-2) can occur as a result of fractures or congenital defects from arthritic changes that weaken the ligaments in this area. A forward movement of the skull and C-1 and C-2 vertebrae can compress the cervical cord [70].

Clinical Manifestations

The extent of a patient's functional loss following injury depends on the degree of spinal cord injury. Complete spinal cord transection causes a total and irreversible loss of motor and sensory function below the level of injury [70].

In the cervical areas, millimeters can be crucial for spinal nerve-root function. With cervical cord transection, quadriplegia (paralysis of all four extremities) results, with varying degrees of respiratory and arm paralysis, depending on the injury level. Cord transection of the thoracic spine through L-1 and L-2 causes paraplegias (paralysis of both legs). In a complete cord transection, the individual sustains an immediate flaccid paralysis, loss of sensation, and usually loss of reflexes below the level of injury. Some reflexes may be intact initially and then disappear within a few days. The loss can last for days, weeks, or several months. As paralysis subsides, reflexes usually return and flaccidity changes to involuntary spastic movement. Recovery of any motor or sensory function is rare when there is complete paralysis of these functions for several days after injury [70].

With incomplete spinal-cord injuries, degrees of sensory and motor defect below the level of damage vary, resulting in one of several spinal cord syndromes [70]. A number of factors are examined to assess the degree of spinal cord damage. The first consideration may be the mechanism of injury. A compression of the cord can occur from ligaments, bone, and herniated disk material or hematomas. A contusion causes a bruising of the cord. In transection injuries, the spinal cord is actually or physiologically severed. Hematomyelia can occur within the cord substance [70].

Another important factor influencing the degree of spinal injury is the diameter of the spinal canal, or the amount of space the spinal cord has to move while avoiding compression. This factor is especially crucial in the cervical area. Spinal cord necrosis can result from a number of factors, including disturbances in circulation causing poor cord perfusion, edema, and progressive hemorrhage of central gray matter [70]. Neurons do not regenerate within the cord substance.

Therapeutic Measures

Evidence Based Practice Recommendation

The American Association of Neurological Surgeons recommends expeditious and careful transport of patients with acute cervical spine or spinal cord injuries from the site of injury by the most appropriate mode of transportation available to the nearest capable definitive care medical facility. Whenever possible, the transport of these patients to specialized acute spinal cord injury treatment centers is recommended.

https://www.cns.org/guidelines/guidelines-management-acute-cervical-spine-and-spinal-cord-injuries

Last Accessed: November 9, 2018

Level of Evidence: III (Strategy for patient management for which the clinical utility is uncertain.)

In cases of acute spinal cord injury, the patient's spine should be handled with extreme caution. Patients with spinal cord trauma and neurologic deficits need special attention during transport to prevent further deterioration in neurologic status. Spinal precautions should include the use of a backboard and hard cervical collar. Pressure sore development is a common complication during long transports and care should be taken to pad all bony prominences. Administration of methylprednisolone or similar medication for spinal cord injury is a requisite and should be initiated and subsequently continued throughout transport. Any life-threatening injury to another body system or signs of systemic shock should be treated immediately. For emergency life support, the neck should not be hyperextended. In most trauma units, early fixation and spinal traction have replaced decompression laminectomies [70].

Another goal of therapy is to reverse the effects of vertebral body fractures. Neurosurgery replaces the injured vertebra with bone, acrylic, or a combination. The advantage of acrylic is early mobilization for the patient, whereas bone fusion requires some internal fixation. For patients who remain unstable, a halo frame and body jacket vest are applied for several months, until stabilization is achieved. In the lower thoracic and lumbar areas, internal fixation can be achieved using rods [70].

Patients with spinal cord injury are at greatest risk in the first 7 to 10 days after trauma. During this time, shock, pulmonary dysfunction, infection, and paralytic ileus can be major problems. Patients who sustain quadriplegic injuries require intensive total medical and nursing management. The posttraumatic care of these patients mainly involves management of bladder and bowel dysfunction, skin care, nutrition maintenance, and physical therapy [70].

Specific Nursing Measures

Continuous monitoring of the patient's neurologic status, including respiratory, motor, and sensory functions, is essential. Level of consciousness and pupillary response should also be assessed. Progression of any neurologic deficit should be reported immediately [39].

With high cervical lesions, there will be ineffective airway clearance and alterations in breathing patterns. Many patients require endotracheal or tracheostomy tubes with ventilator support. Oxygen administration will be ordered by tracheostomy tube, tracheostomy collar, or ventilator [39].

High cervical injuries frequently cause respiratory arrest. During this emergency, the jaw-thrust maneuver is used for resuscitation. The patient then requires careful nasotracheal intubation or an emergency tracheostomy. For patients admitted with respiratory function intact, respiration should be carefully observed. During spinal shock, it is not uncommon for the level of injury to ascend one or two levels above actual damage due to massive spinal cord edema. When this occurs, patients may develop respiratory dysfunction and/or arrest, even if they did not have the problem initially. These patients are at high risk for pulmonary complications such as pneumonia and atelectasis (hypoventilation). Other possible complications include decreased cardiac output, decreased venous pressure, and severe hypotension [39].

To alleviate early cerebral or spinal-cord edema, large doses of intravenous or intramuscular glucocorticoids are often given. This may cause gastric distress or other side effects, such as behavioral changes, elevated glucose levels, and an acne-like rash [39].

Patients who have sustained a spinal injury are also at risk for abdominal distention and paralytic ileus. Nothing should be given by mouth until bowel sounds return. If necessary and not contraindicated, a rectal tube may be used to relieve abdominal distention. For patients with ulcer histories, cimetidine (Tagamet) may be ordered with steroids to prevent gastrointestinal bleeding [39].

The plan of care should include measures to prevent hazards of immobility, emboli, skin breakdown, and bowel and bladder dysfunction. It may be helpful to begin a bowel management program by administering a cleansing enema. To establish a bowel reflex, a combination of bulk in the diet, stool softeners, prune juice, and daily suppositories is provided. When the patient resumes eating, an oropharyngeal suction machine may be kept at the bedside for safety [39].

Patients should be assessed for symptoms and signs of thrombophlebitis and pulmonary embolism; in many cases, patients are unable to give subjective reports of calf pain [39]. One of the most important steps to prevent pressure ulcers is physically repositioning the patient frequently. Repositioning should be done every one to two hours, depending on the patient's condition. Every time the patient is repositioned, look for areas of redness and make sure that the new position does not put weight on these areas.

Perhaps the most sensitive area of nursing care is the patient's psychologic reaction to paralysis. Body image and the patient's future plans have been suddenly and irrevocably altered. It is vital to assess available support systems and prevent sleep deprivation and sensory overload [39]. The range of emotion the patient experiences should be recognized and validated, with the goal of supporting the patient in progressing toward eventual acceptance and resolution. Patients should be encouraged to make as many decisions about their care as possible to help regain a sense of control over self and environment [39].

The acceptance of permanent disability may take a long time and should not be forced; denial can be beneficial for a time. Nurses can be empathetic listeners who can accurately reflect the patient's comments and feelings [39].

After vertebral fractures fuse, patients can be transferred to stretcher chairs. Hypotension and dizziness may occur during this process, so mobilization should be done progressively. Abdominal binders and anti-embolism stockings can help decrease hypotensive episodes and periods of dizziness [39].

Sexual dysfunction is a major concern that patients may or may not verbalize. Factors that determine future potential for sexual function include the anatomic level of injury, the patient's personality and former sexual experience, and the effectiveness of sexual counseling. The most important fact to convey is that a caring, loving relationship is possible after injury [39].

Autonomic dysreflexia is possible with patients who sustain high thoracic lesions (above the T-6 level). This condition results from abnormal autonomic responses (usually pain or discomfort below the level of injury). Bladder or bowel distention or skin stimulation can trigger the response. Autonomic dysreflexia is an emergency that may lead to increased ICP and severe hypertension. When symptoms occur, the patient's head should be elevated to lower blood pressure, the patency of the indwelling catheter should be assessed, and patients should be evaluated for a possible fecal impaction. Antihypertensive drugs may be necessary. The nurse can help prevent episodes of dysreflexia by preventing conditions that result in stimulus overload, fecal impaction, or bladder distention [39].

17. CONCLUSION

With knowledge of CNS structure and function and the dynamic pathology that intrudes and impedes normal function, nurses are more prepared to provide quality and often lifesaving care to patients. An awareness of symptoms' precipitating events leads to quicker reporting of changes in the patient's condition, and immediate interventions can be performed based on standing orders and the patient's needs. This changes what could be only technical care to professional care through the use of informed decision-making skills.

18. CASE STUDIES

CEREBROVASCULAR ACCIDENT

Patient A, 85 years of age, wakes in the morning to paralysis on his whole right side and no sensation in his arm or leg. He tries to get up with help from his wife but cannot. Mrs. A calls their physician and describes the situation. The physician instructs her to call 911 to have her husband taken to the hospital by ambulance, where he will meet them. Patient A protests but ultimately cooperates with emergency medical services when they arrive. He is quickly evaluated upon arrival in the emergency department and is admitted to the critical care unit (CCU).

Past Medical History

Patient A lives with his wife in their own home in a lower-middle class neighborhood. They have four sons who are living in different parts of the country. Until five years ago, Patient A had worked as a house painter.

Patient A's wife provides the patient's medical history. Patient A has not had any significant illness until two years ago, when he began to develop bilateral cataracts. Since then, he has consumed increasing amounts of alcohol as the encroaching cataracts impaired his ability to pursue his hobby of building ship models. Six months ago, the cataracts were successfully removed and lenses implanted. Since then, Patient A's alcohol consumption has decreased and he has resumed work on his models.

Mrs. A reports no knowledge of high blood pressure, heart disease, lung disease, kidney disease, cancer, or any other serious medical illness in the patient. He has no history of surgery or serious injuries during their 65 years of marriage.

Assessment and Diagnosis

Upon admittance to the CCU, a full physical exam is conducted (Table 1). Several laboratory tests are ordered, with the following results:

- Complete blood count with differential: Within normal limits

- Serum electrolyte levels: Within normal limits

- Serum glucose level: Mildly elevated

Based on the results of the assessment, Patient A is diagnosed with:

- CVA (thrombosis or aneurysm of left middle cerebral artery), with right hemiparalysis and hemiparesis and questionable aphasia

- Benign prostatic hypertrophy

Table 1: PATIENT A'S PHYSICAL EXAM RESULTS

Parameter

Findings

General appearance

Semiconscious and aphasic. Made no attempt to respond verbally to questions.

Height: 5 feet 9 inches (175 cm)

Weight: 163 pounds (74 kg)

Head and eyes

Face flushed

Pupils equal, round, reactive to light, accommodation

Corneal reflexes present

Unable to test extraocular muscle function

Nasal passage clear, with septum deviated to the left

Edentulous, full dentures not in place, gums without lesions

Tongue deviated to the left when protruded spontaneously

Facial drooping on left

Ears

Tympanic membranes intact and clear

No history of impaired hearing

Chest

Symmetrical excursion while lying in bed

Lungs clear to auscultation and percussion

Breath sounds diminished in the bases

Abdomen

Flat

Bowel sounds present in all quadrants

Soft and without masses or organomegaly on palpation

Extremities

Flaccid right arm and leg

Genitourinary system

Normal adult male with smooth, enlarged prostate gland

Neurologic status

Spontaneous respirations with regular variation in depth and rate

Deep tendon reflexes in arms and femorals: 2+

Deep tendon reflexes in popliteals, posterior tibials, and dorsalis pedis: 1+

Spontaneous movement and active response to pain in left arm and leg

Grimace but no movement with pain in right extremities

Cardiovascular system

Heart sounds consisted of normal S_1, S_2, and S_3

Soft systolic ejection murmur heard at second intercostal space to right of sternum

Vital Signs

Blood pressure

200/110 mm Hg

Temperature

100° F

Heart rate

86 bpm and regular

Respiratory rate

22 breaths per minute and stertorous

Oxygen mask in place with flow at 8 L/min

Source: Author

Management

When Patient A is admitted to the CCU, the nurse orients him and his wife to the physical layout and pertinent policies of the unit. The nurse also completes an initial physical assessment while carrying out the medical and nursing orders for supportive management. Nursing actions include:

- Continue oxygen by mask at 8 L/min and obtain arterial blood gas sample.

- Take vital signs every 15 minutes until stable, then every 30 minutes for two hours, then increasing interval until every four hours.

- Complete neurologic checks every hour.

- Insert IV devices and administer dextrose 5% in water (D5W) at a rate of 100 mL/hour.

- Insert 16F indwelling urinary catheter connected to a urinometer.

- Monitor and record intake and output every hour.

- Suction oropharynx to stimulate coughing and remove secretions.

- Frequent oral care, including Patient A's usual denture care routine.

- Repositioning every two hours, with body kept in functional alignment.

- Skin care and some passive range of motion with each turning so all joints are exercised every eight hours.

- Administer ordered medications:

- Acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin): 650 mg every six hours

- Sodium nitroprusside (Nipride) infusion: As needed to maintain systolic arterial pressure between 170 and 180 mm Hg

Twelve hours after admission, the nurse assessing Patient A notes that his eyes are half open, with ptosis of the right eyelid, and eye movements occur when the nurse or his wife speaks his name. Patient A's right cheek is more flaccid than the left. His right arm and leg are limp with no muscle tone. There is some grasp strength in the patient's left hand, although he does not grasp on command. Patient A responds with grunts to painful stimuli but does not attempt to speak, follow commands, or answer questions.

Study Questions

1. Outline a complete neurologic status assessment.

2. How did the physician conclude that Patient A's CVA involved the left side cerebral artery?

3. What signs and symptoms would alert the nursing staff to occlusion of the left anterior or posterior cerebral artery?

4. Why did the physician order sodium nitroprusside to keep Patient A's systolic arterial pressure between 170 and 180 mm Hg?

5. What nursing diagnoses or nursing problems and outcomes assume priority in the acute care period of a CVA?

6. What other disciplines would be expected to assist in rehabilitation of a patient with a CVA? When should disciplines such as physical and occupational therapy be expected to begin working with the patient?

ACUTE PYOGENIC MENINGITIS

Patient B is a white woman, 67 years of age, who felt well until approximately one week ago, when she developed an upper respiratory tract infection. She has improved slowly, but during the past 48 hours she has developed a more severe cough with significant production of rust-colored sputum, fever with occasional shaking chills, and muscle aches. Patient B arrives at the hospital emergency department. She is transported by her husband, who was concerned when the patient woke in the morning mildly confused and complaining of a severe headache.

At the hospital, Patient B informs the physician (with some difficulty concentrating) that she has had a "bad cold" for about a week. She explains that her neck feels stiff, sore, and extremely painful when she tilts her head forward and bright lights hurt her eyes. She also tells the physician that she has had no skin rashes, nausea, or vomiting but has had some severe chills. She does not recall any of her recent contacts being ill, and she denies any difficulty breathing or chest pain.

Past Medical History

Patient B denies any past history of head trauma, sinus infection, immunodeficiency disorders, or medications that cause immunosuppression. She has smoked a half-pack of cigarettes each day for the last 45 years, was diagnosed with emphysema five years ago, and had several severe episodes of chronic bronchitis and one episode of pneumonia in the past two years. Her emphysema is being managed with ipratropium bromide delivered with a metered-dose inhaler (two to four puffs every six hours). She has never suffered from episodes of angina or symptoms of heart failure. She has an allergy to peanuts but not to any medications. She is taking no medications other than ipratropium and combined estrogen plus progestogen therapy for menopausal symptoms. The patient was vaccinated for influenza six months previously and pneumococcus when she turned 65 years of age.

Assessment and Diagnosis

Upon admittance to the CCU, a full physical exam is conducted (Table 2). A blood chemistry panel, chest x-rays, and lumbar puncture are ordered. Chest x-ray finds shadows on the right middle and lower lobe consistent with pneumonia; the left lung is clear but hyperinflated. Several laboratory tests are ordered, with the following results:

- Hematocrit: 41%

- Hemoglobin: 14.8 g/dL

- Red blood cells: 5.2 million/mL

- White blood cells: 14,000/mL (90% neutrophils)

- Platelets: 280,000/mL

- Sodium: 145 meq/L

- Potassium: 5.0 meq/L

- Chloride: 110 meq/L

- Calcium: 9.3 mg/dL

- Bicarbonate: 22 meq/L

- Fasting blood glucose: 123 mg/dL

- Blood urea nitrogen: 12 mg/dL

- Creatinine: 1.0 mg/dL

- CSF white blood cells: 1,100/mL (predominately neutrophils)

- CSF protein: 1,254 mg/dL

- CSF glucose: 40 mg/dL

- CSF gram stain: Positive for encapsulated diplococci

- CSF culture: Positive for Streptococcus pneumoniae

- Sputum gram stain: Positive for diplococci

Table 2: PATIENT B'S PHYSICAL EXAM RESULTS

Parameter

Findings

General appearance

Slight female in acute distress, with headache, intermittent chills, and constant coughing. Appears older than her stated age.

Height: 5 feet 0 inches (152.5 cm)

Weight: 97 pounds (44 kg)

Head and eyes

Normocephalic with no signs of head injury

Pupils equal at 3 mm, round and sluggishly reactive to light

Difficult to view fundi due to photophobia, but no papilledema observed

Nares slightly flared, purulent discharge visible

Pharynx red with purulent postnasal drainage

No tonsillar exudates

Mucous membranes moist

Ears

Within normal limits

Neck

Stiff and painful with flexion

Shows mild anterior cervical lymphadenopathy

Chest

Significant use of accessory muscles

Breath sounds markedly decreased in right middle and lower lobes

Crackles present at right posterior axillary line

Clear left lung, both upper and lower lobes

Abdomen

Flat, soft, non-distended, with no tenderness to palpation

Bowel sounds present in all four quadrants and within normal limits

No masses, bruits, or organomegaly

Extremities

Peripheral pulses full and symmetric in all extremities

No cyanosis, rashes, or edema upon careful inspection

Mild clubbing

Genitourinary system

Normal adult female

Neurologic status

Oriented, but conversation is slightly confused

Level of consciousness assessed at 14 on Glasgow Coma Scale

Cranial nerves intact, including eye movements

Strength 5/5 and symmetric throughout

Deep tendon reflexes 2+ and symmetric

Gait steady

Positive Kernig and Brudzinski signs

Cardiovascular system

Distinct S_1 and S_2 with no murmurs or gallops

Regular rate and rhythm

Skin warm, moist, and pale

Vital Signs

Blood pressure

160/74 mm Hg (right arm sitting)

Temperature

101.5° F

Heart rate

115 bpm and regular

Respiratory rate

24 breaths per minute and slightly labored

Oxygen mask in place with flow at 8 L/min

Source: Author

Based on the physical examination and results of diagnostic testing, a preliminary diagnosis of meningitis is made. Patient B is admitted to the hospital for treatment and continued observation.

Study Questions

1. List clinical manifestations that strongly suggest that a patient has developed meningitis.

2. Why is it appropriate for the physician to examine the patient for a head injury?

3. Define papilledema and explain the significance of lack of papilledema in this patient.

4. Explain the pathophysiology behind this patient's lymphadenopathy.

5. Is the patient's rating on the Glasgow Coma Scale normal or abnormal?

6. Based on all of the available test data, what is an appropriate neurologic diagnosis for Patient B?

7. How did this patient's neurologic condition probably develop?

8. Which type of white blood cell predominates in the blood and CSF of patients with acute bacterial meningitis?

Works Cited

1. Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development. What are Common Treatments for Cerebral Palsy? Available at https://www.nichd.nih.gov/health/topics/cerebral-palsy/conditioninfo/treatments. Last accessed November 6, 2018.

2. McCance KL, Huether SE. Pathophysiology: The Biologic Basis for Disease in Adults and Children. 8th ed. St. Louis, MO: Mosby; 2018.

3. Copstead LE. Pathophysiology. 6th ed. St. Louis, MO: Mosby; 2018.

4. Mitchell RN, Robbins SL. Pocket Companion to Robbins and Coltran Pathologic Basis of Disease. 8th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Saunders; 2012.

5. Rowland MD. Merritt's Neurology. 11th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins; 2005.

6. Rae-Grant A. Weiner and Levitt's Neurology. 8th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Wolters Kluwer Health/ Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2008.

7. Nowak T. Pathophysiology: Concepts and Applications for Health Care Professionals. 3rd ed. Boston, MA: McGraw-Hill; 2011.

8. Biller J. Practical Neurology. 5th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Wolters Kluwer; 2017.

9. Galvagno SM. Emergency Pathophysiology: Clinical Applications for Prehospital Care. Jackson, WY: Teton NewMedia; 2013.

10. Hall J. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology. 13th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Elsevier; 2016.

11. Campbell WW, Dejong RN. DeJong's The Neurologic Examination. 7th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Wolters Klower; 2012.

12. Ellenbogen RG, Sekhar LN, Kitchen D. Principles of Neurological Surgery. 4th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Elsevier; 2018.

13. Berg SM, Bittner EA. Massachusetts General Hospital Review of Critical Care Medicine. Philadephia, PA: Wolters Kluwer, Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins; 2014.

14. Hankey G, Wardlaw JM. Clinical Neurology. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2008.

15. Singh A. Case-Based Neurology. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2012.

16. Futrell N, Jamieson DG. Vascular Neurology. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2008.

17. Gulanick. Nursing Care Plans: Diagnoses, Interventions, and Outcomes. 9th ed. St. Louis, MO: Elsevier Health Sciences; 2017.

18. Haberland C. Clinical Neuropathology. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2007.

19. Araim RJ, Aghlar MR. Neuromuscular Quick Pocket Reference. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2012.

20. Howard J. Neurology Video Textbook. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2013.

21. Chen N, Li Q, Yang J, Zhou M, Zhou D, He L. Antiviral treatment for preventing postherpetic neuralgia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2014;(2):CD006866.

22. DiPiro J. Pharmacotherapy A Pathophysiologic Approach. 10th ed. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill; 2017.

23. Zane RD, Kosowsky JM. Pocket Emergency Medicine. 3rd ed. Philadelphia, PA: Wolters Kluwer; 2015.

24. Markovchick VJ, Pons PT, Bakes KM, Buchanan JA. Emergency Medicine Secrets. 6th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Elsevier; 2016.

25. Grossman SC, Porth CM. Pathophysiology: Concepts of Altered Health States. Philadephia, PA: Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins; 2014.

26. Bruyere HJ Jr. 100 Case Studies in Pathophysiology. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins; 2009.

27. Bope ET, Kellerman RD, Conn HF. Conn's Current Therapy 2016. Philadelphia, PA: Elsevier; 2016.

28. Marshall RS, Mayer SA. On Call Neurology. 3rd ed. Philadelphia, PA: Elsevier; 2007.

29. Nelms M. Nutrition Therapy and Pathophysiology. 3rd ed. Boston, MA: Cengage Learning; 2016.

30. Ackley BJ, Ladwig GB, Flynn Makic MB. Nursing Diagnosis Handbook: An Evidence-Based Guide to Planning Care. 11th ed. St. Louis, MO: Elsevier; 2017.

31. Zerwekh JA, Claborn JC. Mosby's Pharmacology Memory Notecards. 4th ed. St. Louis, MO: Elsevier; 2015.

32. Buttaro T, Trybulski J, Polgar-Bailey P, Sandberg-Cook J. Primary Care: A Collaborative Practice. 5th ed. St. Louis, MO: Elsevier; 2017.

33. Hickey JV. The Clinical Practice of Neurological and Neurosurgical Nursing. 7th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins; 2014.

34. Domino FJ. The 5-Minute Clinical Consult Standard 2016. 24th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins; 2015.

35. Ford SM, Roach SS. Roach's Introductory Clinical Pharmacology. 10th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins; 2014.

36. Caplan L. Caplan's Stroke: A Clinical Approach. 5th ed. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press; 2016.

37. Ferrell BR, Paice JA. Oxford Textbook of Palliative Nursing. 5th ed. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2019.

38. Ehrman J, Gordon PM, Visich PS, Keteyian SJ. Clinical Exercise Physiology. 3rd ed. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics Publishing; 2013.

39. Baird MS. Manual of Critical Care Nursing: Nursing Interventions and Collaborative Management. 7th ed. St. Louis, MO: Mosby; 2016.

40. Ladwig GE, Ackley B, Flynn Makic MB. Mosby's Guide to Nursing Diagnosis. 5th ed. St. Louis, MO: Elsevier; 2016.

41. Barkauskas VH, Baumann LC, Darling-Fisher CS. Health and Physical Assessment. 3rd ed. St. Louis, MO: Mosby; 2002.

42. Black JM, Hawks JH, Luckmann J. Medical Surgical Nursing: Clinical Management for Positive Outcomes. 8th ed. Philadelphia, PA: W.B. Saunders; 2009.

43. Brashers VL. Clinical Applications of Pathophysiology: Assessment, Diagnostic Reasoning and Management. 2nd ed. St. Louis, MO: Mosby; 2002.

44. Hall JE, Guyton A. Textbook of Medical Physiology. 13th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Elsevier; 2016.

45. Huether SE, McCance KL. Understanding Pathophysiology. 6th ed. St. Louis, MO: Mosby; 2017.

46. LeMone P. Medical Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care. 5th ed. Boston, MA: Pearson; 2014.

47. Bullock BA. Focus on Pathophysiology. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott; 2000.

48. Corwin EJ. Handbook of Pathophysiology. 3rd ed. Philadelphia, PA: Wolters Kluwer; 2015.

49. Price SA. Pathophysiology: Clinical Concepts of Disease Processes. 6th ed. St. Louis, MO: Mosby; 2003.

50. Patten JP. Neurological Differential Diagnosis. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Springer; 2000.

51. Johnson MV. Principles of Drug Therapy in Neurology. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2008.

52. Wilson BA, Shannon MT, Shields KM. Pearson Nurse's Drug Guide for 2017. Boston, MA: Pearson Publishing; 2017.

53. Plum F, Posner JB. Diagnosis of Stupor and Coma. 3rd ed. New York, NY: Oxford University Press; 2000.

54. Wilson BA, Shannon MT, Shields KM. Pearson Nurse's Drug Guide 2011. New York, NY: Pearrson; 2011.

55. Alberstone CD, Steinmetz MP. Anatomic Basis of Neurologic Diagnosis. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Thieme Publishing; 2011.

56. Rubin D, Daube JR. Clinical Neurophysiology. 4th ed. Oxford, Oxford University Press; 2016.

57. Bedlack RS, Mitsumoto H. Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis: A Patient Care Guide for Clinicians. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2013.

58. Harvey R, Stein J. Stroke Recovery and Rehabilitation. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2014.

59. Cristian A. Medical Management of Adults with Neurologic Disabilities. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2009.

60. Cifu DX, Caruso D. Traumatic Brain Injury. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2010.

61. Prahlow N, Kincaid JC, Buschbacher RM. Neuromuscular Rehabilitation. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2014.

62. Zasler ND, Katz DI. Brain Injury Medicine: Principles and Practice. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2013.

63. MedlinePlus. Interferon Beta-1b Injection. Available at https://medlineplus.gov/druginfo/meds/a601151.html. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

64. Perret D, Chang EY, Hata J, Chen H, Tribuzio B. The Pain Center Manual. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2014.

65. Berg AT, Berkovic SF, Brodie MJ, et al. Revised terminology and concepts for organization of seizures and epilepsies: report of the ILAE Commission on Classification and Terminology, 2005–2009. Epilepsia. 2010;51(4):676-685.

66. Mulley JC, Scheffer IE, Harkin LA, Berkovic SF, Dibbens LM. Susceptibility genes for complex epilepsy. Hum Mol Genetics. 2005;14(R2):R243-R249.

67. Engel J Jr, International League Against Epilepsy. A proposed diagnostic scheme for people with epileptic seizures and with epilepsy: report of the ILAE Task Force on Classification and Terminology. Epilepsia. 2001;42(6):796-803.

68. National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke. The Epilepsies and Seizures: Hope Through Research. Available at https://www.ninds.nih.gov/Disorders/Patient-Caregiver-Education/Hope-Through-Research/Epilepsies-and-Seizures-Hope-Through. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

69. Fuller G, Manford M. Neurology: An Illustrated Colour Text. 3rd ed. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone Publisher; 2010.

70. Bryce TN. Spinal Cord Injury. New York, NY: Demos Medical; 2010.

71. MedlinePlus. Interferon Beta-1a Subcutaneous Injection. Available at https://medlineplus.gov/druginfo/meds/a604005.html. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

72. Blumenfeld H. Neuroanatomy Through Clinical Cases. 2nd ed. Sunderland, MA: Sinouer Associates; 2010.

73. Caplan LR. Uncommon Causes of Stroke. 3rd ed. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press; 2018.

74. Greer DM. Acute Ischemic Stroke. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley-Liss; 2007.

75. Hennerici MG. Case Studies in Stroke: Common and Uncommon Presentations. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press; 2007.

76. Benjamin EJ, Virani SS, Callaway CW, et al. Heart disease and stroke statistics—2018 update: a report from the American Heart Association. Circulation. 2018;137(12):e67-e492.

77. National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute. 2012 NHLBI Incidence and Prevalence Chart Book on Cardiovascular and Lung Diseases. Available at https://www.nhlbi.nih.gov/files/docs/research/2012_ChartBook_508.pdf. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

78. National Stroke Association. Hemorrhagic Stroke Fact Sheet. Available at http://www.stroke.org/sites/default/files/resources/NSAFactSheet_HemorrhagicStroke_2014.pdf. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

79. Manno EM, Atkinson JL, Fulgham JR, Wijdicks EF. Emerging medical and surgical management strategies in the evaluation and treatment of intracerebral hemorrhage. Mayo Clin Proc. 2005;80(3):420-433.

80. Shah QA, Ezzeddine MA, Qureshi AI. Acute hypertension in intracerebral hemorrhage: pathophysiology and treatment. J Neurol Sci. 2007;261(1-2):74-79.

81. Morgenstern LB, Hemphill JC 3rd, Anderson C, et al. Guidelines for the management of spontaneous intracerebral hemorrhage: a guideline for healthcare professionals from the American Heart Association/American Stroke Association, American Heart Association Stroke Council and Council on Cardiovascular Nursing. Stroke. 2010;41(9):2108-2129.

82. Counsell C, Boonyakarnkul S, Dennis M, et al. Primary intracerebral hemorrhage in the Oxfordshire Community Stroke Project: prognosis. Cerebrovasc Dis. 1995;5:26-34.

83. Flaherty ML, Haverbusch M, Sekar PK, et al. Long-term mortality after intracerebral hemorrhage. Neurology. 2006;66(8):1182-1186.

84. Poon MT, Fonville AF, Al-Shahi Salman R. Long-term prognosis after intracerebral hemorrhage: systematic review and meta-analysis. J Neurol Neurosurg Psychiatry. 2014;85(6):660-667.

85. Sutherland GR, Auer RN. Primary intracerebral hemorrhage. J Clin Neuroscience. 2006;13:511-517.

86. Qureshi AI, Tuhrim S, Broderick JP, Batjer H, Hondo H, Hanley DF. Spontaneous intracerebral hemorrhage. N Engl J Med. 2001;344:1450-1460.

87. Ritter MA, Droste DW, Hegedüs, et al. Role of cerebral amyloid angiopathy in intracerebral hemorrhage in hypertensive patients. Neurology. 2005;64(7):1233-1237.

88. Kernan WN, Viscoli CM, Brass LM, et al. Phenylpropanolamine and the risk of hemorrhagic stroke. N Engl J Med. 2000;343:1826-1832.

89. Suarez JI, Tarr RW, Selman WR. Aneurysmal subarachnoid hemorrhage. N Engl J Med. 2006;354(4):387-396.

90. van Gijn J, Rinkel GJ. Subarachnoid haemorrhage: diagnosis, causes and management. Brain. 2001;124(pt 2):249-278.

91. Niewwkamp DJ, de Wilde A, Wermer MJ, Algra A, Rinkel GJ. Long-term outcome after aneurysmal subarachnoid hemorrhage—risks of vascular events, death from cancer and all-cause death. J Neurol. 2014;261(2):309-315.

92. Mayer SA, Kreiter KT, Copeland D, et al. Global and domain-specific cognitive impairment and outcome after subarachnoid hemorrhage. Neurology. 2002;59(11):1750-1758.

93. MedlinePlus. Cerebral Arteriovenous Malformation. Available at https://medlineplus.gov/ency/article/000779.htm. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

94. Flaherty ML, Haverbusch M, Kissela B, et al. Perimesencephalic subarachnoid hemorrhage: incidence, risk factors, and outcome. J Stroke Cerebrovasc Dis. 2005;14(6):267-271.

95. Konczalla J, Kashefiolasl S, Brawanski N, Senft C, Seifert V, Platz J. Increasing numbers of nonaneurysmal subarachnoid hemorrhage in the last 15 years: antithrombotic medication as reason and prognostic factor? J Neurosurg. 2016;124(6):1731-1731.

96. Muir KW, Buchan A, von Kummer R, Rother J, Baron JC. Imaging of acute stroke. Lancet Neurol. 2006;5(9):755-768.

97. Jauch EC, Saver JL, Adams HP Jr, et al. Guidelines for the early management of patients with acute ischemic stroke: a guideline for healthcare professionals from the American Heart Association/American Stroke Association. American Heart Association Stroke Council, Council on Cardiovascular Nursing, Council on Peripheral Vascular Disease, Council on Clinical Cardiology. Stroke. 2013;44:870-947.

98. Jauch EC. Ischemic Stroke. Available at https://emedicine.medscape.com/article/1916852-overview. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

99. Powers WJ, Derdeyn CP, Biller J, et al. 2015 American Heart Association/American Stroke Association focused update of the 2013 guidelines for the early management of patients with acute ischemic stroke regarding endovascular treatment: a guideline for healthcare professionals from the American Heart Association/American Stroke Association. Stroke. 2015;46(10):3020-3035.

100. Birschel P, Ellul J, Barer D. Progressing stroke: towards an internationally agreed definition. Cerebrovasc Dis. 2004;17(2-3):242-252.

101. Hayashi K, Kitagawa N, Takahata H, et al. Endovascular treatment for cervical carotid artery stenosis presenting with progressing stroke: three case reports. Surg Neurol. 2002;58(2):148-154.

102. Du Mesnil de Rochemont R, Sitzer M, Neumann-Haefelin T, Harmjanz A, Berkefeld J. Endovascular recanalization of acute atherothrombotic carotid artery occlusion holds up progressive stroke. Neuroradiology. 2004;46(7):583-586.

103. Rerkasem K, Rothwell PM. Systematic review of the operative risks of carotid endarterectomy for recently symptomatic stenosis in relation to the timing of surgery. Stroke. 2009;40:e564-e572.

104. Kernan WN, Ovbiagele B, Black HR, et al. Guidelines for the prevention of stroke in patients with stroke and transient ischemic attack: a guideline for healthcare professionals from the American Heart Association/American Stroke Association. Stroke. 2014;45(7):2160-2236.

105. Winstein CJ, Stein J, Arena R, et al. AHA/ASA guidelines for adult stroke rehabilitation and recovery: a guideline for healthcare professionals from the American Heart Association/American Stroke Association. Stroke. 2016;47(6):e98-e169.

106. Langhorne P, Stott DJ, Robertson L, et al. Medical complications after stroke: a multicenter study. Stroke. 2000;31(6):1223-1229.

107. Giles MF, Rothwell PM. Risk of stroke early after transient ischemic attack: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Lancet Neurol. 2007;6(12):1063-1072.

108. Albers GW, Caplan LR, Easton JD, et al. Transient ischemic attack-proposal for a new definition. N Engl J Med. 2002;347(21):1713-1716.

109. Easton JD, Saver JL, Albers GW, et al. Definition and evaluation of transient ischemic attack: a scientific statement for healthcare professionals from the American Heart Association/American Stroke Association Stroke Council; Council on Cardiovascular Surgery and Anesthesia; Council on Cardiovascular Radiology and Intervention; Council on Cardiovascular Nursing; and the Interdisciplinary Council on Peripheral Vascular Disease. Stroke. 2009;40(6):2276-2293.

110. Gladstone DJ. Toward an emergency response to transient ischemic attacks. Postgrad Med J. 2005;117(1):9-14.

111. Fisher CM. Transient ischemic attacks. N Engl J Med. 2002;347(21):1642-1643.

112. Johnston SC, Gress DR, Browner WS, Sidney S. Short-term prognosis after emergency department diagnosis of TIA. JAMA. 2000;284(22):2901-2906.

113. Levy DE. How transient are transient ischemic attacks? Neurology. 1988;38(5):647-677.

114. Henry GL, Johnston SC, Pinkowish MD. Acute neurologic symptoms—TIA, migraine, or something else? Patient Care. 2004;38(3):50-56.

115. Nanda A. Transient Ischemic Attack. Available at https://emedicine.medscape.com/article/1910519-overview. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

116. Ko DY. Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures. Available at https://emedicine.medscape.com/article/1184608-overview. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

117. Epilepsy Foundation. Types of Seizures. Available at https://www.epilepsy.com/learn/types-seizures. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

118. Stanford Hospital and Clinics. Generalized Seizures. Available at https://stanfordhealthcare.org/medical-conditions/brain-and-nerves/epilepsy/types/generalized-seizures.html. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

119. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Epilepsy. Available at https://www.cdc.gov/epilepsy/index.html. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

120. Ko DY. Epilepsy and Seizures. Available at https://emedicine.medscape.com/article/1184846-overview. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

121. Adamolekun B. Seizure Disorders. Available at https://www.merckmanuals.com/professional/neurologic-disorders/seizure-disorders/seizure-disorders. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

122. St. Louis EK, Rosenfeld WE, Bramley T. Antiepileptic drug monotherapy: the initial approach in epilepsy management. Curr Neuropharmacol. 2009;7:77-82.

123. Scottish Intercollegiate Guidelines Network. Diagnosis and Management of Headache in Adults: A National Clinical Guideline. Edinburgh: Scottish Intercollegiate Guidelines Network; 2008.

124. World Health Organization. Headache Disorders. Available at http://www.who.int/en/news-room/fact-sheets/detail/headache-disorders. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

125. International Headache Society. The International Classification of Headache Disorders, 3rd edition (beta version). Cephalalgia. 2013;33(9):629-808.

126. MedlinePlus. Tension Headache. Available at https://medlineplus.gov/ency/article/000797.htm. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

127. National Institute on Aging. Basics of Alzheimer's Disease and Dementia. Available at https://www.nia.nih.gov/health/alzheimers/basics. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

128. Alzheimer's Association. 2018 Alzheimer's Disease Facts and Figures. Available at https://www.alz.org/media/Documents/facts-and-figures-2018-r.pdf. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

129. National Institute on Aging. What Causes Alzheimer's Disease? Available at https://www.nia.nih.gov/health/what-causes-alzheimers-disease. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

130. Alzheimer's Association. Stages of Alzheimer's. Available at https://www.alz.org/alzheimers-dementia/stages. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

131. Kuller LH, Lopez OL, Becker JT, et al. Risk of dementia and death in the long-term follow-up of the Pittsburgh Cardiovascular Health Study–Cognition Study. Alzheimers Dement. 2016;12(2):170-183.

132. Solfrizzi V, Frisardi V, Seripa D, et al. Mediterranean diet in predementia and dementia syndromes. Curr Alzheimer Res. 2011;8(5):520-542.

133. Winslow BT, Onysko MK, Stob CM, Hazlewood KA. Treatment of Alzheimer disease. Am Fam Physician. 2011;83(12):1403-1412.

134. Seltzer B. Cholinesterase inhibitors in the clinical management of Alzheimer's disease: importance of early and persistent treatment. J Int Med Res. 2006;34(4):339-347.

135. National Institute on Aging. How is Alzheimer's Disease Treated? Available at https://www.nia.nih.gov/health/how-alzheimers-disease-treated. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

136. Alzheimer's Association. Medications for Memory. Available at https://www.alz.org/alzheimers-dementia/treatments/medications-for-memory. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

137. Beier MT. Treatment strategies for the behavioral symptoms of Alzheimer's disease: focus on early pharmacologic intervention. Pharmacotherapy. 2007;27(3):399-411.

138. DeMaagd G, Philip A. Parkinson's disease and its management. Part 1: disease entity, risk factors, pathophysiology, clinical presentation, and diagnosis. PT. 2015;40(8):504-532.

139. Gazewood JD, Richards DR, Clebak K. Parkinson disease: an update. Am Fam Physician. 2013;87(4):267-273.

140. Williams DR, Litvan I. Parkinsonian syndromes. Continuum (Minneap Minn). 2013;19(5):11890-11212.

141. Braak H, Ghebremedhin E, Rüb U, Bratzke H, Del Tredici K.
Stages in the development of Parkinson's disease-related pathology. Cell Tissue Res. 2004;318(1):121-134.

142. Schrag A, Horsfall L, Walters K, Noyce A, Petersen I. Prediagnostic presentations of Parkinson's disease in primary care: a case-control study. Lancet Neurol. 2015;14(1):57-64.

143. Braak H, Bohl JR, Muller CM, et al. Stanley Fahn Lecture 2005: the staging procedure for the inclusion body pathology associated with sporadic Parkinson's disease reconsidered. Mov Disord. 2006;21(12):2042-2051.

144. Williams DR, Lees AJ. How do patients with parkinsonism present? A clinicopathological study. Intern Med J. 2009;39(1):7-12.

145. Massano J, Bhatia KP. Clinical approach to Parkinson's disease: features, diagnosis, and principles of management. Cold Spring Harb Perspect Med. 2012;2(6):a008870.

146. Mhyre TR, Boyd JT, Hamill RW, Maguire-Zeiss KA. Parkinson's disease. Subcell Biochem. 2012;65:389-455.

147. Postuma RB, Berg D, Stern M, et al. MDS clinical diagnostic criteria for Parkinson's disease. Mov Disord. 2015;30(12):1591-1599.

148. Jenner P. Treatment of the later stages of Parkinson's disease: pharmacological approaches now and in the future. Transl Neurodegener. 2015;4:3.

149. Compston A, Coles A. Multiple sclerosis. Lancet. 2008;372(9648):1502-1517.

150. Koch-Henriksen N, Sørensen PS. The changing demographic pattern of multiple sclerosis epidemiology. Lancet Neurol. 2010;9(5):520-532.

151. Frohman TC, O'Donoghue DL, Northrop D (eds). Multiple Sclerosis for the Physician Assistant: A Practical Primer. New York, NY: National Multiple Sclerosis Society; 2011.

152. National Multiple Sclerosis Society. Symptoms and Diagnosis. Available at https://www.nationalmssociety.org/Symptoms-Diagnosis. Last accessed October 23, 2018.

153. Sellebjerg F, Barnes D, Filippini G, et al. EFNS guideline on treatment of multiple sclerosis relapses: report of an EFNS task force on treatment of multiple sclerosis relapses. Eur J Neurol. 2005;12(12):939-946.

154. Goodin DS, Frohman EM, Garmany GP, et al. Disease modifying therapies in multiple sclerosis: report of the Therapeutics and Technology Assessment Subcommittee of the American Academy of Neurology and the MS Council for Clinical Practice Guidelines. Neurology. 2002;58(2):169-178.

155. MedlinePlus. Interferon Beta-1a Intramuscular Injection. Available at https://medlineplus.gov/druginfo/meds/a693040.html. Last accessed October 23, 2018.http://www.netce.com/

Evidence-Based Practice Recommendations Citations

1. Brown MD, Burton JH, Nazarian DJ, Promes SB, American College of Emergency Physicians. Clinical policy: use of intravenous tissue plasminogen activator for the management of acute ischemic stroke in the emergency department. Ann Emerg Med. 2015;66(3):322-333. Available at https://www.annemergmed.com/article/S0196-0644(15)00576-4/fulltext. Last accessed November 9, 2018.

2. Krumholz A, Wiebe S, Gronseth GS, et al. Evidence-based guideline: management of an unprovoked first seizure in adults: report of the Guideline Development Subcommittee of the American Academy of Neurology and the American Epilepsy Society. Neurology. 2015;84(16):1705-1713. Available at https://www.aan.com/Guidelines/home/GetGuidelineContent/688. Last accessed November 9, 2018.

3. Douglas AC, Wippold FJ II, Broderick DF, et al. ACR Appropriateness Criteria: Headache. Reston, VA: American College of Radiology; 2013. Available at https://acsearch.acr.org/docs/69482/Narrative. Last accessed November 9, 2018.

4. Fletcher K. Nursing Standard of Practice Protocol: Recognition and Management of Dementia. In: Boltz M, Capezuti E, Fulmer T, Zwicker D (eds). Evidence-Based Geriatric Nursing Protocols for Best Practice. 4th ed. New York, NY: Springer Publishing Company; 2012. Available at https://consultgeri.org/geriatric-topics/dementia. Last accessed November 9, 2018.

5. Preissner K. Occupational Therapy Practice Guidelines for Adults with Neurodegenerative Diseases. Bethesda, MD: American Occupational Therapy Association, Inc.; 2014. Available at https://www.guidelinecentral.com/summaries/occupational-therapy-practice-guidelines-for-adults-with-neurodegenerative-diseases. Last accessed November 9, 2018.

6. Filippi M, Rocca A, Arnold DL, et al. Use of imaging in multiple sclerosis. In: Gilhus NE, Barnes MP, Brainin M (eds). European Handbook of Neurological Management. 2nd ed. Vol. 1. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell; 2011. Available at https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/pdf/10.1002/9781444328394.ch3. Last accessed November 9, 2018.

7. Theodore N, Aarabi B, Dhall SS, et al. Transportation of patients with acute traumatic cervical spine injuries. In: Guidelines for the management of acute cervical spine and spinal cord injuries. Neurosurgery. 2013;72(Suppl 2):35-39. Available at https://www.cns.org/guidelines/guidelines-management-acute-cervical-spine-and-spinal-cord-injuries. Last accessed November 9, 2018.